initial commit of ebook 8107HEADmain

5 files changed, 8621 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/8107-8.txt b/8107-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a2e8828
--- /dev/null
+++ b/8107-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8605 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Principal Navigations, Voyages,
+Traffiques, and Discoveries of The English Nation, v. 6, by Richard Hakluyt
+#9 in our series by Richard Hakluyt
+
+Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the
+copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing
+this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook.
+
+This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project
+Gutenberg file.  Please do not remove it.  Do not change or edit the
+header without written permission.
+
+Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the
+eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file.  Included is
+important information about your specific rights and restrictions in
+how the file may be used.  You can also find out about how to make a
+donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved.
+
+
+**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts**
+
+**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971**
+
+*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!*****
+
+
+Title: The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques, and Discoveries
+       of The English Nation, v. 6
+       Madiera, The Canaries, Ancient Asia, Africa, etc.
+
+Author: Richard Hakluyt
+
+Release Date: May, 2005 [EBook #8107]
+[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule]
+[This file was first posted on June 15, 2003]
+
+Edition: 10
+
+Language: English/Latin
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-Latin-1
+
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, V6 ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Karl Hagen <kthagen@polysyllabic.com>
+
+
+
+
+** Transcriber's Notes **
+
+The printed edition from which this e-text has been produced retains the
+spelling and abbreviations of Hakluyt's 16th-century original. In this
+version, the spelling has been retained, but the following manuscript
+abbreviations have been silently expanded:
+
+- vowels with macrons = vowel + 'n' or 'm'
+- q; = -que (in the Latin)
+- y[e] = the; y[t] = that; w[t] = with
+
+And the following substitutions have been made:
+
+- I + reversed 'C' (for the number 500) = D
+- CI + reversed 'C' (for 1000) = M
+
+This edition contains footnotes and two types of sidenotes. Most footnotes
+are added by the editor. They follow modern (19th-century) spelling
+conventions. Those that don't are Hakluyt's (and are not always
+systematically marked as such by the editor). The sidenotes are Hakluyt's
+own. Summarizing sidenotes are labelled [Sidenote: ] and placed before the
+sentence to which they apply. Sidenotes that are keyed with a symbol are
+labeled [Marginal note: ] and placed at the point of the symbol, except in
+poetry, where they are placed at a convenient point.
+
+** End Transcriber's Notes **
+
+THE PRINCIPAL
+
+NAVIGATIONS, VOYAGES, TRAFFIQUES
+
+AND
+
+DISCOVERIES
+
+OF
+
+THE ENGLISH NATION.
+
+Collected by
+
+RICHARD HAKLUYT, PREACHER.
+
+AND
+
+Edited by
+
+EDMUND GOLDSMID, F.R.H.S.
+
+VOL. VI
+
+MADEIRA AND THE CANARIES; ANCIENT ASIA, AFRICA, ETC.
+
+
+[Title Page to volume 2 of the original edition.]
+
+THE SECOND VOLVME
+
+OF THE PRINCIPAL
+
+NAVIGATIONS, VOYAGES, TRAFFIQVES,
+
+AND
+
+DISCOUERIES
+
+OF THE
+
+ENGLISH NATION,
+
+MADE BY SEA OR OUER-LAND,
+
+TO THE SOUTH & SOUTH-EAST PARTS OF THE WORLD.
+
+AT ANY TIME WITHIN THE COMPASSE OF THESE 1600. YERES:
+
+DIUIDED INTO TWO SEUERALL PARTS:
+
+WHEREOF THE FIRST CONTAINETH
+
+THE PERSONALL TRAUELS, &c. OF THE ENGLISH, THROUGH AND WITHIN THE STREIGHT
+OF GIBRALTAR,
+
+TO
+
+Alger, Tunis, and Tripolis in Barbary, to Alexandria and Cairo in Aegypt,
+to the Isles of Sicilia, Zante, Candia, Rhodes, Cyprus, and Chio, to the
+Citie of Constantinople, to diuers parts of Asia Minor, to Syria and
+Armenia, to Ierusalem, and other Places in Iudea;
+
+AS ALSO TO:
+
+Arabia, downe the Riuer of Euphrates, to Babylon and Balsara, and so
+through the Persian Gulph to Ormuts, Chaul, Goa, and to many Islands
+adioyning vpon the South Parts of Asia;
+
+AND LIKEWISE FROM
+
+Goa to Cambaia, and to all the Dominions of Zelabdim Echebar The Great
+Mogor, to the Mighty Riuer of Ganges, to Bengala, Aracan, Bacola, and
+Chonderi, to Pegu, to Iamahai in the Kingdome of Siam, and almost to the
+very Frontiers of China.
+
+THE SECOND COMPREHENDETH
+
+THE VOYAGES, TRAFFICKS, &c. OF THE ENGLISH NATION, MADE WITHOUT THE
+STREIGHT OF GIBRALTAR,
+
+TO THE ISLANDS OF THE ACORES, OF PORTO SANTO, MADERA, AND THE CANARIES, TO
+THE KINGDOMES OF BARBARY, TO THE ISLES OF CAPO VERDE,
+
+To the Riuers of Senega, Gambra, Madrabumba, and Sierra Leona, to the Coast
+of Guinea and Benin, to the Isles of S. Thome and Santa Helena, to the
+Parts about the Cape of Buona Esperanza, to Quitangone, neere Mozambique,
+to the Isles of Comoro and Zanzibar, To the Citie of Goa, Beyond Cape
+Comori, to the Isles of Nicubar, Gomes Polo, and Pulo Pinaom, to the maine
+Land of Malacca, and to the Kingdome of Iunsalaon.
+
+BY RICHARD HAKLVYT PREACHER,
+AND SOMETIME STUDENT OF CHRIST CHVRCH IN OXFORD.
+
+IMPRINTED AT LONDON BY GEORGE BISHOP, RALPH NEWBERY,
+AND ROBERT BARKER.
+
+ANNO 1599.
+
+
+
+
+DEDICATION TO THE FIRST EDITION.
+
+TO THE
+
+RIGHT HONOURABLE
+
+SIR ROBERT CECIL KNIGHT,
+
+PRINCIPALL SECRETARIE TO HER MAIESTIE, MASTER OF THE COURT OF WARDES AND
+  LIUERIES, AND ONE OF HER MAIESTIES MOST HONOURABLE PRIUIE COUNSELL.
+
+Right Honorable, hauing newly finished a Treatise of the long Voyages of
+our Nation made into the Leuant within the Streight of Gibraltar, and from
+thence ouer-land to the South and Southeast parts of the world, all
+circumstances considered, I found none to whom I thought it fitter to bee
+presented then to your selfe: wherein hauing begun at the highest
+Antiquities of this realme vnder the gouerment of the Romans; next vnder
+the Saxons; and thirdly since the conquest vnder the Normans, I haue
+continued the histories vnto these our dayes. The time of the Romans
+affoordeth small matter. But after that they were called hence by forren
+inuasions of their Empire, and the Saxons by degrees became lords in this
+Iland, and shortly after receiued the Christian faith, they did not onely
+trauell to Rome, but passed farther vnto Ierusalem, and therewith not
+contented, Sigelmus bishop of Shireburne in Dorsetshire caried the almes of
+king Alfred euen to the Sepulcher of S. Thomas in India, (which place at
+this day is called Maliapor) and brought from thence most fragrant spices,
+and rich iewels into England: Which iewels, as William of Malmesburie in
+two sundry treatises writeth, were remaining in the aforsayd Cathedrall
+Church to be seene euen in his time. And this most memorable voyage into
+India is not onely mentioned by the aforesayd Malmesburie, but also by
+Florentius Wigorniensis, a graue and woorthy Author which liued before him,
+and by many others since, and euen by M. Foxe in his first volume of his
+acts and Monuments in the life of king Alfred. To omit diuers other of the
+Saxon nation, the trauels of Alured bishop of Worcester through Hungarie to
+Constantinople, and so by Asia the lesse into Phoenicia and Syria, and the
+like course of Ingulphus, not long afterward Abbot of Croiland, set downe
+particularly by himselfe, are things in mine opinion right worthy of
+memorie. After the comming in of the Normans, in the yeere 1096, in the
+reigne of William Rufus, and so downward for the space of aboue 300 yeeres,
+such was the ardent desire of our nation to visite the Holy land, and to
+expell the Saracens and Mahumetans, that not only great numbers of Erles,
+Bishops, Barons, and Knights, but euen Kings, Princes, and Peeres of the
+blood Roiall, with incredible deuotion, courage and alacritie intruded
+themselues into this glorious expedition. A sufficient proofe hereof are
+the voiages of prince Edgar the nephew of Edmund Ironside, of Robert
+Curtois brother of William Rufus, the great beneuolence of king Henry the
+2. and his vowe to haue gone in person to the succour of Ierusalem, the
+personall going into Palestina of his sonne king Richard the first, with
+the chiualrie, wealth, and shipping of this realme; the large contribution
+of king Iohn, and the trauels of Oliuer Fitz-Roy his sonne, as is supposed,
+with Ranulph Glanuile Erle of Chester to the siege of Damiata in Egypt: the
+prosperous voyage of Richard Erle of Cornwall, elected afterward king of
+the Romans, and brother to Henry the 3, the famous expedition of Prince
+Edward, the first king of the Norman race of that name; the iourney of
+Henry Erle of Derbie, duke of Hereford, and afterward King of this realme,
+by the name of Henry the 4 against the citie of Tunis in Africa, and his
+preparation of ships and gallies to go himselfe into the Holy land, if he
+had not on the sudden bene preuented by death; the trauel of Iohn of
+Holland brother by the mothers side to king Richard the 2 into those parts.
+All these, either Kings, Kings sonnes, or Kings brothers, exposed
+themselues with inuincible courages to the manifest hazard of their
+persons, liues, and liuings, leauing their ease, their countries, wiues and
+children; induced with a Zelous deuotion and ardent desire to protect and
+dilate the Christian faith. These memorable enterprises in part concealed,
+in part scattered, and for the most part vnlooked after, I haue brought
+together in the best Method and breuitie that I could deuise. Whereunto I
+haue annexed the losse of Rhodes, which although it were originally written
+in French, yet maketh it as honourable and often mention of the English
+nation, as of any other Christians that serued in that most violent siege.
+After which ensueth the princely promise of the bountiful aide of king
+Henry the 8 to Ferdinando newly elected king of Hungarie, against Solyman
+the mortall enemie of Christendome. These and the like Heroicall intents
+and attempts of our Princes, our Nobilitie, our Clergie, and our Chiualry,
+I haue in the first place exposed and set foorth to the view of this age,
+with the same intention that the old Romans set vp in wax in their palaces
+the Statuas or images of their worthy ancestors; whereof Salust in his
+treatise of the warre of Iugurtha, writeth in this maner: Sæpe audiui ego
+Quintum maximum, Publium Scipionem, præterea ciuitatis nostræ præclaros
+viros solitos ita dicere, cum maiorum imagines intuerentur, vehementissimè
+animum sibi ad virtutem accendi. Scilicet non ceram illam, neque figuram,
+tantam vim in sese habere, sed memoria rerum gestarum flammam eam egregijs
+viris in pectore crescere, neque prius sedari, quàm virtus eorum famam et
+gloriam adæquauerit. I haue often heard (quoth he) how Quintus maximus,
+Publius Scipio, and many other worthy men of our citie were woont to say,
+when they beheld the images and portraitures of their ancestors, that they
+were most vehemently inflamed vnto vertue. Not that the sayd wax or
+portraiture had any such force at all in it selfe, but that by the
+remembring of their woorthy actes, that flame was kindled in their noble
+breasts, and could neuer be quenched, vntill such time as their owne valure
+had equalled the fame and glory of their progenitors. So, though not in
+wax, yet in record of writing haue I presented to the noble courages of
+this English Monarchie, the like images of their famous predecessors, with
+hope of like effect in their posteritie. And here by the way if any man
+shall think, that an vniuersall peace with our Christian neighbours will
+cut off the emploiment of the couragious increasing youth of this realme,
+he is much deceiued. For there are other most conuenient emploiments for
+all the superfluitie of euery profession in this realme. For, not to meddle
+with the state of Ireland, nor that of Guiana, there is vnder our noses the
+great and ample countrey of Virginia; the In-land whereof is found of late
+to bee so sweete, and holesome a climate, so rich and abundant in siluer
+mines, so apt and capable of all commodities, which Italy, Spaine, and
+France can affoord, that the Spaniards themselues in their owne writings
+printed in Madrid 1586, and within few moneths afterward reprinted by me in
+Paris, [Footnote: This no doubt refers to the "History of the West Indies,"
+which appears further on in this edition.] and in a secret mappe of those
+partes made in Mexico the yeere before; for the king of Spaine, (which
+originall with many others is in the custodie of the excellent
+Mathematician M. Thomas Hariot) as also in their intercepted letters come
+vnto my hand, bearing date 1595, they acknowledge the In-land to be a
+better and richer countrey then Mexico and Nueua Spania itselfe. And on the
+other side their chiefest writers, as Peter Martyr ab Angleria, and Francis
+Lopez de Gomara, the most learned Venetian Iohn Baptista Ramusius, and the
+French Geographers, as namely, Popiliniere and the rest, acknowledge with
+one consent, that all that mightie tract of land from 67., degrees
+Northward to the latitude almost of Florida was first discouered out of
+England, by the commaundement of king Henry the seuenth, and the South part
+thereof before any other Christian people of late hath bene planted with
+diuers English colonies by the royal consent of her sacred Maiestie vnder
+the broad seale of England, whereof one as yet remaineth, for ought we
+know, aliue in the countrey. Which action, if vpon a good and godly peace
+obtained, it shal please the Almighty to stirre vp her Maiesties heart to
+continue with her fauourable countenance (as vpon the ceasing of the warres
+of Granada, hee stirred vp the spirite of Isabella Queene of Castile, to
+aduance the enterprise of Columbus) with transporting of one or two
+thousand of her people, and such others as vpon mine owne knowledge will
+most willingly at their owne charges become Aduenturers in good numbers
+with their bodies and goods; she shall by Gods assistance, in short space,
+worke many great and vnlooked for effects, increase her dominions, enrich
+her cofers, and reduce many Pagans to the faith of Christ. The neglecting
+hitherto of which last point our aduersaries daily in many of their bookes
+full bitterly lay vnto the charge of the professors of the Gospell. No
+sooner should we set footing in that pleasant and good land, and erect one
+or two conuenient Fortes in the Continent, or in some Iland neere the
+maine, but euery step we tread would yeeld vs new occasion of action, which
+I wish the Gentrie of our nation rather to regard, then to follow those
+soft vnprofitable pleasures wherein they now too much consume their time
+and patrimonie, and hereafter will doe much more, when as our neighbour
+warres being appeased, they are like to haue lesse emploiment then nowe
+they haue, vnlesse they bee occupied in this or some other the like
+expedition. And to this ende and purpose giue me leaue (I beseech you) to
+impart this occurrent to your honourable and prouident consideration: that
+in the yere one thousand fiue hundred eighty and seuen, when I had caused
+the foure voyages of Ribault, Laudonniere, and Gourges to Florida, at mine
+owne charges to bee printed in Paris, which by the malice of some too much
+affectioned to the Spanish faction, had bene aboue twentie yeeres
+suppressed, as soone as that booke came to the view of that reuerend and
+prudent Counseller Monsieur Harlac the lord chiefe Iustice of France, and
+certaine other of the wisest Iudges, in great choler they asked, who had
+done such intolerable wrong to their whole kingdome, as to haue concealed
+that woorthie worke so long? Protesting further, that if their Kings and
+the Estate had throughly followed that action, France had bene freed of
+their long ciuill warres, and the variable humours of all sortes of people
+might haue had very ample and manifold occasions of good and honest
+emploiment abroad in that large and fruitfull Continent of the West Indies.
+The application of which sentence vnto our selues I here omit, hastening
+vnto the summarie recapitulation of other matters contained in this worke.
+It may please your Honour therefore to vnderstand, that the second part of
+this first Treatise containeth our auncient trade and traffique with
+English shipping to the Ilands of Sicilie, Candie, and Sio, which, by good
+warrant herein alleaged, I find to haue bene begun in the yeere 1511. and
+to haue continued vntill the yeere 1552. and somewhat longer. But shortly
+after (as it seemeth) it was intermitted, or rather giuen ouer (as is noted
+in master Gaspar Campions discreet letters to Master Michael Lock and
+Master William Winter inserted in this booke) first by occasion of the
+Turkes expelling of the foure and twentie Mauneses or gouernours of the
+Genouois out of the Ile of Sio, and by taking of the sayd Iland wholie into
+his owne hand in Aprill, 1566. sending thither Piali Basha with fourescore
+gallies for that purpose; and afterward by his growing ouer mightie and
+troublesome in those Seas, by the cruell inuasion of Nicosia and Famagusta,
+and the whole Ile of Cyprus by his lieutenant Generall Mustapha Basha.
+Which lamentable Tragedie I haue here againe reuiued, that the posteritie
+may neuer forget what trust may bee giuen to the oath of a Mahometan, when
+hee hath aduauntage and is in his choler.
+
+Lastly, I haue here put downe at large the happie renuing and much
+increasing of our interrupted trade in all the Leuant, accomplished by the
+great charges and speciall Industrie of the worshipfull and worthy
+Citizens, Sir Edward Osborne Knight, M. Richard Staper, and M. William
+Hareborne, together with the league for traffike onely betweene her
+Maiestie and the Grand Signior, with the great priuileges, immunities, and
+fauours obteyned of his imperiall Highnesse in that behalfe, the admissions
+and residencies of our Ambassadours in his stately Porch, and the great
+good and Christian offices which her Sacred Maiestie by her extraordinary
+fauour in that Court hath done for the king and kingdome of Poland, and
+other Christian Princes: the traffike of our Nation in all the chiefe
+Hauens of Africa and Egypt: the searching and haunting the very bottome of
+the Mediterran Sea to the ports of Tripoli and Alexandretta, of the
+Archipelagus, by the Turkes now called The white sea, euen to the walles of
+Constantinople: the voyages ouer land, and by riuer through Aleppo, Birrha,
+Babylon and Balsara, and downe the Persian gulfe to Ormuz, and thence by
+the Ocean sea to Goa, and againe ouer-land to Bisnagar, Cambaia, Orixa,
+Bengala, Aracan, Pegu, Malacca, Siam, the Iangomes, Quicheu, and euen to
+the Frontiers of the Empire of China: the former performed diuerse times by
+sundry of our nation, and the last great voyage by M. Ralph Fitch, who with
+M. Iohn Newbery and two other consorts departed from London with her
+Maiesties letters written effectually in their fauour to the kings of
+Cambaia and China in the yere 1583, who in the yeere 1591. like another
+Paulus Venetus returned home to the place of his departure, with ample
+relation of his wonderfull trauailes, which he presented in writing to my
+Lord your father of honourable memorie.
+
+Now here if any man shall take exception against this our new trade with
+Turkes and misbeleeuers, he shall shew himselfe a man of small experience
+in old and new Histories, or wilfully lead with partialitie, or some worse
+humour. [Marginal note: 1. King. cap. 5., 2. Chron. cap. 2.] For who
+knoweth not, that king Solomon of old, entred into league vpon necessitie
+with Hiram the king of Tyrus, a gentile? Or who is ignorant that the
+French, the Genouois, Florentines, Raguseans, Venetians, and Polonians are
+at this day in league with the Grand Signior, and haue beene these many
+yeeres, and haue vsed trade and traffike in his dominions? Who can deny
+that the Emperor of Christendome hath had league with the Turke, and payd
+him a long while a pension for a part of Hungarie? And who doth not
+acknowledge, that either hath traueiled the remote parts of the world, or
+read the Histories of this latter age, that the Spaniards and Portugales in
+Barbarie, in the Indies, and elsewhere, haue ordinarie confederacie and
+traffike with the Moores, and many kindes of Gentiles and Pagans, and that
+which is more, doe pay them pensions, and vse them in their seruice and
+warres? Why then should that be blamed in vs, which is vsuall and common to
+the most part of other Christian nations? Therefore let our neighbours,
+which haue found most fault with this new league and traffike, thanke
+themselues and their owne foolish pride, whereby we were vrged to seeke
+further to prouide vent for our naturall commodities. And herein the old
+Greeke prouerbe was most truely verified, That euill counsaille prooueth
+worst to the author and deuiser of the same.
+
+Hauing thus farre intreated of the chiefe contents of the first part of
+this second Volume, it remayneth that I briefly acquaint your Honor with
+the chiefe contents of the second part. It may therefore please you to
+vnderstand, that herein I haue likewise preserued, disposed, and set in
+order such Voyages, Nauigations, Traffikes, and Discoueries, as our Nation,
+and especially the worthy inhabitants of this citie of London, haue
+painefully performed to the South and Southeast parts of the world, without
+the Streight of Gibraltar, vpon the coasts of Africa, about the Cape of
+Buona Sperança, to and beyonde the East India. To come more neere vnto
+particulars, I haue here set downe the very originals and infancie of our
+trades to the Canarian Ilands, to the kingdomes of Barbarie, to the mightie
+riuers of Senega and Gambia, to those of Madrabumba, and Sierra Leona, and
+the Isles of Cape Verde, with twelue sundry voyages to the sultry kingdomes
+of Guinea and Benin, to the Ile of San Thomé, with a late and true report
+of the weake estate of the Portugales in Angola, as also the whole course
+of the Portugale Caracks from Lisbon to the barre of Goa in India, with the
+disposition and qualitie of the climate neere and vnder the Equinoctiall
+line, the sundry infallible markes and tokens of approaching vnto, and
+doubling of The Cape of good Hope, the great variation of the compasse for
+three or foure pointes towards the East between the Meridian of S. Michael
+one of the Islands of the Azores, and the aforesaid Cape, with the returne
+of the needle againe due North at the Cape Das Agulias, and that place
+being passed outward bound, the swaruing backe againe thereof towards the
+West, proportionally as it did before, the two wayes, the one within and
+the other without the Isle of S. Laurence, the dangers of priuie rockes and
+quicksands, the running seas, and the perils thereof, with the certaine and
+vndoubted signes of land. All these and other particularities are plainly
+and truely here deliuered by one Thomas Steuens a learned Englishman, who
+in the yeere 1579 going as a passenger in the Portugale Fleete from Lisbon
+into India, wrote the same from Goa to his father in England: Whereunto I
+haue added the memorable voyage of M. Iames Lancaster, who doth not onely
+recount and confirme most of the things aboue mentioned, but also doth
+acquaint vs with the state of the voyage beyond Cape Comori, and the Isle
+of Ceilon, with the Isles of Nicubar and Gomes Polo lying within two
+leagues of the rich Island Sumatra, and those of Pulo Pinaom, with the
+maine land of Iunçalaon and the streight of Malacca. I haue likewise added
+a late intercepted letter of a Portugall reuealing the secret and most
+gainefull trade of Pegu, which is also confirmed by Cesar Fredericke a
+Venetian, and M. Ralph Fitch now liuing here in London.
+
+And because our chiefe desire is to find out ample vent of our wollen
+cloth, the naturall commoditie of this our Realme, the fittest places,
+which in al my readings and obseruations I find for that purpose, are the
+manifold Islands of Iapan, and the Northern parts of China, and the regions
+of the Tartars next adioyning (whereof I read, that the countrey in winter
+is Assi fria como Flandes, that is to say, as cold as Flanders, and that
+the riuers be strongly ouer frozen) and therefore I haue here inserted two
+speciall Treatises of the sayd Countries, the last discourse I hold to be
+the most exact of those parts that is yet come to light, which was printed
+in Lantine in Macao a citie of China, in China paper, in the yeere a
+thousand fiue hundred and ninetie, and was intercepted in the great Carack
+called Madre de Dios two yeeres after, inclosed in a case of sweete Cedar
+wood, and lapped vp almost an hundred fold in fine Calicut cloth, as though
+it had bene some incomparable iewel.
+
+But leauing abruptly this discourse, I thinke it not impertinent, before I
+make an end, to deliuer some of the reasons, that moued me to present this
+part of my trauailes vnto your Honour. The reuerend antiquitie in the
+dedication of their workes made choyse of such patrons, as eyther with
+their reputation and credits were able to countenance the same, or by their
+wisedome and vnderstanding were able to censure and approue them, or with
+their abilitie were likely to stand them or theirs in steade in the
+ordinarie necessities and accidents of their life. Touching the first, your
+descent from a father, that was accounted Pater patriæ, your owne place and
+credite in execution of her Maiesties inward counsailes and publike
+seruices, added to your well discharging your forren imployment (when the
+greatest cause in Christendome was handled) haue not onely drawen mens eyes
+vpon you, but also forcibly haue moued many, and my selfe among the rest to
+haue our labours protected by your authoritie. For the second point, when
+it pleased your Honour in sommer was two yeeres to haue some conference
+with me, and to demaund mine opinion touching the state of the Country of
+Guiana, and whether it were fit to be planted by the English: I then (to my
+no small ioy) did admire the exact knowledge which you had gotten of those
+matters of Indian Nauigations: and how carefull you were, not to be
+ouertaken with any partiall affection to the Action, appeared also, by the
+sound arguments which you made pro and contra, of the likelihood and reason
+of good or ill successe of the same, before the State and common wealth
+(wherein you haue an extraordinarie voyce) should be farther engaged. In
+consideration whereof I thinke myselfe thrise happie to haue these my
+trauailes censured by your Honours so well approued iudgement, Touching the
+third and last motiue I cannot but acknowledge my selfe much indebted for
+your fauourable letters heretofore written in my behalfe in mine, honest
+causes. Whereunto I may adde, that when this worke was to passe vnto the
+presse, your Honour did not onely intreate a worthy knight, a person of
+speciall experience, as in many others so in marine causes, to ouersee and
+peruse the same, but also vpon his good report with your most fauourable
+letters did warrant, and with extraordinarie commendation did approue and
+allow my labours, and desire to publish the same. Wherefore to conclude,
+seeing they take their life and light from the most cheerefull and benigne
+aspect of your fauour, I thinke it my bounden dutie in all humilitie and
+with much bashfulnesse to recommend my selfe and them vnto your right
+Honorable and fauourable protection, and your Honour to the merciful
+tuition of the most High. From London this 24. of October. 1599.
+
+Your Honours most humble to be commanded,
+
+Richard Hakluyt preacher.
+
+
+
+
+Nauigations, Voyages, Traffiques, and
+
+Discoueries
+
+OF THE
+
+ENGLISH NATION,
+
+MADE TO
+
+THE ILANDS OF MADERA AND OF THE CANARIES.
+
+
+The voyage of Macham an English man, wherein he first of any man discouered
+  the Iland of Madera, recorded verbatim in the Portugall history, written
+  by Antonio Galuano.
+
+[Sidenote: Madera first discouered by one Macham an Englishman.] In the
+yeere 1344, King Peter the fourth of that name reigning in Aragon, the
+Chronicles of his age write that about this time the Iland of Madera,
+standing in 32 degrees, was discouered by an English man, which was named
+Macham, who sailing out of England into Spaine, with a woman that he had
+stollen, arriued by tempest in that Iland, and did cast anker in that hauen
+or bay, which now is called Machico after the name of Macham. And because
+his louer was sea sicke, he went on land with some of his company, and the
+shippe with a good winde made saile away, and the woman died for thought.
+[Sidenote: Macham made there a chapel, naming it Iesus chapell.] Macham,
+which loued her dearely built a chapell, or hermitage, to bury her in,
+calling it by the name of Iesus, and caused his name and hers to be written
+or grauen vpon the stone of her tombe, and the occasion of their arriuall
+there. And afterward he ordeined a boat made of one tree (for there be
+trees of a great compasse about) and went to sea in it, with those men that
+he had, and were left behinde with him, and came vpon the coast of Afrike,
+without saile or oare. And the Moores which saw it tooke it to be a
+maruellous thing, and presented him vnto the king of that countrey for a
+woonder, and that king also sent him and his companions for a miracle vnto
+the king of Castile.
+
+In the yeere 1395. King Henry the third of that name reigning in Castile,
+the information which Macham gaue of this Iland, and also the ship of his
+company, mooued many of France and Castile to go and discouer it, and also
+the great Canaria, &c.
+
+In the yeere 1417, King Iohn the second reigning in Castile, and his mother
+Lady Katherine being Regent, one Monsieur Ruben of Bracamont, which was
+Admirall of France, demanding the conquest of the Ilands of the Canaries,
+with the title of King, for a kinsman of his named Monsieur Iohn
+Betancourt, after that the Queene hath giuen him them, and holpen him, he
+departed from Siuil with a good army. And they affirme also, that the
+principall cause which moued him to this, was to discouer the Iland of
+Madera, which Macham had found, &c. ibidem pag. 2. of Anthonio Galuano.
+[Footnote: The romantic story of Machin or Macham has been recently
+confirmed by authentic documents discovered in Lisbon. The lady eloped with
+him from near Bristol. The name of Madeira is derived from its thick woods,
+the word being the same as the Latin Materies.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A briefe note concerning an ancient trade of the English Marchants to the
+  Canarie-ilands, gathered out of an olde ligier booke of M. Nicolas Thorne
+  the elder a worshipfull marchant of the city of Bristoll.
+
+[Sidenote: The English had an ordinary trade to the Canaries 1526.] It
+appeareth euidently out of a certaine note or letter of remembrance, in the
+custody of me Richard Hakluyt, written by M. Nicolas Thorne the elder a
+principall marchant of Bristoll, to his friend and factour Thomas Midnall
+and his owne seruant William Ballard at that time resident at S. Lucar in
+Andaluzia; that in the yeere of our Lord 1526 (and by all circumstances and
+probabilities long before) certaine English marchants, and among the rest
+himselfe with one Thomas Spacheford exercised vsuall and ordinary trade of
+marchandise vnto the Canarie Ilands. For by the sayd letter notice was
+giuen to Thomas Midnall and William Ballard aforesayd, that a certaine ship
+called The Christopher of Cadiz bound for the West Indies had taken in
+certaine fardels of cloth both course and fine, broad and narrow of diuers
+sorts and colours, some arouas [Transcriber's note: sic.] of packthreed,
+sixe cerons or bagges of sope with other goods of M. Nicolas Thorne, to be
+deliuered at Santa Cruz the chiefe towne in Tenerifa one of the seuen
+Canary-ilands. All which commodities the sayd Thomas and William were
+authorised by the owner in the letter before mentioned to barter and sell
+away at Santa Cruz. And in lieu of such mony as should arise of the sale of
+those goods they were appointed to returne backe into England good store of
+Orchell (which is a certaine kinde of mosse growing vpon high rocks, in
+those dayes much vsed to die withall) some quantity of sugar, and certaine
+hundreds, of kid skinnes. For the procuring of which and of other
+commodities at the best and first hand the sayd Thomas and William were to
+make their abode at Santa Cruz, and to remaine there as factours for the
+abouesayd M. Nicolas Thorne.
+
+And here also I thought good to signifie, that in the sayd letters mention
+is made of one Thomas Tison an English man, who before the foresayd yere
+1526 had found the way to the West Indies, and was there resident, vnto
+whom the sayd M. Nicolas Thorne sent certaine armour and other commodities
+specified in the letter aforesayd.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+A description of the fortunate Ilands, otherwise called the Ilands of
+  Canaria, with their strange fruits and commodities: composed by Thomas
+  Nicols English man, who remained there the space of seuen yeeres
+  together.
+
+Mine intent is particularly to speake of the Canaria Ilands, which are
+seuen in number, wherein I dwelt the space of seuen yeres and more, because
+I finde such variety in sundry writers, and especially great vntruths, in a
+booke called The New found world Antarctike, set out by a French man called
+Andrew Thenet, the which his booke he dedicated to the Cardinall of Sens,
+keeper of the great seale of France.
+
+It appeareth by the sayd booke that he had read the works of sundry
+Phylosophers, Astronomers, and Cosmographers, whose opinions he gathered
+together. But touching his owne trauell, which he affirmeth, I refer to the
+iudgement of the expert in our dayes, and therefore for mine owne part I
+write of these Canaria Ilands, as time hath taught me in many yeres.
+
+
+The Iland of Canaria.
+
+The Iland of Canaria is almost equal in length and bredth, containing 12
+leagues in length, touching the which as principall and the residue, the
+Spanyards holde opinion, that they discouered the same in their nauigation
+toward America, but the Portugals say, that their nation first found the
+sayd Ilands in their nauigation toward Aethiopia and the East Indies.
+
+[Sidenote: English men at the first conquest of the Canaries.] But truth it
+is that the Spanyards first conquered these Ilands, with diuers English
+gentlemen in their company, whose posterity this present day inioyeth them.
+Some write that this Iland was named Canaria by meane of the number of dogs
+which there were found: as for example, Andrew Theuet sayth, that one Iuba
+carried two dogs from thence: but that opinion could I neuer learne by any
+of the naturall people of the countrey, although I haue talked with many in
+my time and with many of their children. For trueth it is, that there were
+dogs, but such as are in all the Northwest lands, and some part of the West
+India, which serued the people in stead of sheepe for victual. But of some
+of the conquerors of those Ilands I haue heard say that the reason why they
+were called the Canaria Islands is, because there grow generally in them
+all fouresquare canes in great multitude together, which being touched will
+cast out a liquor as white as milke, which liquor is ranke poison, and at
+the first entry into these Ilands some of the discouerers were therewith
+poisoned: for many yeeres after that conquest the inhabitants began to
+plant both wine and sugar, so that Canaria was not so called by sugar
+canes.
+
+The people which first inhabited this land were called Canaries by the
+conquerors, they were clothed in goat skinnes made like vnto a loose
+cassocke, they dwelt in caues in the rocks, [Footnote: Many thousand
+persons, including a colony of free negroes, still reside in cave dwellings
+in the hill side.] in great amity and brotherly loue. They spake all one
+language: their chiefe feeding was gelt dogges, goates, and goates milke,
+their bread was made of barley meale and goates milke, called Gofia, which
+they vse at this day, and thereof I haue eaten diuers times, for it is
+accounted exceeding holesome.
+
+Touching the originall of these people some holde opinion, that the Romans
+which dwelt in Africa exiled them thither, as well men as women, their
+tongues being cut out of their heads, for blasphemy against the Romane
+gods. But howsoeuer it were, their language was speciall, and not mixed
+with Romane speech or Arabian.
+
+This Iland is now the principallest of all the rest, not in fertility, but
+by reason it is the seat of iustice and gouernment of all the residue. This
+Iland hath a speciall Gouernour for the Iland onely, yet notwithstanding
+there are three Iudges called Auditours, who are superiour Iudges, and all
+in one ioyntly proceed as the Lord Chanceller of any realme.
+
+To this city from all the other Ilands come all such by appeale, as haue
+sustained any wrong, and these good Iudges do remedy the same. [Sidenote:
+Ciuitas Palmarum.] The city is called Ciuitas Palmarum, it hath a
+beautifull Cathedrall church, with all dignities thereunto pertaining. For
+the publike weale of the Iland there are sundry Aldermen of great
+authority, who haue a councell house by themselues. The city is not onely
+beautifull, but the citizens curious and gallant in apparell. And after any
+raine or foule weather a man may goe cleane in Veluet slippers, because the
+ground is sandy, the aire very temperate, without extreame heat or colde.
+
+They reape wheat in February, and againe in May, which is excellent good,
+and maketh bread as white as snow. This Iland hath in it other three
+townes, the one called Telde, the second Galder, and the third Guia. It
+hath also twelue sugar houses called Ingenios, in which they make great
+quantity of good sugar. [Sidenote: The planting and growth of sugar canes.]
+The maner of the growth of sugar is in this sort, a good ground giueth
+foorth fruit nine times in 18 yere: that is to say, the first is called
+Planta which is layd along in a furrow, so that the water of a sluce may
+come ouer euery roote being couered with earth: this root bringeth foorth
+sundry canes, and so consequently all the rest. It groweth two yeeres
+before the yeelding of profit, and not sixe moneths, as Andrew Theuet the
+French man writeth.
+
+[Sidenote: The making of sugar.] Then are they cut euen with the ground,
+and the tops and leaues called Coholia cut off, and the canes bound into
+bundels like faggots, and so are caried to the sugar house called Ingenio,
+where they are ground in a mill, and the iuyce thereof conueyed by a
+conduct to a great vessell made for the purpose, where it is boiled till it
+waxe thicke, and then is it put into a fornace of earthen pots of the molde
+of a sugar loafe, and then is it carried to another house, called a purging
+house where it is placed to purge the blacknesse with a certaine clay that
+is layd thereon. Of the remainder in the cauldron is made a second sort
+called Escumas, and of the purging liquor that droppeth from the white
+sugar is made a third sort, and the remainder is called Panela or Netas,
+the refuse of all the purging is called Remiel or Malasses: and thereof is
+made another sort called Refinado.
+
+When this first fruit is in this sort gathered, called Planta, then the
+Cane field where it grew is burned ouer with sugar straw to the stumps of
+the first canes, and being husbanded, watred and trimmed, at the end of
+other two yeeres it yeeldeth the second fruit called Zoca. The third fruit
+is called Tertia Zoca, the fourth Quarta Zoca, and so orderly the rest, til
+age causeth the olde Canes to be planted againe.
+
+[Sidenote: Wine.] This Iland hath singular good wine, especially in the
+towne of Telde, and sundry sorts of good fruits, as Batatas, Mellons,
+Peares, Apples, Oranges, Limons, Pomgranats, Figs Peaches of diuers sorts,
+and many other fruits; [Sidenote: Plantano.] but especially the Plantano
+which groweth neere brooke sides, it is a tree that hath no timber in it,
+but groweth directly vpward with the body, hauing maruelous thicke leaues,
+and euery leafe at the toppe of two yards long and almost halfe a yard
+broad. The tree neuer yeeldeth fruit but once, and then is cut downe; in
+whose place springeth another, and so still continueth. The fruit groweth
+on a branch, and euery tree yeeldeth two or three of those branches, which
+beare some more and some lesse, as some forty and some thirty, the fruit is
+like a Cucumber, and when it is ripe it is blacke, and in eating more
+delicate then any conserue.
+
+This Iland is sufficiently prouided of Oxen, Kine, Camels, Goats, Sheepe,
+Capons, Hens, Ducks, and Pidgeons, and great Partridges. Wood is the thing
+that most wanteth: and because I haue particularly to intreat of the other
+sixe Ilands, I leaue further inlarging of Canaria, which standeth in 27
+degrees distant from the Equator.
+
+
+The Ile of Tenerif.
+
+The Iland of Tenerif standeth in 27 degrees and a halfe from the equator,
+and is distant from Canaria 12 leagues Northward. This Iland containeth 17
+leagues in length, and the land lieth high in forme of a ridge of sowen
+lande in some part of England, and in the midst of the sayd place standeth
+a round hill called Pico Deteithe, situated in this sort. The top of this
+pike conteineth of heigth directly vpward 15 leagues and more, which is 45
+English miles, out of the which often times proceedeth fire and brimstone,
+and it may be about halfe a mile in compasse: the sayd top is in forme or
+likenesse of a caldron. [Footnote: The Peak of Teneriffe is 12,182 feet
+high.] But within two miles of the top is nothing but ashes and pumish
+stones: yet beneath that two miles is the colde region couered all the yere
+with snow, and somewhat lower are mighty huge trees growing called
+Vinatico, which are exceeding heauy and will not rot in any water although
+they lie a thousand yeeres therein. Also there is a wood called Barbusano,
+of like vertue, with many Sauine trees and Pine trees. And beneath these
+sorts of trees are woods of Bay trees of ten and 12 miles long, which is a
+pleasant thing to trauell thorow, among the which are great numbers of
+small birds, which sing exceeding sweet, but especially one sort that are
+very litle, and of colour in all respects like a Swallow, sauing that he
+hath a little blacke spot on his breast as broad as a peny. He singeth more
+sweetly than all the rest, but if he be taken and imprisoned in a cage, he
+liueth but a small while. [Sidenote: Lime.] This Iland bringeth foorth all
+sorts of fruits, as Canaria doth: and also all the other Ilands in generall
+bring foorth shrubs or bushes, out of the which issueth a iuice as white as
+milke, which after a while that it hath come out waxeth thicke, and is
+exceeding good birdlime, the bush is called Taybayba. This Iland also
+bringeth foorth another tree called Drago, which groweth on high among
+rocks, and by incision at the foot of the tree issueth out a liquor like
+blood, which is a common drug among Apothecaries. Of the wood of this tree
+are made targets greatly esteemed, because if any sword or dagger hit
+thereon, they sticke so fast that it is hard plucking them out.
+
+This is the most fruitfull Iland of all the rest for corne, and in that
+respect is a mother or nurse to all the others in time of need. [Sidenote:
+Orchel good for dying.] There groweth also a certaine mosse vpon the high
+rocks called Orchel, which is bought for Diars to die withall. There are 12
+sugar houses called Ingenios, which make great quantity of sugar. There is
+also one league of ground which standeth between two townes, the one called
+Larotaua, and the other Rialeio, and it is thought that the like plot of
+ground is not in all the world. The reason is, that this one league of
+ground produceth sweet water out of the cliffes or rocky mountaines, come
+of all sortes, fruites of all sortes, and excellent good silke, flaxe,
+waxe, and hony, and very good wines in abundance, with great store of sugar
+and fire wood. Out of this Iland is laden great quantities of wines for the
+West India, and other countreys. The best groweth on a hill side called the
+Ramble.
+
+There is in that Iland a faire citie, standing three leagues from the sea,
+nere vnto a lake called Laguna, wherein are two faire parish churches,
+there dwelleth the gouernour who ruleth all that Iland, with iustice. There
+are also aldermen for the publike weale, who buy their offices of the king:
+the most of the whole inhabitants of this city are gentlemen, merchants,
+and husband men.
+
+[Sidenote: Santa Cruz.] There are foure other townes called Santa Cruz,
+Larotaua, Rialeio, and Garachico. In this Iland before the conquest dwelt
+seuen kings, who with all their people dwelt in caues, and were clothed in
+goat skinnes, as the Canaria people were, and vsed such like order of diet
+as they had. Their order of buriall was, that when any died, he was carried
+naked to a great caue, where he was propped vp against the wall standing on
+his feet. But if he were of any authority among them, then had he a staffe
+in his hand, and a vessell of milke standing by him. I haue seene caues of
+300 of these corpses together, the flesh being dried vp, the body remained
+as light as parchment. These people were called Guanches, naturally they
+spake another language cleane contrary to the Canarians, and so
+consequently euery Iland spake a seuerall language.
+
+Note (gentle reader) that the Iland of Canaria, the Ile of Tenerif, and the
+Ile of Palma appertaine to the king of Spaine, vnto whom they pay fifty
+thousand duckats yeerely for custome and other profits. All these Ilands
+ioyntly are one bishopricke, which pay to the bishop twelue thousand
+duckats yeerely. And thus I conclude of the Ile of Tenerif, which standeth
+in 27 degrees and a halfe, as I haue before declared.
+
+
+Gomera.
+
+The Iland of Gomera standeth Westward from Tenerif in distance sixe
+leagues: this is but a small Iland conteining eight leagues in length. It
+is an Earledome, and the Lord thereof is called the earle of Gomera. But in
+case of any controuersie the vassals may appeale to the kings superior
+Iudges which reside in Canaria.
+
+This Iland hath one proper towne called Gomera, which hath an excellent
+good port or harbour for ships, where often times the Indian fleet takes
+refreshing for their voyage.
+
+There is also sufficient graine and fruit for the maintenance of
+themselues.
+
+There is one Ingenio or Sugar-house, with great plenty of wine and other
+sorts of fruits, as Canaria and Tenerif hath.
+
+This Iland yeeldeth no other commodity but onely orchell; it standeth in 27
+degrees distant from the Equator toward the pole Arcticke.
+
+
+The Ile of Palma.
+
+The Ile of Palma standeth twelue leagues distant from the Ile of Gomera
+Northwestward. This Iland is fruitfull of wine and sugar: it hath a proper
+city called the city of Palma, where is great contraction for vines, which
+are laden for the West India and other places. This city hath one faire
+church, and a gouernour, and aldermen to maintaine and execute iustice. It
+hath also another prety towne, called S. Andrewes. It hath also foure
+Ingenios which make excellent sugar, two of the which are called Zauzes,
+and the other two, Tassacort.
+
+This Iland yeeldeth but little bread-corne; but rather is thereof prouided
+from Tenerif and other places.
+
+Their best wines grow in a soile called the Brenia, where yeerely is
+gathered twelue thousand buts of wine like vnto Malmsies. This Iland
+standeth round, and containeth in circuit neere fiue and twenty leagues. It
+hath plenty of all sorts of fruits, as Canaria and Tenerif haue, it
+standeth in twenty seuen degrees and a halfe.
+
+
+The Iland of Yron, called Hierro.
+
+This Iland standeth ten leagues distant from the Iland of Palma Westward:
+it is but a little Iland, which containeth sixe leagues in circuit, and
+hath but small extension. It appertaineth to the earle of Gomera. The
+chiefest commodity of this Iland is goats flesh and orchell. [Sidenote: The
+onely vineyard in Hierro planted by Ioh. Hill of Taunton.] There is no wine
+in all that Iland, but onely one vineyard that an English man of Taunton in
+the West countrey planted among rocks, his name was Iohn Hill.
+
+This Iland hath no kind of fresh water, but onely in the middle of the
+Iland groweth a great tree with leaues like an Oliue tree which hath a
+great cisterne at the foot of the sayd tree. This tree continually is
+couered with clouds, and by meanes thereof the leaues of the said tree
+continually drop water, very sweet, into the sayd cisterne, which commeth
+to the sayd tree from the clouds by attraction. And this water sufficeth
+the Iland for all necessities, as well for the cattell, as for the
+inhabitants. [Footnote: In connection with this fable, it is interesting to
+see what is said by Le Maire, who visited these Islands in 1682. "As I had
+been told of a wonderful tree in Ferro, whose long and narrow leaves were
+always green, and furnished all the inhabitants with water, I wished to
+find out if it were true. I asked if, as I had heard, such a heavy dew fell
+on this tree that it dropped clear water into stone basins placed expressly
+to receive it. There was enough of it for the islanders and their cattle,
+Nature repairing by this miracle the defect of not providing pure water for
+this isle. The inhabitants confirmed my belief that this was a pure fable.
+There were some, however, who said that there might have been such a tree,
+but it could never have furnished the quantity attributed to it." [See
+VOYAGE TO THE CANARIES, etc, page 21, reprinted In _Bibliotheca Curiosa_.]]
+It standeth in 27 degrees.
+
+
+The Iland of Lanzarota
+
+The Iland of Lanzarota standeth eighteene leagues distant from grand
+Canaria Southeastward. The onely commodity of this Iland is goats flesh and
+orchell. It is an earldome, and doth, appertaine to Don Augustine de
+Herrerra, with title of earle of Fortauentura and Lanzarota. But the
+vassals of these earledomes may in any cause of wrong appeale to the Kings
+Iudges, which reside in Canaria, as I haue sayd before: because although
+the king hath reserued to himselfe but onely the three fruitful Ilands,
+called Canaria, Teneriff and Palma, yet he also reserued the rod of Iustice
+to himselfe, because otherwise the vassals might be euil intreated of their
+Lords.
+
+From this Iland do weekly resort to Canaria, Tenerif, and Palma, boats
+laden with dried goats flesh, called Tussmetta, which serueth in stead of
+bacon, and is very good meat. This Iland standeth in 26 degrees, and is in
+length twelue leagues.
+
+
+The Ile of Forteuentura.
+
+The Ile of Forteuentura standeth fifty leagues from the promontory of Cabo
+de Guer, in the firme land of Africa, and foure and twenty leagues distant
+from Canaria Eastward. This Iland doth appertaine to the lord of Lanzarota.
+It is reasonable fruitfull of wheat and barley, and also of kine, goats,
+and orchel: this Ile is fifteene leagues long and ten leagues broad. On the
+North side it hath a little Iland about one league distant from the maine
+Iland, betweene both of the which it is nauigable for any ships, and is
+called Graciosa.
+
+Both Forteuentura and Lanzarota haue very little wine of the growth of
+those Ilands. It standeth in 27 degrees.
+
+Thus much haue I written of these seuen Ilands by experience, because I was
+a dweller there, as I haue sayd before, the space of seuen yeeres in the
+affaires of master Thomas Locke, master Anthonie Hickman, and master Edward
+Caselin, who in those dayes were worthy merchants, and of great credite in
+the citie of London.
+
+
+A description of the Iland of Madera.
+
+The Iland of Madera standeth in 32 degrees distant from the equinoctinall
+line, and seuentie leagues from the Ile of Tenerif Northeastward and
+Southwest from Hercules pillars. This Iland was first discouered by one
+Macham an Englishman, and was after conquered and inhabited by the
+Portugall nation. It was first called the Iland of Madera, by reason of the
+great wildernesse of sundry sortes of trees that there did growe, and yet
+doe, as Cedars, Cypres, Vinatico, Barbuzano, Pine trees, and diuers others,
+and therefore the sayd Iland continueth still with the same name. Howbeit
+they hold opinion, that betweene the sayd Iland, and the Ile of Palma is an
+Iland not yet discouered, which is the true Iland Madera called saint
+Brandon. This Iland yeeldeth a great summe of money to the king of
+Portugall yeerely: it hath one faire citie called Fouchall, which hath one
+faire port or harbour for shippes, and a strong bulwarke, and a faire
+Cathedrall church, with a bishop and other dignities thereunto
+appertaining. There is also iustice and gouernment according to the
+Portugall vse. But causes of appellation are remitted to the citie of
+Lisbone in Portugall to the kings superior iudges there. This Iland hath
+another towne called Machico, which hath likewise a good road for ships,
+which towne and road were so called after the name of Macham the
+Englishman, who first discouered the same. There are also sixteene sugar
+houses called Ingenios, which make excellent good sugar.
+
+There is besides the goodly timber before declared, great store of diuers
+sortes of fruites, as Peares, Apples, Plummes, wild Dates, Peaches of
+diuers sortes, Mellons, Batatas, Orenges, Lemmons, Pomgranates, Citrons,
+Figges, and all maner of garden herbes. There are many Dragon trees, such
+as grow in the Canarie Ilands, but chiefly this land produceth great
+quantitie of singular good wines which are laden for many places. On the
+North side of this land three leagues distant from the maine Iland standeth
+another litle Iland called Porto santo: the people thereof liueth by
+husbandrie, for the Iland of Madera yeeldeth but litle corne, but rather is
+thereof prouided out of France and from the Iland of Tenerif. On the East
+side of the Ile of Madera sixe leagues distant standeth another litle Iland
+called the Desert, which produceth onely Orchell, and nourisheth a great
+number of Goates, for the prouision of the maine Iland, which may be
+thirtie leagues in circuit: and the land is of great heighth where the
+foresayd trees growe. It is woonder to see the conueyance of the water to
+the Ingenios by Mines through the mountaines.
+
+In the mid way betweene Tenerif and the Iland of Madera standeth a litle
+solitarie Iland called the Saluages, which may bee about one league in
+compasse, which hath neither tree nor fruit, but is onely food for Goates.
+
+
+
+
+THE
+
+FARDLE OF FACIONS
+
+CONTAINING
+
+THE AUNCIENTE MANERS, CUSTOMES, AND LAWES,
+
+OF THE
+
+PEOPLES ENHABITING THE TWO PARTES OF
+
+THE EARTH,
+
+CALLED
+
+AFFRICKE AND ASIE.
+
+Printed at London:
+
+BY IHON KINGSTONE, AND HENRY SUTTON.
+
+1555.
+
+
+[_This work was not included in the 1598-1600 edition of Hakluyt's Voyages.
+It, however, formed part of the supplement issued in 1812._]
+
+
+
+
+
+TO THE
+
+RIGHTE HONOURABLE
+
+THE ERLE OF ARUNDEL,
+
+KNIGHT OF THE ORDRE,
+
+AND
+
+LORDE STEWARDE OF THE QUIENES MAIESTIES MOST HONOURABLE HOUSEHOLDE
+
+
+Aftre what time the barrein traueiles of longe seruice, had driuen me to
+thinke libertie the best rewarde of my simple life, right honorable Erle
+and that I had determined to leaue wrastlyng with fortune, and to giue my
+self wholie to liue vpon my studie, and the labours of my hand: I thought
+it moste fitting with the dutie that I owe to God and manne, to bestowe my
+time (if I could) as well to the profite of other, as of myself. Not
+coueting to make of my floudde, a nother mannes ebbe (the Cancre of all
+commune wealthes) but rather to sette other a flote, where I my self strake
+on ground. Tourning me therefore, to the searche of wisedome and vertue,
+for whose sake either we tosse, or oughte to tosse so many papers and
+tongues: although I founde aboute my self, verie litle of that Threasure,
+yet remembred I that a fewe yeres paste, at the instaunce of a good
+Citezein, (who might at those daies, by aucthoritie commaunde me) I had
+begonne to translate, a litle booke named in the Latine, Omnium gentium
+mores, gathered longe sence by one Iohannes Boemus, a manne as it appereth,
+of good iudgemente and diligence. But so corrupted in the Printing, that
+after I had wrasteled a space, with sondrie Printes, I rather determined to
+lose my labour of the quartre tanslacion, then to be shamed with the haulf.
+And throwing it a side, entended no further to wearie my self therwithall,
+at the leaste vntill I mighte finde a booke of a bettre impression. In
+searching whereof at this my retourne to my studie, although I found not at
+the full that, that I sought for: yet vndrestanding among the booke sellers
+(as one talke bringes in another) that men of good learning and eloquence,
+bothe in the Frenche and Italien tonge, had not thought skorne to bestowe
+their time aboute the translacion therof, and that the Emperours Maiestie
+that now is, vouched saulfe to receiue the presentacion therof, at the
+Frenche translatours hande, as well appereth in his booke: it kindled me
+againe, vpon regard of mine owne profite, and other mennes moe, to bring
+that to some good pointe, that earst I had begonne. For (thought I) seing
+the booke hath in it, much pleasant varietie of thinges, and yet more
+profite in the pitthe: if it faile to bee otherwise rewarded, yet shal it
+thankefully of the good be regarded. Wherefore setting vpon it a fresshe,
+where the booke is deuided acording to thaunciente diuision of the earth
+into thre partes, Affrique, Asie, and Europe: hauing brought to an ende the
+two firste partes, I found no persons in mine opinion so fitte as your
+honour, to present theim vnto. For seing the whole processe ronneth vpon
+gouernaunce and Lawes, for thadministracion of commune wealthes, in peace
+and in warre, of aunciente times tofore our greate graundfathers daies: to
+whom mighte I bettre presente it, then to a Lorde of verie nobilitie and
+wisedome, that hath bene highe Mareshalle in the field abrode, deputie of
+the locke and keie of this realme, and a counsailour at home, of thre
+worthie princes. Exercised so many waies in the waues of a fickle Commune
+wealthe: troubled sometime, but neuer disapoincted of honourable successe.
+To your good Lordeshippe then I yelde and committe, the firste fruictes of
+my libertie, the firste croppe of my labours, this first daie of the Newe
+yere: beseching the same in as good parte to receiue it, as I humblie offre
+it, and at your pleasure to vnfolde the Fardle, and considre the stuffe.
+Whiche euer the farder in, shall sieme I truste the more pleasaunte and
+fruictefulle. And to conclude, if I shall vndrestande, that your honour
+delighteth in this, it shal be a cause sufficiente, to make me go in hande
+with Europe, that yet remaineth vntouched. Almightie God giue vnto your
+Lordeshippe prosperous fortune, in sounde honour and healthe.
+
+Your Lordshippes moste humblie at commaundemente,
+
+WILLIAM WATREMAN.
+
+
+The Preface of the Authour.
+
+I haue sought out at times, as laisure hath serued me, Good reader, the
+maners and facions the Lawes, Customes and Rites, of all suche peoples, as
+semed notable, and worthy to be put in remembrance, together with the
+situation and description of their habitations: which the father of Stories
+Herodotus the Greke, Diodorus, the Siciliane, Berosus Strabo, Solinus,
+Trogus Pompeius, Ptolomeus, Plinius, Cornelius the still, Dionysius the
+Africane, Pomponius Mela, Cæsar, Iosephus, and certein of the later
+writers, as Vincentius, and Aeneas Siluius (which aftreward made Pope, had
+to name Pius the seconde) Anthonie Sabellicus, Ihon Nauclerus, Ambrose
+Calepine, Nicholas Perotte, in his cornu copiæ, and many other famous
+writers eche one for their parte, as it were skatered, and by piece meale,
+set furthe to posteritie. Those I saie haue I sought out, gathered
+together, and acordyng to the ordre of the storie and tyme, digested into
+this litle packe. Not for the hongre of gaine, or the ticklyng desire of
+the peoples vaine brute, and vnskilfulle commendacion: but partly moued
+with the oportunitie of my laisure, and the wondrefull profits and
+pleasure, that I conceiued in this kinde of studie my self, and partly that
+other also delightyng in stories, might with litle labour, finde easely
+when thei would, the somme of thynges compiled in one Booke, that thei ware
+wonte with tediousnes to sieke in many. And I haue shocked theim vp
+together, as well those of aunciente tyme, as of later yeres, the lewde, as
+well as the vertuous indifferentlie, that vsing them as present examples,
+and paternes of life, thou maiest with all thine endeuour folowe the
+vertuous and godlie, and with asmuche warenes eschewe the vicious and
+vngodly. Yea, that thou maiest further, my (reader) learne to discerne, how
+men haue in these daies amended the rude simplicitie of the first worlde,
+from Adam to the floud and many yeres after, when men liued skateryng on
+the earthe, without knowlege of Money, or what coigne ment, or Merchauntes
+trade: no maner of exchaunge, but one good tourne for another. When no man
+claimed aught for his seueralle, but lande and water ware as commune to al,
+as Ayer and Skie. When thei gaped not for honour, ne hunted after richesse,
+but eche man contented with a litle, passed his daies in the wilde fielde,
+vnder the open heauen, the couerte of some shadowie Tree, or slendre
+houelle, with suche companion or companions as siemed them good, their
+diere babes and children aboute them. Sounde without carcke and in rest
+full quietnesse, eatyng the fruictes of the fielde, and the milke of the
+cattle, and drinking the waters of the christalline springes. First clad
+with the softe barcke of trees, or the faire broade leaues, and in processe
+with rawe felle and hide full vnworkemanly patched together. Not then
+enuironed with walles, ne pente vp with rampers, and diches of deapthe, but
+walking at free scope emong the wanderyng beastes of the fielde, and where
+the night came vpon theim, there takyng their lodgyng without feare of
+murtherer or thief. Mery at the fulle, as without knowledge of the euilles
+that aftre ensued as the worlde waxed elder, through diuers desires, and
+contrarie endeuours of menne. Who in processe for the insufficience of the
+fruictes of the earthe, (whiche she tho gaue vntilled) and for default of
+other thynges, ganne falle at disquiete and debate emong themselues, and to
+auoied the inuasion of beastes, and menne of straunge borders, (whom by
+themselues thei could not repelle) gathered into companies, with commune
+aide to withstande suche encursions and violence of wrong. And so ioyning
+in confederacie, planted themselues together in a plotte, assigned their
+boundes, framed vp cotages, one by anothers chieque, diked in themselues,
+chose officers and gouernours and deuised lawes, that thei also emong
+theimselues might liue in quiete. So beginning a rough paterne of tounes
+and of Cities, that aftre ware laboured to more curious finesse.
+
+And now ware thei not contented, with the commodities of the fieldes and
+cattle alone, but by diuers inuencions of handecraftes and sciences, and by
+sondrie labours of this life, thei sought how to winne. Now gan thei
+tattempte the sease with many deuices, to transplante their progenie and
+ofspring into places, vnenhabited, and to enioye the commodities of eche
+others countrie, by mutuall traffique. Now came the Oxe to the yoke, the
+Horse to the draught, the Metalle to the stampe, the Apparel to
+handsomenes, the Speache to more finesse, the Behauiour of menne to a more
+calmenesse, the Fare more deintie, the Buildyng more gorgeous,
+thenhabitours ouer all became milder and wittier, shaking of (euen of their
+owne accorde) the bruteshe outrages and stearne dealinges, that shamefully
+mought be spoken of. Nowe refrained thei from sleayng one of a nother, from
+eatyng of ech others flesh, from rape and open defiling of mother, sister,
+and daughter indifferently, and fro many like abominacions to nature and
+honestie. Thei now marieng reason, with strength: and pollicie, with might:
+where the earthe was before forgrowen with bushes and wooddes, stuffed with
+many noisome beastes, drouned with meares, and with marshe, vnfitte to be
+enhabited, waast and vnhandsome in euery condition: by wittie diligence,
+and labour, ridde it from encombraunce, planed the roughes, digged vp trees
+by the rootes, dried away the superfluous waters, brought all into
+leauelle, banished barreinesse, and vncouered the face of the earth, that
+it might fully be sene, conuerted the champeine to tillage, the plaines to
+pasture, the valley to meadow, the hilles thei shadowed with wooddes and
+with Vines, Then thruste thei in cultre and share, and with wide woundes of
+the earthe, wan wine and corne plenteously of the grounde, that afore
+scarcely gaue them Akornes and Crabbes. Then enhabited thei more thicke,
+and spred themselues ouer all, and buylte euery where. Of Tounes, thei made
+cities, and of villages, Tounes, Castles vpon the rockes, and in the
+valleis made thei the temples of the goddes. The golden graueled springes,
+thei encurbed with Marblo, and with trees right pleasauntlie shadowed them
+aboute. From them they deriued into cities and Tounes, the pure freshe
+waters, a great distaunce of, by conduicte of pipes and troughes, and suche
+other conueyance. Where nature had hidden the waters, out of sighte, thei
+sancke welles of greate deapth, to supplie their lackes. Riuers, and maigne
+floudes, whiche afore with vnbrideled violence, oftymes ouerflowed the
+neighboured aboute, to the destruction of their cattle, their houses, and
+themselues: thei restrained with bancques, and kept them in a course. And
+to the ende thei might not onely be vadable, but passed also with drie
+foote, thei deuised meanes with piles of Timbre, and arches of stone,
+maulgre the rage of their violent streames, to grounde bridges vpon them.
+Yea, the rockes of the sea whiche for the daungier of the accesse, thoughte
+themselues exempte from the dinte of their hande, when thei perceiued by
+experience, thei ware noyous to sailers, with vnspeakeable labour did thei
+ouerthrowe and breake into gobettes. Hewed out hauens on euery strond,
+enlarged crieques, opened rodes, and digged out herborowes, where their
+shippes mighte ride saulfe fro the storme. Finally thei so laboured,
+beautified, and perfeighted the earthe, that at this daie compared with the
+former naturalle forgrowen wastenesse, it might well sieme not to be that,
+but rather the Paradise of pleasure, out of the whiche, the first paternes
+of mankinde (Adam and Eue) for the transgression of Goddes precept, ware
+driuen.
+
+Men also inuented and founde many wittie sciences, and artes, many
+wondrefull workes whiche when by practice of lettres, thei had committed to
+bookes, and laied vp for posteritie, their successours so woundered at
+their wisedomes, and so reuerenced their loue and endeuours (whiche thei
+spied to be meant toward them, and the wealth of those that shuld folow of
+them) that thei thought them not blessed enough, with the estate of men
+mortalle, but so aduaunced their fame, and wondered at their worthinesse,
+that thei wan theim the honour and name of Goddes immortall.
+
+Tho gan the Prince of the worlde, when men so gan to delight in thadournyng
+of the worlde, to sowe vpon the good siede, the pestilente Dernell, that as
+thei multiplied in nombre, so iniquitie might encrease, to disturbe and
+confounde this blessed state.
+
+First, therefore when he had with all kinde of wickedness belimed the
+world, he put into their heades, a curious searche of the highest
+knowledge, and suche as depended vpon destenie of thynges. And so practised
+his pageauntes, by obscure and doubtfully attempted Responcions, and voices
+of spirites, that after he had fettred the worlde in the trauers of his
+toies, and launced into their hartes a blinde supersticion, and feare: he
+trained it whole to a wicked worship of many goddes and Goddesses, that
+when he ones had wiped cleane out of mynde the knowledge and honour of one
+God euerlastyng, he might practise vpon manne, some notable mischief. Then
+sette he vp pilgrimages to deuilles, foreshewers of thynges, that gaue
+aduerisemente and answere to demaundes in sondrie wise. In the Isle of
+Delphos one, in Euboea another, at Nasamone a thirde, and emong the
+Dodonians, the famous okes, whose bowes by the blastes of the winde
+resounded to the eare, a maner of aduertisemente of deuellishe delusion. To
+the whiche Idolles and Images of deuelles he stirred vp men to do the
+honour (Helas) due onely to God. As to Saturne in Italie, to Iupiter in
+Candie, to Iuno in Samos, to Bacchus in India, and at Thebes: to Isis, and
+Osiris in Egypte: in old Troie to Vesta: aboute Tritona in Aphrique, to
+Pallas, in Germanie and Fraunce to Mercurie, vnder the name of Theuthe: to
+Minerua at Athenes and Himetto, to Apollo in Delphos, Rhodes, Chio, Patara,
+Troade and Tymbra. To Diane in Delos and in Scythia, to Venus in Paphos,
+Ciprus, Gnydon, and Cithera. To Mars in Thracia, to Priapus in Lampsacho of
+Hellespontus, to Vulcane in Lypara and Lennos, and in diuers other places
+to sondrie other, whose remembraunce was then moste freshe in the memorie
+of their people, for the benefaictes and merueilous inuencions bestowed
+emong them.
+
+Afterward, also when Iesus Christe the verie sonne of the almightie father,
+shewyng hymself in the fleshe of our mortalitie, was conuersaunte in the
+worlde, pointyng to the same, as with his fingre, the waie to immortalitie,
+and endelesse blessednesse, and bothe with woorde and example, exhorted and
+allured them to vprightnes of life, to the glorie of his father, sendyng
+his disciples and scolers into the vniuersall worlde, to condemne
+Superstition and all errour of wickednes, with the moste healthsome woorde:
+to plante true Religion, and geue newe preceptes, and directions of the
+life, and had now set the matier in suche forwardnesse and poincte, that
+the Gospell beyng generally of all nacions receiued, there lacked but
+continuaunce to perfeicte felicitie: The deuell eftesones retournyng to his
+naturall malice, desirous to repossesse that, that constrainedly he
+forsooke, betrappyng again the curious conceipte of man, some he reuersed
+into their former abuses and errours, and some with newe Heresies he so
+corrupted, snarled, and blynded, that it had bene muche bettre for them,
+neuer almoste to haue knowen the waie of truthe, then after their
+entraunce, so rashely and maliciously to haue forsaken it.
+
+At this daie in Asia the lesse, the Armenianes, Arabians, Persians,
+Sirians, Assirians and Meades: in Aphrique, the Egipcians, Numidians,
+Libiens, and Moores. In Europe, the whole countrie of Grecia, Misia,
+Thracia, and all Turquie throwyng awaie Christe, are become the folowers
+and worshippers of Mahomet and his erronious doctrine. The people of
+Scithia, whom we now cal Tartares (a greate people and wide spread) parte
+of them worshippe the Idolle of their Emperour Kamme, parte the Sonne, the
+Moone, and other Starres, and part according to the Apostles doctrine, one
+onely God. The people of Inde, and Ethiope, vnder the gouernaunce of
+Presbiter Ihon perseauer in Christiane godlinesse, howbeit after a sort,
+muche different from ours.
+
+The sincere and true faithe of Christ, wherewith in time it pleased God to
+illumine the worlde, remaineth in Germanie, Italy, Fraunce, Spaine,
+Englande, Scotland, Ireland, Denmarke, Liuon, Pruse, Pole, Hungarie, and
+the Isles of Rhodes, Sicilie, Corsica, Sardinia, with a fewe other. This
+bytter enemie of mankinde hauyng thus with his subtilties, inueiled our
+mindes, and disseuered the christian vnion, by diuersitie of maners and
+facions of belief, hath brought to passe thorough this damnable wyckednes
+of Sacrifices, and Rites, that whilest euery people (vndoubtedly with
+religious entent) endeuour theim selues to the worshippe of God, and
+echeone taketh vpon him to be the true and best worshipper of him, and
+whilest echone thinke theim selues to treade the streight pathe of
+euerlastyng blessednes, and contendeth with eigre mode and bitter dispute,
+that all other erre and be ledde farre a wrie: and whilest euery man
+strugglethe and striueth to spread and enlarge his owne secte, and to
+ouerthrowe others, thei doe so hate and enuie, so persecute and annoy
+echone an other, that at this daie a man cannot safely trauaill from one
+countrie to another: yea, thei that would aduenture saufely or vnsaufely,
+be almost euery where holden out. Wherof me thinkes I see it is like to
+come to passe, that whilest one people scant knoweth the name of another,
+(and yet almost neighbours) all that shall this daie be written or reported
+of theim, shalbe compted and refused as lyes. And yeat this maner of
+knowledge and experience, is of it self so pleasant, so profitable and so
+praise worthy, that sundrie (as it is well knowen) for the onely loue and
+desire thereof, leauing their natiue countrie, their father, their mother,
+their wiues and their children, yea, throwyng at their heles their sauftie
+and welfare, haue with greate troubles, vexations, and turmoilynges taken
+vpon theim for experience sake, to cutte through the wallowying seas, and
+many thousande miles, to estraunge theimselues fro their home, yea, and
+those men not in this age alone, but euen from the firste hatchyng of the
+worlde haue been reputed and founde of moste wisedome, authoritie, and good
+facion, sonest chosen with all mennes consent, bothe in peace and warre, to
+administre the commune wealth as maisters and counsaillours, Iudges and
+Capitaines. Suche ware thancient sages of Grece and of Italy, Socrates,
+Plato, Aristotle, Antisthenes, Aristippus, Zeno, and Pythagoras, who
+through their wisedomes and estimacion for trauailes wan them greate
+nombres of folowers, and brought furthe in ordre the sectes named
+Socratici, Academici, Peripateci, Cynici, Cyrenaici, Stoici, and
+Pythagorici, echone chosyng name to glorie in his maister. Suche ware the
+prudente lawemakers of famous memorie, Minois and Rhadamanthus emong the
+Cretenses, Orpheus emong the Thraciens, Draco and Solon emong the
+Athenienses, Licurgus emong the Lacedemonians, Moses emong the Iewes, and
+Zamolxis emong the Scythians, and many other in other stedes whiche dreamed
+not their knowledge in the benchehole at home, but learned of the men in
+the worlde moste wise, the Chaldeies, the Brachmanni, the Gymnosophites and
+the priestes of Egipte, with whom thei had for a space bene conuersant.
+Like glorie, by like trauaill happened to the worthies of the worlde, as to
+Iupiter of Crete (reported fiue times to haue surueied the whole worlde)
+and to his twoo sonnes Dionisius (otherwise called Bacchus) and Hercules
+the mightie. Likewise to Theseus and Iason, and the rest of that voiage. To
+the vnlucky sailer Vlisses, and to the banished Eneas, to Cyrus, Xerxes,
+and Alexander the Greate, to Hanniballe and Mithridate, kyng of Pontus,
+reported able to speake fiftie sondrie languages, to Antiochus, the greate
+and innumerable Princes of Roome, bothe of the Scipioes, Marii, and
+Lentuli. To Pompeius the greate, to Iulius Cesar, Octauian, and Augustus,
+to the Constantines, Charles, Conrades, Henrickes, and Frederickes. Whiche
+all by their exploictes vpon straunge nacions, haue gotten their immortall
+and euerlastyng renoume. Wherefore, seyng there is in the knowledge of
+peoples, and of their maners and facions, so greate pleasure and profite,
+and euery man cannot, yea, fewe men will, go traueile the countries
+themselues: me thinkes gentill reader, thou oughtest with muche thanke to
+receyue at my hande these bookes of the maners and facions of peoples most
+notable and famous, togyther with the places whiche thei enhabite: And with
+no lesse cherefulnes to embrase theim, then if beyng ledde on my hande from
+countrey to countrey, I should poynct the at eye, how euery people liueth,
+and where they haue dwelte, and at this daye doe. Let it not moue the, let
+it not withdrawe the, if any cankered reprehendour of other mens doynges
+shall saie vnto the: It is a thyng hath bene written of, many yeares agone,
+and that by a thousand sondry menne, and yet he but borowyng their woordes,
+bryngeth it foorthe for a mayden booke, and naimeth it his owne. For if
+thou well considre my trade, thou shalt fynd, that I haue not only brought
+thee other mennes olde store, but opened thee also the treasury of myne
+owne witte and bokes, not euery where to be found, and like a liberall
+feaster haue set before thee much of myne owne, and many thynges newe.
+Farewell and thankefully take that, that with labour is brought thee.
+
+
+The Fardle of Facions, conteining the aunciente maners, customes and lawes,
+  of the peoples enhabiting the two partes of the earth, called Affricke
+  and Asie.
+
+
+Affrike.
+
+¶ The first Chapiter.
+
+¶ The true opinion of the deuine, concernyng the beginnyng of man.
+
+When God had in V. daies made perfecte the heauens and the earth, and the
+furniture of bothe: whiche the Latines for the goodlinesse and beautie
+thereof, call Mundus, and we (I knowe not for what reason) haue named the
+worlde: the sixth daie, to the entent there mighte be one to enioye, and be
+Lorde ooer all, he made the moste notable creature Man. One that of all
+earthly creatures alone, is endowed with a mynde, and spirit from aboue.
+And he gaue him to name, Adam; accordyng to the colour of the molde he was
+made of. Then drawing out of his side the woman, whilest he slept, to
+thende he should not be alone, knitte her vnto hym, as an vnseparable
+compaignion, and therwith placed them in the moste pleasaunt plot of the
+earth, fostered to flourishe with the moisture of floudes on euery parte.
+The place for the fresshe grienesse and merie shewe, the Greques name
+Paradisos. There lyued they a whyle a moste blessed life without bleamishe
+of wo, the earth of the own accorde bringing forth all thing. But when they
+ones had transgressed the precepte, they ware banysshed that enhabitaunce
+of pleasure and driuen to shift the world. And fro thenceforth the
+graciousnes of the earth was also abated, and the francke fertilitie therof
+so withdrawen, that labour and swette, now wan [Footnote: _Wan_ and won
+were used indifferently. Thus in Drayton's _Polyolbion_, xi., p. 864 we
+find--"These with the Saxons went, and fortunately _wan_,
+     Whose Captain Hengist first a Kingdom here began."
+
+And in the same page:
+    "As mighty Hengist here, by force of arms had done,
+    So Ella coming in, soon from the Romans won
+    The counties neighb'ring Kent."]
+
+lesse a great deale, then ydle lokyng on before tyme had done. Shortly
+crepte in sickenes, and diseases, and the broyling heate and the nipping
+cold began to assaile their bodyes. Their first sonne was Cayin, and the
+seconde Abell, and then many other. And as the world grewe into yeares, and
+the earth began to waxe thicke peopled, loke as the nombre did encreace, so
+vices grew on, and their lyuing decaied euer into woors. For giltelesse
+dealyng, wrong came in place, for deuoutnesse, contempte of the Goddes, and
+so farre outraged their wickednes, that God skarcely fyndyng one iuste Noha
+on the earth (whom he saued, with his housholde, to repayre the losse of
+mankind and replenysshe the worlde) sente a floude vniuersall, which
+couering all vnder water, killed all fleshe that bare lyfe vppon earth,
+excepte a fewe beastes, birdes, and wormes that ware preserued in the
+misticall arke. In the ende of fiue Monethes aftre the floude began, the
+Arque touched on the mounteines of Armenia. And within foure Monethes
+aftre, Noas and all his beyng restored to the earth, with Goddes
+furtheraunce in shorte space repeopled the worlde. And to thende the same
+myghte euery wheare again be enhabited, he dispersed his yssue and
+kyndredes into sondrie coastes. After Berosus opynion he sent Cham
+otherwyse, named Cameses and Chamesenuus with his ofspring, into Egipte.
+Into Lybia and Cirene, Triton. And into the whole residewe of Affrike the
+ancient Iapetus called Attalus Priscus, Ganges he sent into Easte Asia with
+certeine of the sonnes of Comerus Gallus. And into Arabia the fertile, one
+Sabus, sirnamed Thurifer. Ouer Arabia the Waste he made Arabus gouernour,
+and Petreius ouer Petrea. He gaue vnto Canaan, all that lyeth from Damasco
+to the outemost bordre of Palestine. In Europe he made Tuisco king of
+Sarmatia, from the floude of Tanais vnto the Rhene. And there were ioyned
+vnto him all the sonnes of Istrus, and Mesa, with their brethren, fro the
+mounteyne of Adula to Mesemberia pontica. Archadius and Emathius gouerned
+the Tirianes, Comerus Gallus, had Italie and Fraunce, Samothes, Briteigne
+and Normandie, and Inbal, Spayne. That spiedie and vnripe puttyng forthe of
+the children from their progenitours, before they had throughly learned and
+enured them selues with their facions and maners, was the cause of all the
+diuersitie that after ensued. For Cham, by the reason of his naughty
+demeanour towarde his father, beyng constrayned to departe with his wyfe
+and hys chyldren, planted him selfe in that parte of Arabia, that after was
+called by his name. And lefte no trade of religion to his posteritie,
+because he none had learned of his father. Whereof it came to passe, that
+when in processe of tyme they ware encreased to to many for that londe:
+beyng sent out as it ware, swarme aftre swarme into other habitations and
+skatered at length into sondrie partes of the worlde (for this banysshed
+progeny grewe aboue measure) some fel into errours wherout thei could neuer
+vnsnarle [Footnote: _To snarle_, to entangle; hence, _to unsnarle_--to
+disentangle. "And from her head ofte rente her snarled heare." _Spencer_,
+_Faerie Queene_, iii., xii., 17. "You snarle yourself into so many and
+heynouse absurdities, as you shall never be able to wynde yourself
+oute."--_Cranmer's Answer to Bp. Gardiner_, p. 168. "Supposed to be formed
+from _snare_." [Nares].] themselues. The tongue gan to altre and the
+knowledge of the true God and all godlie worsshippe vanished out of mind.
+Inso muche that some liued so wildely (as aftre thou shalt here) that it
+ware harde to discerne a difference betwixte them and the beastes of the
+felde. Thei that flieted into Egipt, wonderyng at the beautie and course of
+the Sonne, and the Moone, as though there had been in them a power diuine,
+began to worship them as Goddes: callyng the lesse, Isis and the bigger
+Osiris. To Iupiter also thei Sacrificed, and did honour as to the
+principall of life. To Vulcan for fire, to Pallas, as Lady of the skie, to
+Ceres as gouerneresse of the arth, and to sondry other for other sondry
+considerations. Neyther staied that darkenesse of iniquitie in Egipte
+alone, but where so euer the progeny of Cham stepte in from the begynnyng,
+there fell true godlines, all oute of minde and abondage to the deuell
+entred his place. And there neuer was countrie, mother of moe swarmes of
+people, then that part of Arabia, that he, and his, chase to be theirs. So
+greate a mischief did the vntymely banishemente of one manne, bring to the
+whole. Contrarily the progenie of Iapheth, and Sem, brought vp to full
+yeres vndre their elders, and rightly enstructed: contentyng them selues
+with a litle circuite, straied not so wide as this brother had doen.
+Whereby it chaunced that the zeale of the truthe, (I meane of good liuyng
+and true worshippe of one onely God) remained as hidden in one onely
+people, vntill the tyme of Messias.
+
+
+¶ The seconde Chapitre.
+
+¶ The false opinion of the Philosophre concernyng the begynnyng of man.
+
+But the aunciente Philosophers, whiche without knowledge of God, and his
+truthe, many yeres ago, wrate vpon the natures of thinges, and thistories
+of times had another opinion of the originall of man. For certain of them,
+belieued the worlde euer to haue been, and that euer it should be, and man
+together with it to haue had no beginnyng. Certaine did holde that it had a
+beginnyng, and an ende it should haue, and a time to haue been, when man
+was not. For saie thei, the begynner of thynges visible, wrapped vp bothe
+heauen and earth at one instant, togither in one paterne, and so a
+distinction growing on betwixte these meynte bodies, the worlde to haue
+begon in suche ordre as we see. The aire by nature to be continually
+mouyng, and the moste firie parte of thesame, for the lightenesse thereof,
+moste highe to haue climbed. So that sonne and Moone, and the planetes all,
+participatyng of the nature of that lighter substaunce: moue so muche the
+faster, in how muche thei are of the more subtile parte. But that whiche
+was mixed with waterie moisture, to haue rested in the place, for the
+heauinesse thereof, and of the watery partes, the sea to haue comen: and
+the matier more compacte to haue passed into a clamminesse firste, and so
+into earth. This earth then brought by the heate of the sonne into a more
+fastenesse. And after by the same power puffed and swollen in the
+vppermoste parte, there gathered manye humours in sondry places, which
+drawing to ripenesse enclosed them selues in slymes and in filmes, as in
+the maresses of Egipt, and other stondynge waters we often se happen. And
+seynge the heate of thaier sokynly warmeth the cold ground and heate meint
+[Footnote: Mingled.--A word of Chaucer's time. "And in one vessel both
+together meint." _Fletcher's Purple Island_, iv., st. 21.] with moisture is
+apt to engendre: it came to passe by the gentle moisture of the night aire,
+and the comforting heate of the daie sonne, that those humours so riped,
+drawyng vp to the rinde of thearth, as though their tyme of childbirthe
+ware come, brake out of their filmes, and deliuered vpon the earth all
+maner of liuing thinges. Emong whiche those that had in them moste heate,
+became foules into the aire: those that ware of nature more earthie, became
+wormes and beastes of sondrie kindes: and where water surmounted, thei
+drewe to the elemente of their kinde, and had to name fishes. But
+afterwarde the earth beyng more parched by the heate of the Sonne, and the
+drouthe of the windes, ceased to bring furthe any mo greate beastes: and
+those that ware already brought furthe, (saie thei) mainteined, and
+encreased by mutualle engendrure, the varietie, and nombre. And they are of
+opinion that in the same wise, men ware engendred in the beginning. And as
+nature putte them forth emong other beastes, so liued they at the first an
+vnknowen lyfe wyldely emong them, vpon the fruictes, and the herbes of the
+fieldes. But the beastes aftre a while waxing noysome vnto them, they ware
+forced in commune for eche others sauftie to drawe into companies to
+resiste their anoyaunce, one helping another, and to sieke places to make
+their abiding in. And where at the firste their speache was confuse, by
+litle and litle they sayed it drewe to a distinctenesse, and perfeigthe
+difference: in sorte that they ware able to gyue name to all thinges. But
+for that they ware diuersely sparckled in diuers partes of the worlde, they
+holde also that their speache was as diuers and different. And herof to
+haue aftreward risen the diuersitie of lettres. And as they firste
+assembled into bandes, so euery bande to haue broughte forthe his nation.
+But these men at the firste voide of all helpe and experience of liuyng,
+ware bittrely pinched with hongre and colde, before thei could learne to
+reserue the superfluous plenty of the Somer, to supply the lacke of Winters
+barreinesse, whose bitter blastes, and hongrie pinynges, consumed many of
+them. Whiche thing when by experience dere bought, thei had learned: thei
+soughte bothe for Caues to defende them fro colde, and began to hourde
+fruictes. Then happe found out fire, and reason gaue rule of profite, and
+disprofite, and necessitie toke in hand to sette witte to schoole. Who
+gatheryng knowledge, and perceiuyng hymself to haue a helpe of his sences,
+more skilful then he thought, set hande a woorke, and practised connyng, to
+supplie all defaultes, whiche tongue and lettres did enlarge and distribute
+abrode.
+
+Thei that had this opinion of the originall of manne, and ascribed not the
+same to the prouidence of God, affirmed the Etopiens to haue bene the
+firste of all menne. For thei coniectured that the ground of that countrie
+lyng nierest the heates of the Sonne must needes first of all other waxe
+warme. And the earth at that tyme beyng but clammie and softe, through the
+attemperaunce of that moysture and heate, man there first to haue bene
+fourmed, and there to haue gladlier enhabited (as natiue and naturall vnto
+him) then in any other place, when all places ware as yet straunge, and
+vnknowen, whiche aftre men soughte. Beginnyng therfore at them, after I
+haue shewed how the worlde is deuided into thre partes (as also this
+treatise of myne) and haue spoken a litle of Aphrique, I wyll shewe the
+situacion of Aethiope, and the maners of that people, and so forthe of al
+other regions and peoples, with suche diligence as we can.
+
+
+¶ The thirde Chapitre.
+
+¶ The deuision and limites of the Earthe.
+
+Those that haue bene before our daies, (as Orosius writeth) are of opinion,
+that the circuite of the earth, bordered about with the Occean Sea:
+disroundyng hym self, shooteth out thre corner wise, and is also deuided
+into thre seuerall partes, Afrike, Asie, and Europe. Afrike is parted from
+Asie with the floude of Nilus, whiche comyng fro the Southe, ronneth
+through Ethiope into Egipte, where gently sheadyng hymself ouer his
+bancques, he leaueth in the countrie a marueilous fertilitie, and passeth
+into the middle earth sea, with seuen armes. From Europe it is separate
+with the middle earth sea, whiche beginnyng fro the Occean aforesaied: at
+the Islande of Gades, and the pileurs of Hercules, passeth not tenne miles
+ouer. But further entryng in, semeth to haue shooued of the maigne lande on
+bothe sides, and so to haue won a more largenesse. Asie is deuided from
+Europe, with Tanais the floude, whiche comyng fro the North, ronneth into
+the marshe of Meotis almoste midwaie, and there sincking himself, leaueth
+the marshe and Pontus Euxinus, for the rest of the bounde. And to retourne
+to Afrike again, the same hauyng Nilus as I saied on the Easte, and on all
+other partes, bounded with the sea, is shorter then Europe, but broader
+towarde the Occean, where it riseth into mounteigne. And shoryng towarde
+the Weste, by litle and litle waxeth more streighte, and cometh at thende
+to a narowe poincte. Asmuche as is enhabited therof, is a plentuous soile,
+but the great parte of it lieth waste, voide of enhabitauntes, either to
+whote [Footnote: Too hot.] for menne to abide, or full of noisome and
+venemous vermine, and beastes, or elles so whelmed in sande and grauell,
+that there is nothing but mere barreinesse. The sea that lieth on the
+Northe parte, is called Libicum, that on the Southe Aethiopicum, and the
+other on the West Atlanticum.
+
+At the first the whole was possest by fower sondrie peoples. Of the whiche,
+twaine (as Herodotus writeth) ware founde there, tyme out of minde, and the
+other twaine ware alienes and incommes. The two of continuance, ware the
+Poeni, and Ethiopes, whiche dwelte, the one at the Northe of the lande, the
+other at the South. The Alienes, the Phoenices, the Grekes, the old
+Ethiopians, and the Aegipcienes, if it be true that thei report of
+themselues. At the beginnyng thei were sterne, and vnruly, and bruteshely
+liued, with herbes and with fleshe of wilde beastes, without lawe or rule,
+or facion of life, roilyng and rowmyng vpon heade, heather and thether
+without place of abode, where night came vpon them, there laiyng their
+bodies to reste. Afterwarde (as thei saie) Hercules passyng the seas out of
+Spaine, into Libie (a countrie on the Northe shore of Afrike) and bringyng
+an ouerplus of people thence with hym, somewhat bettre facioned and manered
+then thei, trained them to muche more humanitie. And of the troughes
+[Footnote: Ships.] thei came ouer in, made themselues cotages, and began to
+plante in plompes [Footnote: Clumps, bodies.] one by another. But of these
+thinges we shall speake here aftre more at large.
+
+Afrike is not euery place a like enhabited. For toward the Southe it lieth
+for the moste part waste, and vnpeopled, for the broilyng heate of that
+quatre. But the part that lieth ouer against Europe, is verie well
+enhabited. The frutefulnesse of the soile is excedyng, and to muche
+merueillous: as in some places bringyng the siede with a hundred folde
+encrease. It is straunge to beleue, that is saied of the goodnesse of the
+soile of the Moores. The stocke of their vines to be more then two menne
+can fadome, and their clousters of Grapes to be a cubite long. The
+coronettes of their Pasnepes, and Gardein Thistles (whiche we calle
+Hortichokes) as also of their Fenelle, to be twelue Cubites compasse. Their
+haue Cannes like vnto those of India, whiche may contein in the compasse of
+the knot, or iointe, the measure of ij. bushelles. Ther be sene also
+Sparagi, of no lesse notable bigguenesse. Toward the mounte Atlas trees bee
+founde of a wondrefull heigth, smothe, and without knaggue or knotte, vp to
+the hard toppe, hauyng leaues like the Cypres, but of all other the moste
+noble Citrus, wherof the Romaines made great deintie. Affrike hath also
+many sondrie beastes, and Dragones that lye in awaite for the beastes, and
+when thei se time, so bewrappe and wreathe them aboute, that takyng fro
+theim the vse of their ioynctes, thei wearie them and kille theim. There
+are Elephantes, Lyons, Bugles, Pardales, Roes, and Apes, in some places
+beyonde nombre. There are also Chamelopardales and Rhizes, like vnto
+Bulles. Herodote writeth, that there be founde Asses with hornes, Hienas
+Porpentines, wilde Rambes, a beast engendered of the Hiene and the Woulfe
+named Thoas, Pantheres, Storckes, Oistruthes, and many kindes of serpentes,
+as Cerastes, and Aspides, against whom nature hath matched the Ichneumon (a
+verie little beast) as a mortall enemie.
+
+
+¶ The. iiij. Chapitre.
+
+¶ Of Ethiope, and the auncient maners of that nation.
+
+Two countreies there ware of that name Ouerlanders, and Netherlanders. The
+one pertaynyng to Aphrique, the other to Asie. The one whiche at this daie
+is called Inde, hath on the east the redde sea, and the sea named
+Barbaricum, on the northe it toucheth vpon Egypte, and vpon that Libie that
+standeth on the vtter border of Afrike toward the sea. On the west it is
+bounded with the other Libie that standeth more into the mayne londe. The
+residue that runneth toward the south, ioyneth vpon the netherland Ethiope,
+whiche lyeth more southerly, and is muche greater. It is thought that these
+Ethiopes toke name of Ethiopus Vulcanes sonne, that (as Plinie saieth) was
+gouernour there. Or els of the Greke wordes aythoo and ops, whereof the
+former signifieth to broyle, or to bourne vp with heate, and the other, in
+the eye or sight. Whiche sheweth in effecte, that the countreie lyeng in
+the eye of the Sonne, it must nedes be of heate almost importable. As in
+diede it lyeth in the full course of the sonne, and is in continuall heate.
+Toward the weast it is hilly, in the middes grauell and sande, and on the
+easte waste and deserte. There be in it dyuers peoples of sondry phisonomy
+and shape, monstruous and of hugly shewe. They are thought (as I saied) to
+haue bene the fyrst of all men, and those whiche of all other maye
+truelyest be called an homeborne people. Neuer vnder the bondage of any:
+but euer a free nacion. The first wae of worshippyng God (say thei) was
+deuised and taught emonge theim: with the maners and ceremonies there to
+appertinent. They had two kyndes of letters, one, whiche ware knowen onely
+to their priestes for matters of Religion, whiche they called misticall,
+and another for the vse of the people hidden from none. Yeat ware not their
+Letters facioned to ioyne together in sillables like ours, but Ziphres, and
+shapes of men and of beastes, of heades, and of armes, and artificers
+tooles, which signified in sondrie wise echone accordyng to his propertie.
+As by the picture of an hauke swiftenes and spiede, by the shape of a
+crocodile [Transcriber's note: 'crocoiled' in original] displeasure or
+misfortune, by the figure of an eye, good watche or regarde, and so forthe
+of other. Emong their priestes, loke whome they sawe startle aboute as
+haulfe wood, [Footnote: Mad, from the Saxon _wod_. See "Two Gentlemen of
+Verona," ii., 3, and "Mids. N. Dr.," ii., 3.] him did iudge of all
+othermooste holy, and making him their king, they fall downe and worship
+him, as thoughe there ware in him a Godhead, or as thoughe at the least he
+ware by goddes prouidence giuen them. This king for al that, must be
+gouerned by the lawe, and is bounde to all thinges after thorde of the
+contry. He his selfe maye neither punishe or guerdon any manne. But loke
+vpon whome he wyl haue execution done, he sendeth the minister appoincted
+for the purpose, to the person with a token of deathe: whiche when he hath
+shewed, the officier retourneth, and the persone what soeuer he be,
+incontinent fordoeth him self. So greatly ware they giuen to thee honour of
+their kynges, suche a feruencie had they towarde them, that if it fortuned
+the king through any mishap, to be maymed or hurte in any parte of his
+bodye, as many as ware towarde him, namely of householde, voluntarily
+woulde giue them selues the lyke hurt, thincking it an vnfitting
+[Transcriber's note: original 'unsitting'] thing the kynge to lacke an eye
+or the vse of a legge, and his frindes neither to halt, ne yet to lacke
+parte of their sight. Thei say it is the manier also, that when the king
+dieth, his friendes should wilfully dispatche theim selues and die with
+hym, for this compte they glorious and a testimony of very friendship. The
+moste part of them, for that they lye so vnder the Sonne, go naked:
+couering their priuities with shiepes tayles. But a feawe of them are clad
+with the rawe felles [Footnote: Skin. "To feed on bones, when flesh and
+fell is gone." _Gasc. Steel Glass_ (Chalm. Poet.), ii., 556, etc.] of
+beastes. Some make them brieches of the heares of their heades vp to the
+waeste. They are comonly brieders and grasiers in commune together. Their
+shepe be of very small body, and of a harde and roughe coate. Their dogges
+also are neuer a whitte bigger, but thei are fierce and hardie. They haue
+good store of gromel and barly, wherof they vse to make drincke. All other
+graine and fruictes thei lacke, excepte it be dates whiche also are verye
+skante. Some of them lyue with herbes and the tender rootes of cannes or
+Riedes. Other eate flesshe, milke, and chese. Meroe, was in time past the
+heade citie of the kyngdome, whiche stondeth in an Isle of the same name
+facioned like a shielde, stretching it self thre thousand furlong alongest
+by Nilus. Aboute that Islande do the cattle masters dwelle, and are muche
+giuen to hunting, and those that be occupied with tilthe of the grounde
+haue also mines of gold. Herodotus writeth that thethiopians named
+Macrobij, do more estieme latten then thei do golde whiche thei put to
+nothyng that thei compt of any price. In so muche that the Ambassadours of
+Cambises, when thei came thether, found the prisoners in the gaole fettred
+and tied with Chaines of golde. Some of theim sowe a kinde of graine called
+Sesamus, and other the delicate Lothom. Thei haue greate plenty of Hebenum,
+a woode muche like Guaiacum, and of Siliquastrum. Thei hunte Elephantes and
+kyll them to eate. There be Lions, Rhinocerotes, Basiliskes, Pardales, and
+Dragones, whiche I said enwrappe thelephauntes, and sucke them to death,
+for their bloude. There be found the precious stones called the Iacinthe,
+and the Prasne. There is also cinamome gathered. Thei occupie bowes of
+woode seasoned in the fire, of foure cubites long. Women be trayned also to
+the warres, and haue for the moste parte a ring of latton hanging throughe
+their lippe. Certeine of theim worshippe the Sonne at his vprijste, and
+curse him moste bitterly at his doune gate. Diuers of them throwe their
+dead into Riuers, other cofer them vp in earthen cofres, some enclose them
+in glasse, and kepe them in their houses a yeare, and in the meane season
+worship them deuoutly, and offre vnto them the first of all their encreace.
+In the naming of a newe king, they giue their voice chiefly to him that is
+moste goodly of stature, moste conning in brieding of cattle, and of
+strength and substance passing the reast. The lawe hath bene, that the
+priestes of Memphis shoulde haue the aucthoritie to sende the Kinge the
+token of deathe, and to set vp another in the place of the deade, whom they
+thoughte good. They haue an opinion that ther are two Goddes, one
+immortall, by whome all thinges haue their beginning and continuance vnder
+his gouernement, and another mortall, and he is vncerteine. Their king, and
+him that best deserueth of the city next vnto him, they honour as Goddes.
+This was the state of Ethiope from the beginning, and many yeares sence.
+
+But at this daye as myne Authour Sabellicus saieth that he learned of those
+that are enhabitantes in that countrey: The King of Ethiope (whom we
+commonly calle Pretoianes or Presbiter Ihon) is a man of suche power, that
+he is reported to haue vndre him thre skore and two other kinges. If the
+heade Bysshoppess of the Realme desire to do, or to haue aughte done, al is
+referred vnto him. Of him be giuen al benefices, and spiritual promocions,
+which prerogatiue the Pope hath giuen, to the maiestie of kinges. Yet is he
+him selfe no priest, he hath any maner of ordres. There is of
+Archebisshoppes (that is to say of superiour and head bisshoppes) a great
+nombre, whiche haue euery one vndre them at the least twenty other. The
+Princes, Dukes, Earles, and head Bishoppes, and suche other of like
+dignitie, when they come abrode, haue a crosse, and a basine of golde
+filled ful of earthe caried before them: that thone [Footnote: The one.]
+maye put them in remembraunce that earth into earth must again be resolued,
+and the other renewe the memory of Christes suffering. Their priestes to
+haue yssue, mary one wyfe, but she ones beyng dead, it is vnlawfull to mary
+another. The temples and churches ther, are muche larger, much richer, and
+more gorgeous then ours, for the moste part voulted from the floore to the
+toppe. They haue many ordres of deuout men, moche like to our ordres of
+Religious: as the ordre of S. Anthony, Dominique, Calaguritani, Augustines,
+and Machareanes, whiche are bound to no colour but weare some suche one as
+Tharchebysshoppe shall allowe. Next vnto the supreame and souereigne GOD,
+and Mary the virgin his mother, they haue moste in honour Thomas sirnamed
+Didimus. This King, of all other the worthiest, whome they call Gias (a
+name giuen him of his mightiness and power) is of the bloud of Dauid,
+continued from one generation to another (as they are perswaded) by so many
+yeres of succession. And he is not as the moste of the Ethiopians are,
+blacke, but white. Gamma the chiefe citie, and as we terme it the chambre
+of the king, stondeth not by building of masonrie, and carpentrie as ours,
+but strieted with tentes and pauilions placed in good ordre, of veluet and
+saten, embrauded with silkes and purples of many diuers sortes. By an
+auncient ordre of the realme, the king liueth euer in presence and sighte
+of his people, and neuer soiourneth within the walles aboue two daies.
+Either for that they iudge it an vncomely thing, and a token of delicate
+slouthfulnes, or elles for that some law doth forbid it. His army in the
+warres is ten hundred thousande men, fiue hundred Elephantes, and horses,
+and Cameles, a wonderfull nomber, and this is but a meane preparacion. Ther
+are througheout the whole nacion certeine houses and stockes, that are
+pencionaries at armes, whose issue is as it ware branded with the marcke of
+the crosse, the skinne beyng pretely slitte. Thei vse in the warres, Bowe,
+Pique, Habregeon, and helmette. Their highest dignitie is priesthode, the
+next, thordre of the Sages, whiche thei cal Balsamates, and Tamquates. They
+attribute moche also to the giltelesse and vprighte dealing man, whiche
+vertue they estieme as the firste staier to climbe to the dignitie of the
+sages. The nobilitie hath the thirde place of dignitie, and the
+pencionaries aforesaid, the fourthe. When the iudges haue giuen sentence of
+life, or of deathe, the sentence is brought to the headborough of the Citie
+(whom we call the Mayour) and they Licomegia: he supplieth the place of the
+King. Lawes written thei occupy none, but iudge accordyng to reason and
+conscience. If any man be conuict of adulterie he forfeicteth the fourtieth
+parte of his goodes, but thadulteresse is punished at home, accordyng to
+the discretion of the partie offended. The men giue dowrie to those whom
+thei mary withal, but not to those that thei purchase besides. Their womens
+attire is of Golde, (whereof that country hathe plentie) of pearle, and of
+Sarsenette. Bothe men and women are apparelled in long garmentes downe to
+the foote, slieued, and close rounde aboute of al maner of colours, sauing
+only blacke for that in that contry is proper for morning. They bewaile
+their dead xl. daies space. In bancquettes of honour, in the place of our
+fruicte (which the latine calleth the seconde boorde) they serue in rawe
+flesshe very finely minced and spiced, whervpon the gestes fiede very
+licouricely. [Footnote: Gluttonously, daintily. (N. Wiley's Dictionary,
+1737).] They haue no maner of wollen webbe, but are eyther cladde in
+sarsenettes, or in linnen. One maner of speache serueth not througheout the
+whole contry, but sondry and diuerse, aswel in phrase as in naming of
+thinges. Thei haue twise in the yere haruest, and twise in the yere somer.
+These Ethiopians or Indianes excepted, al the reste of the people of Libia
+Westward, are worshippers of Mahomet, and liue aftre the same sorte in
+maner, that the Barbariens do in Egipte at this present, and are called
+Maures, or Moores, as I thincke of their outleapes and wilde rowming. For
+that people was no lesse noysome to Lybie in those cursed tymes (when so
+greate mutacion of thinges happened, when peoples ware so chaunged, suche
+alteration of seruice, and religion broughte in, and so many newe names
+giuen vnto contries) then the Sarasens ware.
+
+
+¶ The v. Chapiter
+
+¶ Of Aegipte, and the auncient maners of that people.
+
+Aegipte is a Countrie lying in Affrike, or as some hold opinion, borderyng
+thervpon, so named of Aegiptus, Danaus brother, where afore it was called
+Aeria. This Aegipte (as Plinie recordeth in his fiueth boke) toucheth on
+the East, vppon the redde Sea, and the land of Palestine; On the West
+fronteth vpon Cirene, and the residue of Afrike. On the South it stretcheth
+to Aethiope: And on the Northe is ended with the sea, to whom it giueth
+name. The notable Cities of that Countrie, were in tyme past, Thebes,
+Abydos, Alexandrie, Babilon, and Memphis, at this daie called Damiate,
+alias Chairas or Alkair, and the seate of the Soldan, a citie of notable
+largenesse. In Aegipt as Plato affirmeth, it was neuer sene rain. But Nilus
+suppliyng that defaulte, yerely about saincte Barnabies tide, with his
+ouerflowynges maketh the soile fertile. It is nombred of the moste parte of
+writers, emong the Islandes: For that Nilus so parteth hymself aboute it,
+that he facioneth it triangle wise.
+
+The Aegiptians firste of all other, deuised the names of the twelue Goddes,
+builte vp Altares, and Images, erected Chappelles and Temples, and graued
+in stone the similitude of many sondrie beastes. All whiche their doynges,
+dooe manifestly make, that thei came of the Aethiopes, who (as Diodore the
+Sicilian saieth) ware the firste inuentours of all these. Their women in
+old tyme, had all the trade of occupiyng, and brokage [Footnote: To _broke_
+i.e. to deal, or transact business particularly of an amorous character.
+(See Fansh. Lusiad, ix., 44; and Daniel, Queen's Arcadia, iii., 3.)]
+abrode, and reuelled at the Tauerne, and kepte lustie chiere: And the men
+satte at home spinnyng, and woorkyng of Lace, and suche other thynges as
+women are wonte. The men bare their burdeins on the heade, the women on the
+shulder. In the easemente of vrine, the men rowked [Footnote: To bend.]
+doune, the women stoode vprighte. The easemente of ordure thei vsed at
+home, but commonly feasted abrode in the stretes. No woman tooke ordres,
+either of God or Goddesse. Their maner of ordres, is not to make seuerally
+for euery Goddesse and God, a seuerall priest, but al at a shuffe, in
+generall for all. Emong the whiche, one is an heade, whose sonne enheriteth
+his roume by succession. The men children, euen of a custome of that
+people, did with good wil kepe their fathers and mothers, but the women
+children (yf they refused it) ware compelled. The moste part of men in
+solempne burialles, shaue their heades, and let theyr beardes growe, but
+Thegiptians shaued their beardes and let their heades grow. They wrought
+their doughe with their fiete, and their claye with their handes. As the
+Grecians do beleue, this people, and their ofspring, are they that vsed
+circumcision. Thei ordre their writyng from their right hande towarde their
+left, contrary to vs. It was the maner emong them, that the menne should
+weare two garmentes at ones, the women but one. As the Aethiopes had, so
+learned they of them, two maner of lettres; the one seuerall to the
+priestes thother vsed in commune. Their priestes, euery thirde daye shaued
+their bodies, that there might be none occasion of filthinesse when they
+shold ministre or sacrifie. Thei did were garmentes of linnen, euer cleane
+wasshed, and white: and shoes of a certeine kinde of russhes, named
+Papyrus, whiche aftre became stuffe, to geue name to our paper. They
+neither sette beane their selues, ne eate them where soeuer they grewe: ne
+the priest may not loke vpon a beane, for that it is iudged an vncleane
+puls. They are wasshed euery daye in colde water thrise, and euery nighte
+twise. The heades of their sacrifices (for that they vsed to curse them
+with many terrible woordes) did they not eate, but either the priestes
+solde them to such strangiers as had trade emonge them, or if there ware no
+suche ready in time, they threwe them in to Nilus.
+
+All the Egiptians offer in sacrifice, neither cowe, ne cowe calfe, because
+they are hallowed to Isis their goddesse, but bulles and bulle calues, or
+oxen, and stieres. For their meate they vse, moche a kynde of pancake, made
+of rye meale. For lacke of grapes they vse wyne made of Barly. They liue
+also with fisshe, either dried in the Sonne and so eaten rawe, or elles
+kept in pikle. They fiede also vpon birdes, and foules, firste salted, and
+then eaten rawe. Quaile, and mallard, are not but for the richer sorte. At
+all solempne suppers, when a number is gathered, and the tables withdrawen,
+some one of the company carieth aboute in an open case, the image of death,
+caruen out of woode, or drawen with the pencille as niere to the vine as is
+possible, of a cubite, or two cubites long at the moste. Who shewyng it
+aboute to euery of the gestes, saieth, loke here: drinke and be mery, for
+aftre thy death, suche shall thou be. The yonger yf they miete their
+auncient, or bettre vpon the way, giue them lace, going somewhat aside: or
+yf the aunciente fortune to come in place where they are sitting, they
+arise out of their seate, wherein they agre with the Lacedemoniens. When
+they miete in the waye, they do reuerence to eche other, bowing their
+bodies, and letting fall their handes on their knees. They weare long
+garments of lynnen, hemmed about the skirtes beneth, which the call
+Casiliras: ouer the which they throwe on another white garment also. Wollen
+apparelle thei neither weare to the churche, ne bewry any man in.
+
+Nowe for asmoche as they afore time that euer excelled in anye kinde of
+learning, or durste take vppon them, to prescribe lawe, and rule of life
+vnto to other, as Orpheus, Homeire, Museus, Melampode, Dedalus, Licurgus,
+Solon, Plato, Pithagoras, Samolxis, Eudoxus, Democritus, Inopides, and
+Moses the Hebrue, with manye other, whose names the Egiptians glorie to be
+cronicled with theim: trauelled first to the Egiptians, to learne emongest
+them bothe wisedome, and politique ordre (wherein at those daies they
+passed all other) me thinketh it pleasaunte and necessarie also, to stande
+somewhat vpon their maners, ceremonies and Lawes, that it may be knowen
+what they, and sondry more haue borowed of them, and translated vnto other.
+For (as Philip Beroalde writeth in his commentary vpon Apuleius booke,
+entituled the Golden Asse) the moste parte of the deuices that we vse in
+our Christian religion, ware borowed out of the maner of Thegiptians. As
+surpluis and rochet, and suche linnen garmentes: shauen crownes, tourninges
+at the altare, our masse solempnities, our organes, our knielinges,
+crouchinges, praiers, and other of that kinde. The kinges of Egipte (saieth
+Diodore the Sicilian in his seconde booke) liued not at rouers [Footnote:
+From the expression _to shoot at rovers_, i.e., at a mark, but with an
+elevation, not point blank.] as other kinges doe, as thoughe me lusteth
+ware lawe, but bothe in their monie collections, and daily fare and
+apparell, folowed the bridle of the lawe. They had neither slaue that was
+homeborne, ne slaue that was forein bought, appointed to attende or awaite
+vpon them. But the sonnes of those that ware priestes of honour, bothe
+aboue thage of twenty yeres, and also singulerly learned. That the king
+hauing these attendant for the body both by daie and by night, restrained
+by the reuerence of the company about hym might commit nothing that was
+vicious, or dishonourable. For men of power are seldome euil, where they
+lacke ministres for their vnlawfull lustes. There ware appoincted houres,
+both of the daie and the night, in the whiche the kinge mighte lawfully
+doe, what the Lawe did permit. In the morning, assone as he was ready, it
+behoued him to peruse al lettres, supplicacions, and billes: that knowing
+what was to be done, he might giue aunswer in tyme: that all thinges might
+rightlie, and ordrely be done. These being dispatched, when he had washed
+his bodie emong the Pieres of the Realme, he put on some robe of estate,
+and Sacrificed to the goddes. The maner was, that the Primate, or head of
+the spiritualty (the beastes appoincted for the sacrifices being brought
+harde to the altare, and the Kyng standing by) should with a loude voyce,
+in the hearing of the people, wysshe to the king (that bare him selfe
+iustely towarde his subiectes) prosperous healthe, and good fortune in all.
+And should further particulerly recite the vertues of the king, his
+deuoutnes and reuerence towarde God, and clemency towarde men. Commende him
+as chaste, iuste, and vpright: of noble and great coinage, sothfaste,
+liberal, and one that well brideled al his desires. Punisshing thoffendour
+vnder his desertes, and rewarding the well doer aboue his merites. Making a
+processe of these, and such other like: in the ende with the rehersalle of
+the contrary vices, he cursed the wicked and euil. Then absoluing the King
+of his offences, he laied all the faulte vpon the ministres, and
+attendauntes, that should at any time moue the king to any thing vnright,
+or vnlawfull. These thinges beinge done, he preached vnto the King the
+blessednes of the life, led accordyng to the pleasure of the goddes, and
+exhorted him thervnto: as also to frame his maners and doinges vnto vertue,
+and not to giue eare to that, that leude men should counsaile him, but to
+followe those thynges that led vnto honour and vertue. In thende, whan the
+King had sacrificed a bulle, the priest declared certain preceptes and
+examples of excellente, and moste worthy men: written in their holy
+scripture. To thende that the Kynge admonisshed by the example of theim,
+might ordre his gouernaunce iustlye, and godly, and not geue hym selfe to
+couetous cloinyng, [Footnote: Probably from the old French, _encloyer_, to
+glut, or surfeit.] and hourdyng of tresure. He neither satte to iudge, ne
+toke his vocacion, ne walked abrode, ne washed at home, ne laye with his
+Quiene, ne finally did any maner of thing, but vpon the prescripte of the
+lawe.
+
+Their fare was but simple, nothing but veale, and goose, and their wine by
+measure appoincted. So that thone should nether ouerlade the bealy, ne the
+other the heade. To conclude, their whole life so bounde vpon temperaunce,
+that it might be thoughte raither to haue bene prescribed them by a
+discrete Phisicen to preserue helthe, then by a politique Lawyer. It
+siemeth wondrefull that the Egiptians mighte not rule their owne priuate
+life, but by the Lawes. But it semeth more wonderfull that their King had
+no liberty of him selfe, either to sitte in iudgement, to make collections
+of money, or topunishe any man, vpon wilfulnes, stoute stomacke, angre,
+displeasure, or anye vniuste cause: But to be holden vnder lawe as a
+commune subiecte, and yet not to be agreued therwith, but to thincke them
+selues moste blessed in obeyeng and folowyng the lawe, and other in
+folowing their lustes most vnhappy, as being led by them into many
+daungiers, and damages. For suche oftentimes, euen when they know them
+selues to do euill, either ouercome with malice, and hatred, or some other
+mischiefe of the minde, are not able to witholde theim selues from the
+euille. But they which by wisedome and discretion, gouerne their liues,
+offende in fewe thinges. The kinges vsing suche an equitie, and vprightnes
+towarde their subdites, are so tendred againe of them, that not onely the
+priestes, but all the Egiptians in generall, haue more care for the health
+and the welfare of the King, then for their wiues, their children, or any
+other princes.
+
+He that to his death continueth in this goodnesse, him being dead, do they
+in general lamente. They teare their clothes, they shut vp the churche
+dores, they haunte no place of wonte commune concourse, they omytte all
+solempne holy daies: and girding them selues vnder the pappes with brode
+Ribbond of Sarsenet, two or thre hundred on a company, men and women
+together, renewe euery daye twise, thre skore and xii. daies together, the
+buriall bewailing, casting dirte on their heades, and singing in rithme the
+vertue of the Kinge. They absteine from al flesshe of beastes, all meates
+that touche fire, all wine and all preparation of seruice at the table.
+They bathe not, thei smel of no swietes, they go to no beddes, they
+pleasure not in women: but as folkes that had buried their beste beloued
+childe, all that continuance of time they lamente. During these seuenty and
+two daies (hauyng prepared all thinges necessarie for the funerall pompe):
+the laste daye of all, the bodie beyng enbaulmed and cofred, is sette
+before the entrie of the Toombe. Thereaftre the custome, one redeth an
+abridgemente of all the thinges done by the king in his life. And if there
+be any man disposed to accuse the deade, libertie is giuen him. The
+priestes are present, and euer giue praise to his well doings, as they be
+recited. There stondeth also rounde about the Toombe a multitude of the
+communes, which with their voices allowe asmuche as is trew, and crie out
+vpon that, that is false, with vehement gainsaienges. Wherby it hath
+happened, that sondry kynges by the repugnynges of the people haue lien
+vntoombed: and haue lacked the honoure of bewrialle, that the good are
+wonte to haue. That feare, hath driuen the kynges of Aegipte, to liue
+iustly, and vprightly, lesse the people aftre their deathes, might shewe
+them suche dishonour, and beare them perpetuall hatred. This was the maner
+specially, of the aunciente kynges there.
+
+The whole realme of Egipte was diuided into Shieres: and to euery Shiere
+was appoincted a Presidente, whiche had the gouernaunce of the whole
+Shiere. The reuenewes of the realme ware diuided into iii. partes: whereof
+the companie of the priestes had the first parte, which ware in greate
+estimacion emong them, both for the administration of Goddes Seruice, and
+also for the good learnyng, wherin thei brought vp many. And this porcion
+was giuen theim, partely for the administracion of the Sacrifices, and
+partely for the vse and commoditie of their priuate life. For thei neither
+thincke it mete, that any parte of the honour of the Goddes should bee
+omitted, or that thei, whiche are Ministres of the commune counsaill and
+profecte, should be destitute of necessary commodities of the life. For
+these menne are alwaie in matters of weighte, called vpon by the nobles,
+for their wisedome and counsaille: And to shewe (as thei can by their
+connyng in the Planettes, and Starres, and by the maner of their
+Sacrifices) the happe of thinges to come. Thei also declare vnto them, the
+stories of men of olde tyme, regested in their holy Scripture, to the ende
+that accordyng to them the kynges maie learne what shall profighte, or
+disprofighte. For the maner is not emong them, as it is emong the Grecians,
+that one manne, or one woman, shoulde attende vpon the sacrifices and
+Ceremonies alone: but thei are many at ones aboute the honour of their
+Goddes, and teache the same ordre to their children. This sorte of menne is
+priuileged, and exempte from all maner of charges, and hath next vnto the
+kyng, the second place of dignitie and honour.
+
+The second portion cometh to the king to maintein his owne state, and the
+charges of the warres: and to shewe liberalitie to men of prowesse
+according to their worthinesse. So that the Communes are neither burdoned
+with taxes nor tributes.
+
+The thirde parte do the pencionaries of the warres receiue, and suche other
+as vpon occasions are moustered to the warres: that vpon the regard of the
+stipende, thei maie haue the better good wille and courage, to hasarde
+their bodies in battaile. Their communaltie is deuided into thre sortes of
+people. Husbande men, Brieders of cattle, and men of occupacion. The
+Husband-men buyeng for a litle money a piece of grounde of the Priestes,
+the king, or the warriour: al the daies of their life, euen from their
+childhode, continually applie that care. Whereby it cometh to passe, that
+bothe for the skoolyng that thei haue therin at their fathers handes, and
+the continuall practisyng fro their youthe, that thei passe all other in
+Husbandrie.
+
+The Brieders, aftre like maner, learnyng the trade of their fathers,
+occupie their whole life therabout. We see also that al maner of Sciences
+haue bene much bettred, yea, brought to the toppe of perfection, emong the
+Egiptians. For the craftes men there, not medlyng with any commune matiers
+that mighte hindre theim, emploie them selues onely to suche sciences as
+the lawe doeth permit them, or their father hath taught them. So that thei
+neither disdaine to be taughte, nor the hatred of eche other, ne any thing
+elles withdraweth them from their crafte.
+
+Their Iudgementes and Sentences of lawe, are not there at giuen aduenture,
+but vpon reason: for thei surely thought that all thinges well done, muste
+niedes be profitable to mannes life. To punishe the offendours, and to
+helpe the oppressed, thoughte thei the best waie to auoide mischiefes. But
+to buye of the punishmente for money or fauour, that thought thei to be the
+very confusion of the commune welfare. Wherefore thei chase out of the
+chief cities (as Heliopole, Memphis, and Thebes) the worthiest men, to be
+as Lordes chief Iustice, or Presidentes of Iudgementes, so that their
+Iustice benche did sieme to giue place, neither to the Areopagites of the
+Athenienses, ne yet to the Senate of the Lacedemonians that many a daie
+after theim ware instituted. Aftre what tyme these chief Iustices ware
+assembled (thirtie in nombre) thei chase out one that was Chauncellour of
+the whole: and when he failed, the citie appoincted another in his place.
+All these had their liuynges of the kyng: but the Chauncellour more
+honorably then the rest. He bare alwaie about his necke a tablette, hangyng
+on a chaine of golde, and sette full of sundrie precious stones, whiche
+thei called Veritie and Truthe. The courte beyng set and begunne, and the
+tablet of Truthe by the Chauncellour laied furthe, and theight bookes of
+their lawes (for so many had thei) brought furth into the middes emong
+them: it was the maner for the plaintife to putte into writyng the whole
+circumstance of his case, and the maner of the wrong doone vnto him, or how
+muche he estemed himself to be endamaged thereby. And a time was giuen to
+the defendant to write answere again to euery poinct, and either to deny
+that he did it, or elles to alledge that he rightfully did it, or elles to
+abate the estimate of the damage or wrong. Then had thei another daie
+appointed, to saie finally for them selues. At the whiche daie when the
+parties on bothe sides ware herd, and the iudges had conferred their
+opinions, the Chauncellour of the Iudges gaue sentence by pointyng with the
+tablet of Veritie, toward the parte that semed to be true. This was the
+maner of their iudgementes.
+
+And forasmuche as we are fallen into mencion of their iudgementes, it shall
+not be vnfyttyng with myne enterprise, to write also the aunciente Lawes of
+the Egiptians, that it maie be knowen how muche they passe, bothe in ordre
+of thynges, and profite.
+
+Fyrst to be periured was headyng: for they thought it a double offence. One
+in regarde of conscience not kept toward God, and an other in gyuynge
+occasion to destroy credite among men, whiche is the chiefest bonde of
+their felowship. If any wayfarying man shuld espy a man sette vppon with
+thieues, or otherwyse to be wronged, and dyd not to his power succour and
+ayde hym, he was gyltie of death. If he ware not able to succour and to
+reskewe hym, then was he bounde to vtter the thieues, and to prosecute the
+matter to enditement. And he that so dyd not, was punyshed with a certayne
+nombre of stripes, and was kept thre days without meate. He that shuld
+accuse any man wrongfully, if he fortuned afterward to be broughte into
+iudgement, he suffered the punishement ordeyned for false accusers. All the
+Egyptians ware compelled to brynge euery man their names to the chiefe
+Iustices, and the facultie or science wherby they liued. In the which
+behalfe if any man lyed, or lyued with vnlaufull meanes, he felle into
+penalitie of death. If any man willyngly had slaine any man free or bond,
+the lawes condemned hym to die, not regardynge the state of the man, but
+the malicious pourpose of the diede. Wherby they made men afrayd to doe
+mischief, and death beynge executed for the death of a bondman, the free
+myght goe in more sauftie. For the fathers that slewe their chyldren, there
+was no punyshement of death appoynted, but an iniunction that they shoulde
+stande thre daies and thre nyghtes togither at the graue of the deade,
+accompanied with a common warde of the people to see the thyng done.
+Neyther dyd it sieme them iuste, that he that gaue life to the childe,
+should lose his life for the childes death, but rather be put to continual
+sorowe, and to be pyned with the repentance of the diede, that other myght
+ther by the withdrawen from the like wyckednes. But for the chyld that
+kylled either father or mother, they deuised this kynd of synguler torment.
+They thruste hym through with riedes sharpned for the nones, in euery ioynt
+all ouer his body, and caused hym quicke to be throwen vpon a heape of
+Thornes, and so to bee burned. Iudgyng that there could not be a greater
+wickednes emong men, then to take awaie the life, from one that had giuen
+life vnto hym. If any woman with child ware condempned to dye, thei abode
+the tyme of her deliueraunce nowithstandyng: for that thei iudged it farre
+from all equitie, that the gilteles should dye together with the giltie. Or
+that ii. should be punished, where but one had offended. Who so had in
+battaille or warre, withdrawen hymself from his bande, forsaken his place
+in the arraie, or not obeied his capitaigne: was not condempned to dye, but
+suffred for his punishemente a notable reproche, of all punishementes the
+woorste, and more greuous then death. Who so had disclosed any secret to
+the ennemie, the Lawe commaunded his tongue to be cutte out of his heade.
+And who so clipped the coigne or countrefacted it, or chaunged the stampe
+or diminisshed the weighte: or in lettres and writinges, shoulde adde any
+thing, by entrelinyng, or otherwise: or should guelde out any thyng, or
+bryng a forged euidence, Obligacion or Bille, bothe his handes ware cutte
+of. That suche parte of the bodie as had offended, mighte for euer beare
+the punishemente therof: and the residue takyng warnyng by his ensample,
+might shonne the like.
+
+There ware also sharpe punishementes constitute, in offences concernyng
+women. For he that had defloured a free woman, had his membres cutte of,
+because in one offence, he had committed thre no small wickednesses. That
+is to saie, wrong, made the woman an whore, and broughte in a doubte the
+laufulnes of her issue. But thei that ware taken in adulterie, bothe partes
+byeng agreed, the man was whipped with a thousand stripes by tale: and the
+woman had her nose cut of, wherwith beside the shame she had, the whole
+beautie of her face was disgraced, and disfigured.
+
+The Lawes that apperteigned to the trade and occupieng of men, one with
+another: ware made (as thei saie) by one Bocchorides. It is commaunded in
+them, that if money haue bene lent any manne without writyng, vppon credite
+of his woorde: if the borrower deny it, he should be put to his othe, to
+the whiche the creditour muste stande. For thei so muche estiemed an othe,
+that thei thoughte no man so wicked, as wilfully to abuse it. And again,
+because he that was noted to sweare very often, lost vtterly his credite,
+and name: many menne affirme, that for the regard of their honesties, it
+happened very seldome, that any man came to his othe. Their Lawe maker
+also, iudging that vertue was the engendrer of credite, thought it good by
+good ordres to accustome men to good liuyng and honestie, vpon feare to
+sieme vnworthie of all reputacion. He thought it also to be against
+conscience, that he that without an othe had borowed, should not nowe for
+his own, be beleued with an othe. The forfect for non paiment of the lone,
+mought not bee aboue the double of the somme that was borowed. And paiement
+was made onely of the goodes of the borower, the body was not arrestable.
+For the Lawemaker thought it conueniente, that onely the gooddes should bee
+subdite to the debte, and the bodies (whose seruice was required bothe in
+peace and in warre) subiecte to the citie. It was not thoughte to bee
+Iustice, that the manne of warre, whiche hasardeth his bodie for the
+sauftie of his countrie, should for an enterest of lone, bee throwen into
+prisone. The whiche lawe, Solon siemeth to haue translated to the
+Athenienses, vndre the name of the lawe Sisarea, decreyng that the body of
+no citezein, should for any maner of enterest be emprisoned.
+
+[Footnote: It may interest readers to see how much the knowledge of Africa
+had extended in 150 years. Cluverius, in his "Introductio in Geographiam."
+1659, says:--
+
+_Summa Africa descriptio_.
+
+Asiæ exiguo Isthmo annectitur maxima Orbis terrarum peninsula Africa, tria
+millia et triginta circiter mill German. ambitu complectens. Isthmi
+intercapedo est mill. xxv. Pleraque Africæ inculta, et aut arenis
+sterilibus obducta, aut ob sitim coeli terrarumque deserta sunt, aut
+infestantur multo ac malefico genere animalium; in universum vasta est
+magis quam frequens. Quædam tamen partes eximie fertiles. Græcis Libya
+dicitur, à Libya Epaphi filii Iovis filia: Africam autem ab Afro Libys
+Herculis filio dictam volunt. Maria eam cingunt, qua Sol oritur Rubrum, qua
+medius dies Æthiopicum, qua occidit Sol Atlanticum; ab Septemtrionibus
+Internum, Africum seu Libycum dictum, qua eam alluit. Longitudo summa
+computatur ab Herculis freto ad promontorium Bonæ Spei mill. DCC. Latitudo
+inter duo promontoria, Hesperium, vulgo _C. Verde_, et Aromata, quod est
+juxta fauces Arabici sinus, vulgo nunc _Coarda fui_, mill. DL. Terra ipsa,
+nisi qua interno mari accedit, obscure veteribus nota. Vltra autem Nili
+fontes ac montes Lunæ prorsus incognita.
+
+Regiones atque gentes in quas divisa fuit quondam, sunt, Ægyptus,
+Cyrenaïca, Africa Minor, seu proprie dicta, Troglodytæ, Garamantes,
+Numidia, Mauritania, Gaetulia, Libya interior, Arabia Troglodytica et
+Æthiopia.
+
+
+CAP. II.
+
+_Ægyptus_.
+
+Prima Africæ Asiæque proxima est Ægyptus, quam veteres Geographi in Asiæ
+regionibus computarunt. At posteriores, Arabico sinu, vt ante dictum, inter
+Asiam Africamque termino constituto, Africæ eam contribuerunt.
+
+Nomen traxit ab Ægypto Danai fratre; ante Aëria dicta. Terminatur à
+Septemtrione suo mari, id est, Ægyptio, ab Ortu Arabia Petræa et dicto
+sinu; a Meridie Æthiopia, ab Occasu Cyrenaïca. Longa est a Pelusíaco Nilí
+ostio ad Catabathmum opidum milliar. CL. Lata à Nili ostiis, ad opidum
+Metacompsum Nilo adpositum, nunc _Conzo_, mill. c.
+
+Divisa fuit generatim in Superiorem, quæ in Meridiem vergit, et Inferiorem,
+quæ mari interno alluitur. Superiorem rursus Nilus dividebat in Libycam,
+qua Occidentem, et Arabicam, qua Orientem spectat. Hinc populi Arabægyptii,
+illinc Libyægyptii, dicti. Inferioris pars est Marcotis, sive Marmarica,
+vltima versus Occidentem Cyrenaïcæ contermina. Speciatim vero universa
+Ægyptus in complures præfecturas descripta erat, quas Græco vocabulo Nomos
+vocarunt.
+
+_De urbibus Ægypti_.
+
+Ægyptus super ceteram antiquitatis gloriam, viginti millia urbium sibi
+Amase regnante habitata quondam prætulit; postea quoque sub Romano imperio
+multis, etiamsi ignobilibus, frequens.
+
+Clarissima omnium fuit Alexandria, caput Ægypti totiusque Africæ, post
+deletam Carthaginem prima; ab Alexandro Magno condita; postea in tantam
+aucta multitudinem atque frequentiam, uti uni tantum Romæ cederet. Secunda
+ab hac Diospolis, sive Thebae cognomine Ægyptiæ; quas centum portas
+habuisse ferunt; sive, at alii ajunt, centum aulas, totidem olim Principum
+domos; solitasque singulas, ubi negotium exegerat, ducenos armatos milites
+effundere. Deinde Memphis, regia quondam: juxta quam pyramides, regum
+sepulchra. Turres sunt fastigiatæ, ultra celsitudinem omnnem, quæ fieri
+manu possit; itaque mensuram umbrarum egressæ, nullas habent umbras, regum
+pecuniæ otiosa ac stulta ostentatio. Reliquæ urbes sunt, Syene, Sais,
+Bubastis, Elephantis, Tentyris, Arsinoe et Abydus, Memnonis olim regia;
+postea Osiris fano inclyta: et Arabiæ contermina, claritatis magnæ
+Heliopolis, id est, Solis urbs. In Marmarica vicus fuit Apis, nobilis
+religione Ægypti locus. Fuit et Labyrinthus nullo addito ligno
+exædificatus, domos mille et regias duodecim perpetuo parietis ambitu
+amplexus, marmore exstructus et tectus, unum in se descensum habens, intus
+pene innumerabiles vias, multis ambagibus huc et illuc remeantibus.
+
+
+CAP. III.
+
+_De incolis Ægypti ac Nilo flumine; item de Libya exteriore_.
+
+Ipsi Ægyptii, hominum vetustissimos se prædicantes, cum Scythis de gentis
+antiquitate olim contenderunt. Antiquissimos esse post Syros, vel ipsa
+sacra Scriptura attestatur. Disciplinarum complurium inventores rerumque
+divinarum ac siderum peritissimi dicti sunt, quare ad eos Dædalus,
+Melampus, Pythagoras, Homerus et alii complures eruditionis causa profecti.
+
+Sub regibus esse jam inde ab initio rerum consueverunt, modo suis, modo
+Æthiopibus; dein Persis ac Macedonibus; moxque iterum suis, donec Romani,
+Augusto debellante, in provinciam redegerunt Ægyptum. Post hoc Saraceni eam
+occuparunt: quibus successit Sultanorum inclytum nomen, ex Circassis
+Tartarorum gente ortum. Postremi Turcæ ann. M DXVI invaserunt, qui etiam
+nunc tenent.
+
+_Nilus_.
+
+Sed de Nilo hoc loco pauca quædam retulisse haud abs re fuerit. Terra ipsa
+Ægyptus expers imbrium mire tamen fertilis, et hominum aliorumque
+perfoecunda generatrix. Nilus id efficit, amnium in internum mare
+permeantium maximus. Hic in Africæ desertis, montibus Lunæ ortus, haud
+statim Nilus est, et primum ingentem lacum Nilidem, qui nunc _Zaire_ et
+_Zembre_ dicitur, CXX. milliar. German. permeans, cum diu simplex sævusque
+receptis dextera magnis aquis descendit, Astapus cognominatus, quod
+Æthiopum lingua significat aquam è tenebris profluentem, circa Meroen,
+Insularum, quas innumeras lateque patentes spargit, clarissimam, lævo alveo
+Astabores dictus est, hoc est, ramus aquæ venientis è tenebris; dextero
+veto Astusapes, quod latentis significationem adjicit, nec ante, quam ubi
+rursum coit, Nilua dictus est. Inde partim asper, partimnavigia patiens;
+mox præcipiti cursu progressus, inter occursantes scopulos non fluere
+immenso fragore creditur, sed ruere. Postea lenis, et fractis aquis
+domitaque violentia, et spatio fessus, tandem ad [Greek: Delta] opidum per
+omnem Ægyptum vagus et dispersus, septem ingentibus ostiis in mare Ægytium
+se evomit. Bis in anno, certis diebus auctu magno per totam spatiatus
+Ægyptum, foecundus innatat terris. Causas hujus incrementi varias
+prodidere; sed maxime probabiles duas: Etefiarum eo tempore ex adverso
+flantium repercussum, ultro in ora acto mari: aut imbres Æthiopiæ æstivos,
+iisdem Etesiis nubila illò ferentibus ex reliquo orbe. Idem amnis unus
+omnium nullas expirat auras.
+
+_Libya exterior_.
+
+Cæterum à tergo Ægypti versus Meridiem, juxta sinistram Nili ripam, Libya
+est exterior ad Æthiopiam extensa: nunc est _Elfocat_ desertum et _Gaoga_.
+
+
+CAP. IV.
+
+_Cyrenaïca, Africa Minor, Libyæ deserta, Troglodytæ et Garmantes_.
+
+Ægypto annexa est Cyrenaïca regio, Ammonis oraculo maxime clara, nuunc
+Barchanæ provinciæ dimidia pars Orientalis, eadem Pentapolitana dicta, à
+quinque insignium urbium numero, quæ Berænice, Arsinoe, Ptolemais,
+Apollonia, et ipsa Cyrene, unde regioni nomen. Græci hanc condiderunt, ex
+Thera insula. Ægæi maris profecti. Ipsi Cyrenenses privata sorte inter
+Ægyptios ac Poenos diu egerunt; dein cum Carthaginiensibus de agrorum
+finibus magnum ac diuturnum bellum gesserunt. Mox Carthagine deleta, et
+ipsi cum reliqua Africa Romano Imperio cesserunt. Posthinc solum eorum
+Sultanis, tandem Turcis.
+
+_Africa Minor_.
+
+Sequitur Africa Minor sive proprie dicta. Terminatur à Septemtrione Africo
+pelago, ab Ortu sinu magnæ Syrtis, à Meridie montium perpetuis jugis;
+quibus à Libyæ desertis et Gætulis discernitur; ab Occasu Tusca amne.
+Continet hodie Tunetanum regnum.
+
+Fluvii in ea clari Cinyphus, Triton, Tritonidem paludem trahens: Catada, ad
+Carthaginem se devolvens, et Bagradas omnium maximas ad Vticam, ac
+Tuscaterminus Africæ Minoris.
+
+Populorum varia nomina. Clarissimi Nasamones, extra Africam propriam etiam
+Cyrenaïcæ et Marmaricæ contermini; quos antea Mesammones Græci
+adpellaverunt, ab argumento loci, medios inter arenas sitos, et ab his
+sublati Psylli, quorum corpori ingenitum fuit virus exitiale serpentibus,
+ut cujus odore vel fugarent vel sopirent eas: et supra Carthaginem
+Libyphoenices, iidem et Poeni à Phoenice Tyro profecti, Duce Eliza sive
+Didone, quæ Carthaginem condidit.
+
+Vrbium celeberrimæ Lepris magna, quæ et Neapolis, Abrotonum, Taphræ, Capsa,
+Thysdrus, Thapsus, Leptis parva, Rhuspina, Adrumetum, Clupea, Turres,
+Vthina et Carthago, Romæ æmula, terrarum cupida, opulentissima quondam
+totius Africæ, antequam Romani tribus bellis devictam deleverunt. Vtica
+Catonis, qui inde Vticensis, morte nobilis.
+
+_Libya deserta, Troglodytæ et Garamantes_.
+
+Ab Africæ minoris tergo versus Austrum Libyæ deserta fuerunt; ultraque
+Troglodytæ, nunc _Berdoa_ desertum. Hos tegit ab Austro Ater mons, et trans
+eum Garamantes populi clari, nunc _Borno_ regnum. Caput gentis fuit Garama,
+quam hodieque eodem nomine exstare tradunt. Debris inclyta affuso fonte,
+cujus aquæ ex coelesti quidem vertigine mutant qualitatem, at controversa
+siderum disciplina; quidpe qui friget calore, calet frigore; à medio
+scilicet die ad noctem mediam aquis ferventibus, totidemque horis ad medium
+diem rigentíbus.
+
+Cæterum et Troglodytas et Garmantas olim Romanorum arma superaverunt.
+
+
+CAP. V.
+
+_Numidia et Mauritania_.
+
+_Numidia_.
+
+A Tusca amne usque ad Ampsagam fluvium litori Africo praetenditur Numidia,
+Masinissæ Regis nomine maxime clara, nunc Tremisenum regnum eodem
+porrigitur situ. Gens ipsa Numidae, ante Nomades à Græcis adpellati, à
+permutandis pabulis, mapalia sua plaustris circumferentes, ut nunc
+Tattarorum fert mos.
+
+Fluviorum celeberrimus est Rubricatus. Vrbes quam plurimæ, nobilesque; sed
+Cirtha eminens; Sittianorum, postquam Romani tenuere, colonia dicta:
+quondam Iubæ et Syphacis domus, cum foret opulentissima. Dein sequuntur
+Cullu, Ruscicade, Bulla regia, Tacatua, Hippo regius, Sicca, Tabrachæ: Hanc
+quoque regionem debellatam in provinciæ formam redegerunt Romani.
+
+_Mauritania_.
+
+Vltima ad Occasum est Mauritania; in qua praecipua gens Maurorum, unde
+nomen regioni. Hos Graeci Maurusios dixerunt. Terminantur à Meridie Atlante
+minori, quo submoventur à Gaetulis: qui et ipsi postea oppressis et
+exstinctis Maurusiis Mauritaniae majorem partem occuparunt: ab Occasu est
+Oceanus Atlanticus, à Septemtrione fretum Herculis et mare internum; Ab
+Ortu primo Mulucham habuit flumen, quod Mauros à Numidis discernebat; at
+quum ea Numidiae pars, quae est inter Ampsagam et Mulucham, Mauritaniae
+adjiceretur, finis huic constitutus est Ampsaga. Continet hodie tria regna:
+Darense, Fezense et Maurocitanum. Dividebatur autem olim Malva flumine in
+Caesariensem quae Numidiam contingit, et Tingitanam quae Oceano
+perfunditur. Regna fuere ad C. Caesarem usque Imperatorem, qui in duas
+divisit provincias.
+
+_Cæsariensis_.
+
+Caesariensis provincia, quam nunc totam _Dara_ regnum obsidet, antea Bocchi
+regnum adpellata fuit. Partem tamen inter Malvam et Mulucham Massaesylornm
+gens tenuit. Caput provinciae Iulia Caesarea, aliquando ignobilis, cum Iol
+esset; postea quia Iubae regia, illustris facta. Reliqua opida sunt
+Cartenna, Saldae, Opidum novum, Rusazus, Ruscurium, Rusconia, Tipasa,
+Tubusuptus et Tucca, impositum mari ac flumini Ampsagae.
+
+_Tingitana_.
+
+Tingitana provincia, quam nunc duo regna _Fez_ et _Morocco_ occupant, ab
+urbe Tingi, quae nunc vulgo _Tanger_, cognomen accepit, ante Bogudiana
+dicta à Rege Bogud. Opida in ea, Tingi modo dictum, caput provinciae, ab
+Anteeo conditum; Iulia Constantia, Zilis, Volubilia et Lixus, vel
+fabulosissime ab antiquis narrata. Ibi quidpe regia Antaei, certamenque cum
+Hercule, et Hesperidum horti.
+
+
+CAP. VI.
+
+_Gætuli, Atlas mons, Libya interior et Æthiopia_.
+
+_Gætuli_.
+
+A tergo Mauritaniarum Africaeque Minoris Gaetulorum gens, et ipsa quoque
+Romanorum armis debellata, longe lateque incoluit, quidpe quae hodie
+occupat quicquid terrarum à _Lempta_ opido ad Oceanum usque, spatio mill.
+Germanicorum CCCL protenditur. Hoc spatio nunc est _Biledulgerit_
+provinciae major pars, ubi _Targa_ regnum, et quatuor deserta, _Lempta,
+Zuenziga, Zanhaga, Hair_.
+
+_Atlas Mons_.
+
+Gaetulos à Meridie claudit mons Atlas, totius Africae vel fabulosissimus. E
+mediis hunc arenis in coelum usque attolli prodiderunt celebrati auctores,
+asperum, squalentem, qua vergat ad litora Oceani, cui cognomen imposuit:
+eundem opacum nemorosumque, et scatebris fontium riguum; qua spectat
+Africam, fructibus omnium generum sponte ita subnascentibus, ut nunqnam
+satietas voluptatibus desit. Incolarum neminem interdiu cerni: silere omnia
+haud alio quam solitudinum horrore. Eundemque noctibus micare crebris
+ignibus, Ægipanum Satyrorumque lascivia impleri, tibiarum ac fistulae cantu
+tympanorumque et cymbalorum sonitu strepere.
+
+_Libya interior_.
+
+Vltra Atlantem Libya est interior ad Nigrum usque flumen, vastarum
+solitudinum, nunc desertum _Sarra_ dicta.
+
+_Æthiopia et Troglodytica_.
+
+Iam vero quicquid ultra Nigrum flumen est et Ægyptum, versus utrumque mare
+Atlanticum Rubrumque, Æthiopes tenuerunt, gens omnium Africae terrae
+amplissima, extra Africam à vetustissimis Geographorum posita. Ab Æthiope
+Vulcani filio cognominati; vel, ut alii, ab nigro vultus corporisque
+colore; [Greek: aithops] quidpe significat nigrum.
+
+Divisa fuit Æthiopia in varia Æthiopum genera; quorum Ptolemaeus innumera
+tradit nomina. At clarissimi omnium fuere Nigritae; à Nigro flumine dicti;
+et Nubiorum gens magna, unde hodieque vastissima regio dicitur _Nubia_. Ea
+autem Æthiopiae pars quae Nilo utrimque adjacet, Æthiopia dicitur sub
+Ægypto; atque in ea ad Nili paludes seu lacus Cinnamomifera regio. At totum
+sinus Arabici laevum larus Arabes tenuere Troglodytae, unde regio ipsa
+Troglodytica.
+
+
+CAP. VII.
+
+_De incolis universæ Africæ novaque ejus descriptione; ac primum de Ægypto_
+
+Qvinam mortales Ægyptum antiquitus incoluerint, ante dictum set. Reliqua
+Africae versus Occasum mari adjacentia tenuerunt populi commemorati.
+Advenae autem primi fuere Phoenicum coloni aliique ex Asia atque Ægypto
+profecti. Postea paruit Romanis; mox Græcis Imperatoribus totum hoc
+terrarum spatium. Deinde Vandalis, Saracenis, Arabibus. Nunc partem tenet
+Turca, partem Serifus, quem vocant; partem reges alii, partem denique
+Hispaniarum Rex.
+
+At Æthiopes à suo solo neque recesserunt, neque in id alios colonos
+receperunt; id longinquitas effecit regionis immensaeque intercedentium
+desertorum vastitates.
+
+Sed enarrata Africae antiquitate, res postulat, uti novam etiam ejus
+descriptionem subjiciamus.
+
+Dividitur nunc universa in septem potissimum partes sive regiones, quarum
+nomina sunt haec: Ægyptus, _Barbaria, Biledulgerid, Sarra_ desertum,
+Nigritæ, Æthiopia Interior, sive Superior, quod Abissinorum imperium, et
+Æthiopia Exterior sive Inferior.
+
+_Ægyptus_.
+
+Ægypti (quam Turca obtinet) caput nunc est Cairum, vulgo _Alcair_,
+Chaldaeis Alchabyr, urbs magnitudine stupenda, Emporium celeberrimum,
+Circassiorum Ægypti Sultanoram quondam regia. Prope est _Materea_ hortus
+balsami fructibus consitus, quod uni terrae Iudaeae quondam concessum,
+hodie nisi in hoc loco, nusquam colitur.
+
+Vltra Nilum pyramides visuntur stupendae altitudinis, ut ante memoravimus.
+
+Secunda claritate à Cairo est Alexandria, splendida quondam atque
+opulentissima civitas, nunc crebris bellis destructa atque concisa,
+celeberrimum Christianis mercatoribus praebet emporium. Nobile exinde est
+cum arce opidum _Raschitt_, quod Europaei _Rosettam_ vocant. _Damiata_,
+olim Pelusium, Ptolemaei Geographi incunabulis insigne est.
+
+
+CAP. VIII.
+
+_Barbaria_.
+
+Ægypto continuatur nobilissima totius Africae regio Barbaria; in sex partes
+divisa, quarum una est provincia Barcana, quinque reliquae sunt regna,
+Tunetanum, Tremisenum, Fessanum, Maurocanum et Darense.
+
+_Barcana regio_.
+
+Inter Ægyptum et Tunetanum regnum litori praetenditor Barcana regio, à
+Barce antiqua urbe cognominata, soli asperitate pariter ac siccitate
+sterilis.
+
+_Regnum Tunetanum_.
+
+Tunetanum regnum veterem Africam minorem ferme totam occupat. Caput est
+Tunetum, sive Tunisa, vulgo _Tunisi_; insignis, vetus ac satis ampla urbs,
+quae ex Carthaginis ruinis crevit; emporium Venetis et Genuensibus aliisque
+mercatoribus celebre. Secunda est Tripolis nova, quae Tripolis Barbariae
+dicitur, ad differentiam Tripolis Syriae: emporium est Europæis
+mercatoribus celeberrimum. _Bona_ etiam, quae olim Hippo, D. Augustina
+Episcopatu nota, nunc emporium haud postremum. Intus vero est Constantina
+Romanarum antiquitatum reliquiis conspicua.
+
+_Regnum Tremisenum_.
+
+Caput regni est _Tremisen_, amplissima quondam, bellis gravissimis postea
+tenuata. In litore est _Algier_, emporium satis nobile, at piratica infame,
+Christianis mancipiis refertissimum; urbs ipsa moenibus, arcibus ac
+tormentis bellicis adeo munita, ut inexpugnabilis credatur.
+
+_Regnum Fessanum_.
+
+Ad ipsum fretum Herculis Hispaniae objacet Fessanum regnum, cujus caput
+_Fez_, urbs totius Barbariae princeps, ingens, opulenta, frequens,
+splendida ac magnificis superbisque aedificiis miranda.
+
+_Tanger, Sebta, Arxilla_, amplae ad fretum urbes, Hispanicae sunt ditionis.
+
+_Regnum Maurocanum_.
+
+Caput est Maurocum, vulgo _Maroc_, amplissima ac celeberrima olim, inter
+maximas universi orbis memorata: at postea ab Arabibus divexata, nunc
+maligne colitur. Secunda est _Taradante_.
+
+_Darense Regnum_.
+
+Intus Maurocano, Fessano ac Tremiseno regnis confine est regnum Darense
+amplissimum, olim Caesariensis Mauritania dictum. Caput est _Dara_, unde
+regioni nomen, tenuibus, ut totum regnum, atque egenis incolis habitata.
+_Melilla_ ad mare internum conspicua urbs Hispano paret.
+
+
+CAP. IX.
+
+_Biledulgerit, Sarra desertum, Nigritæ, Abissini_.
+
+A Tergo dictarum regionum est _Biledulgerit_ regio, longissimo tractu ab
+Ægypti confinibus ad Oceanum Atlanticum porrecta. Nomen ei à dactyloram
+proventu inditum. Deserta in ea sunt, _Lempta, Hair, Zuenziga, Zanhaga_ à
+singulis opidis cognominibus, adpellata. Regna _Targa, Bardoa_ et _Gaoga_,
+itidem ab opidis dicta.
+
+_Sarra desertum_.
+
+Continuatur huic regioni versus Meridiem _Sarra_, cujus longitudo à regno
+_Gaoga_ ad regnum _Gualata_ extenditur.
+
+_Nigritæ_.
+
+Inde Nigritarum ampla est regio, ad utramque Nigri amnis ripam: longitudo
+ejus porrigitur à Nilo et Meroe insula, usque ad Nigri ostia et Oceanum.
+Regna in ea sunt haec, ab urbibus denominata: _Gualata, Hoden, Genocha,
+Senega, Tombuti, Melli, Bitonin, Gurnea, Temian, Dauma, Cano, Cassena,
+Benin, Zanfara, Guangara, Borno, Nubia, Biafra, Medra_.
+
+_Æthiopia Interior quæ est Abissinorum_.
+
+Interiori Æthiopiae imperat Abissinorum Rex, qui Presbyter sive Pretiosus
+Ioannes, vulgo _Prete Gianni_, vocatur; magno, recepto tamen errore; cum is
+quondam in Asiae, ut relatum est, regno _Tenduc_ regnaverit. Abasenos
+populos recenset Stephanus in Arabia; unde verisimile est, eos in Africam
+trajecto sinu Arabico commigrasse. Aut sane in ipsa Africa fuerunt ad
+sinistrum Arabici sinus latus, ubi Arabiam Troglodyticam supra memoravimus.
+Haec quidpe nunc sub Abissinorum imperio est. Alii tamen ab Arabico
+vocabulo _Elhabaschi_ (sic enim Mauri Principem Abissinorum adpellant)
+vulgo factum opinantur Abassi, ac deinde Abasseni; quod denique
+commutatione vocalium in Abissinorum nomen evasit.
+
+Clauditur regnum ab Ortu Arabico sinu et regionibus _Ajana_ ac _Zangebara_;
+à Meridie _Monomotapa_; ab Occasu _Congo_ et _Medar_ regnis; à Septemtrione
+_Nubia_ et Ægypto. Longum est ab Ægypto ad _Monomotapa_ usque mill. DLXXX.
+Latum inter fauces Arabici sinus et Nigrum fluvium mill. CCCCL.
+
+Dividitur in compluria regna sive provincias: quarum nomina sunt, _Dasila,
+Barnagasso, Dangali, Dobas, Trigemahon, Ambiancantiva, Vangue, Bagamidri,
+Beleguanze, Angote, Balli, Fatigar, Olabi, Baru, Gemen, Fungi, Tirut,
+Esabela, Malemba_. Vrbes in universo imperio paucae sunt: vicis plurimum
+habitatur, domibus ex creta et stramine constructis. Rex ipse (qui albo
+esse colore fertur) sub tentoriis degit, quorum sex millia eum sequuntur.
+_Amara_ arx est munitissima, in monte _Amara_ condita; in qua regis filii
+sub validissimo præsidio educantur, donec patre defuncto heres producatur.
+
+
+CAP. X.
+
+_Æthiopia Exterior sive Inferior; item Insulæ Africæ adjacentes._
+
+Reliquum Africæ Æthiopia perhibetur exterior sive inferior; ab Oriente,
+Meridie et Occidente Oceano perfusa; à Septemtrione quasi duobus brachiis
+Abissinorum imperium hinc inde complectitur.
+
+Regiones, in quas dividitur, sunt _Congi, Monomotapa, Zangibar_, et _Ajan_.
+Pleraque maritimorum à Portugalensibus tenentur firmissimis munimentis ac
+praesidiis.
+
+_Congi Regnum._
+
+_Congi_ regnum (quod alliis _Manicongo_) Oceano Æthiopico perfusum, nomen
+habet à capite suo urbe _Congi_. Incolae sunt Christiani. Terra ipsa
+fluminum aquis maxime rigua. Dividitur in provincias sex; quas illi _Mani_,
+id est, Praefecturas, vocant. Sunt autem _Bamba, Songo, Sundi, Pango,
+Batta_ et _Pemba_. Regia est, civitas S. Salvatoris, quae ante _Banza_.
+
+_Monomotapa Regnum._
+
+_Monomotapa_ vocabulum significat Imperatorem; unde ipsi terrae, cui hic
+imperat, nomen inditum. Solum est fertile atque amoenum; amnes aurum,
+silvae elephantos magna copia producunt:
+
+Clauditur regnum ab Ortu, Meridie et Occasu Oceano; à Septemtrione regno
+_Congi_, Abissinorum imperio et regione _Zangibar_. Longitudo ejus est
+inter duo maria Rubrum Æthiopicumque juxta Lunae montes milliar. German,
+CCCC. Latitudo inter Nili fontes et promontorium Bonæ Spei mill. CCC.
+
+Caput regni ac sedes regum est _Monomotapa_, ad flumen S. Spiritus. Hinc
+versus Septemtrionem mill. circiter L. distat nobile aedificium, amplum
+atque antiquum, quadra forma ex ingentibus saxis constructum.
+
+_Zangibar et Ajan_.
+
+Monomotapae, qua Rubro mari perfunditur, continuatur _Zangibar_ regio;
+cujus partes, _Cafares_ populi, Monomotapae proximi, et regna _Mozambike,
+Kiloa, Mombaza_ ac _Melinde_, ab urbibus singulis denominata; quarum
+_Mozambike_ in insula condita, celeberrimum est Europaeis mercatoribus
+emporium. Sequitur versus Septemtrionem juxta litus maris Rubri _Ajan_
+regio, cujus partes duo regna _Del_ et _Adea Magaduzzo_.
+
+_Insulæ ad Africam_.
+
+Insularum ad Africam terram maxima est in Rubro mari Menuthias Cerne Plinio
+dicta; nunc vulgo insula Divi Laurentii, et incolis _Madagascar_ id est,
+Lunae insula, felici aromatum proventu dives, longitudine mill. German,
+CCL, lat. LXXX occupans.
+
+At in Atlantico Oceano contra Hesperium promontorium, quod nunc est _Cabo
+Verde_, Hesperides sunt insulae duae; ultraque Gorgades, Gorgonum quondam
+domus: nunc in universam _Islas de C. Verde_ Hispanis dicuntur, hoc est
+insulae promontorii Viridis. Contra Mauritanium sunt Fortunatae, VII
+numero, quarum una Canaria vocitata, à multitudine canum ingentis
+magnitudinis, ut auctor est Plinius. Vnde universae Fortunatae, nunc
+Canariae dicuntur, Hispaniarum Regi subjectae. Vltra versus Septemtrionem
+est Cerne, nunc _Madera_ dicta.
+
+Atque haec est totius Africae brevis descriptio.]
+
+Thegiptians also for thieues, had this lawe alone, and no people els. The
+lawe commaunded that as many as would steale, should entre their names with
+the chief Prieste: and what so euer was stollen, incontinente to cary the
+same vnto hym. Likewise, he that was robbed was bounde to entre with the
+saied Chiefe Priest, the daie, time and houre, when he was robbed. By this
+meanes the thefte being easely founde out, he that was robbed, loste the
+fourths parte and receiued the residue, the whiche fourthe was giuen to the
+thiefe. For the Lawe maker (seeing it was impossible vtterly to be withoute
+thieues) thought it moche bettre by this meanes that men bare the losse of
+a piece then to be spoiled of the whole.
+
+The ordre of Mariage emong the Egiptians is not vniforme, for the priest
+might marry but one onely wife. All other haue as many as they wille,
+acordyng to their substaunce. Ther is no child emong them, though it be
+borne of a bought woman slaue, that is compted illegitimate. For they onely
+compte the father to be the authour of his kynde, and the mother onely but
+to geue place and nourishement to the childe. When their children be borne
+they bring them vp with so lytle coste, as a man would skantly belieue.
+They fiede them with the rootes of mererushes, and other rootes, rosted in
+the embries, and with marshe Caubois, and colewortes which partly they
+seathe, and partly they roste, and parte giue them rawe. They go for the
+moste parte withoute hosen or shoes, all naked, the contry is so temperate.
+All the coste that the Parentes bestowe on their children til they be of
+age to shift for themselues, surmounteth not the somme of a noble.
+[Footnote: Equal to six shillings and eight pence.]
+
+The priestes bring vp the children, both in the doctrine of their holye
+scriptures, and also in the other kindes of learning necessary for the
+commune life, and chiefly in Geometry and Arithmetique. As for the roughe
+exercises of wrasteling, ronning, daunsing, playeng at weapons, throwyng
+the barre or suche like, they train not their youth in, supposyng that the
+daily exercise of suche, shoulde be to roughe, and daungerous for them, and
+that they should be an empeiryng of strength. Musique they doe not onely
+compte vnprofitable, but also hurteful: as making mens courages altogether
+womanlyke. When they are sicke, they heale themselues, eyther with fasting
+or vomiting: and that either euery eche other daye, or euery third daye, or
+fourthe. For they are of opinion that all diseases growe of superfluite of
+meate, and that kinde of cure therfore to be beste, that riddeth the
+grounde of the griefe. Men goyng to the warres, or traueillyng the
+countrie, are healed of free cost. For the Phisicens and Chirurgiens, haue
+a stipende allowed them of ordenary at the charge of the communes.
+
+In curing, they are bounde to folowe the preceptes of the auncient and
+allowed writers, regestred in their holy scripture. Yf a man folowing the
+prescripte of the scriptures can not so heale the sicke, he is not blamed
+for that: But yf he fortune to heale him by any other meanes then is in the
+scripture appoincted, he dieth for it. For the lawe giuer thoughte that it
+was harde to finde a bettre waye of curyng, then that the which of suche
+antiquitie was by longe practise founde oute and allowed, and deliuered
+vnto them by suche a continuaunce. The Egiptians do worship aboue measure
+certeine beastes, not onely whilest they be onliue, [Footnote: I have never
+met with this form of the word.] but also when they are dead. As the Catte,
+the Icneumon the dogge, the hauke, the woulfe, the Cocodrille, and many
+other like. They are not onely not ashamed to professe the worship of these
+openly, but setting them selues out in the honouring of them to the
+vttermoste: they compte it asmuch praise and glory to them selues, as yf
+they bestowed the like on the Goddes. And they go about on procession with
+the propre Images of them, from citie, to citie, and from place, to place;
+holding them vp and shewing them a farre of vnto other, which fall on their
+knees, and euery one worship them. When any one of them dieth, they couer
+it with Sarcenet, and houling, and crieng, and beating of their breastes
+they all to bestrawe the carckesse with salte. And after they haue embalmed
+it with the licour of the Cedre and other fragraunt oyntmentes, and oyles,
+to preserue it the longer: thei bewrye it in holy sepulture. If a man haue
+slayne any of these beastes willingly: he is codempned to death. But yf he
+haue slaine an catte or a snyte, [Footnote: A snipe, from the Saxon snyta.
+"Greene-plover, snyte, / Partridge, larke, cocke, and phessant." _Heyw.
+Engl. Trav_., Act i., Scene ii.] willingly or vnwillingly: the people
+ronneth vpon him vppon heapes, and withoute all ordre of Iustice or lawe,
+in moste miserable wise torment him to death. Vpon feare of the which
+daungier who soeuer espieth one of those lyeng dead: standing a farre, he
+howleth and crieth professing that he is not giltie of the death. These
+beastes with great attendaunce and chardge are kept vp aboute the cloistres
+of the Temple, by men of no meane reputation: whiche fiede them with floure
+and otemeale, and diuers deinties, sopped and stieped in milke. And they
+set euery daie before them goose, bothe sodden and rosted. And before those
+that delight al in raw meate they sette birdes and rawe foules. Finally as
+I said they kiepe them all with great diligence and coste. They lament
+their death asmoche as the death of their owne children, and bury them more
+sumptuously then their substance doth stretch. In so moche that Ptolomeus
+Lagus reigning in Egipt, when there chaunced a cowe to die in Memphis for
+very age: he that had taken charge of the kepyng of her, bestowed vpon the
+buriall of her (beside a greate some of mony that was giuen him for the
+keping) fiftie talentes of siluer, that he borowed of Ptolome. Peraduenture
+these thynges will seme vnto some men to wondreful: but he wil wondre
+asmoche yf he considre what communely is done emonge euery of the Egiptians
+in the funeralle of their deade.
+
+When any man is departed his lyfe, all his niere friendes and kindesfolke,
+throwing dirte vpon their heades, go wieping and wailing rounde about the
+citie vntle the Corps be buried. And in the meane season they neyther
+bathe, ne drincke wine, or eate any meate, but that that is most base and
+vile, ne weare any apparell that is gorgeous or faire. They haue thre
+sortes of Sepulchres, Sumptuous, meane, and basse. In the firste sorte they
+bestowe a talente of siluer. Aboute the seconde, twenty Markes, and aboute
+the thirde litle or nothing. There be certaine Pheretrers, [Footnote:
+Query, _ferretrers_, carriers.] whose facultie it is to sette forthe
+burialles, whiche learne it of their fathers and teache it their children.
+These when a funeral happeneth, make vnto him that is doer for the deade,
+an estimate of the exequies in writing, whiche the doer may at his pleasure
+enlarge or make lesse. When thei are ones fallen at appoyncte, the bodye is
+deliuered to the Pheretrer to bee enterred accordyng to the rate that they
+agreed vpon. Then the bodie beyng laied foorthe, commeth the Phereters
+chiefe cutter, and he appoincteth his vndrecutter a place on the side
+haulfe of the paunche, wher to make incision, and how large. Then he with a
+sharpe stone (whiche of the country fro whence it commeth, they call
+Ethiopicus) openeth the left side as farre as the lawe permitteth. And
+streight with all spiede ronneth his way from the company standing by,
+which curse him and reuile him and throwe many stones aftre him. For they
+thincke there yet remaineth a certeine hatred due vnto him that woundeth
+the body of their frinde. Those that are the seasoners and embalmers of the
+body (whome they calle poulderers) they haue in greate honour and
+estimacion, for that they haue familiarite with the priestes, and entre the
+temples together with them. The bodye nowe commen to their handes, one
+emong all (the reste standing by) vnlaceth the entrailes, and draweth them
+out at the foresaid incision, all sauing the kidneis, and the harte. These
+entrailes are taken by another at his hande, and wasshed in wine of the
+country Phenicea, wherin are enfused many soote [Footnote: Sweet. "They
+dauncen deftly, and singen soote, / In their merriment." _Spenser's
+Hobbinol's Dittie_, _Sheph. Kal._, Apr. iii.] odours and drugges. Then
+enoincte they the whole bodye ouer, firste with Cedre and then with other
+oynctementes, xxx. daies and aboue. Then do thei ceare it ouer with Mirrhe
+and Cinamome and suche other thinges as wil not onely preserue it to
+continuaunce, but also make it soote smelling. The Corps thus being
+trimmed, is deliuered to the kindesfolke of the deade, euery parte of it
+kepte so whole (not an heare of his browes or eye liddes being hurte) that
+it raither lieth like one being in sliepe then like a dead corpse. Before
+the body be enterred, the kindesfolke of the deade signifie to the iudges,
+and the friendes of this passed, the day of the burial. Whiche (according
+to the maner then vsed) thei terme the deades passaige ouer the mere. The
+maner wherof is this.
+
+The iudges, aboue xl. in nomber, sittinge on the farther side of the mere,
+on a compassed benche wheling haulfe rounds and the people standing about
+them: The bodie is put into a litle boate made for the nones, and drawen
+ouer to the iudges by a chorde. The body then standing before the iudges in
+the sight of the people, before it be cofred, if ther be any manne that
+haue aught to saye against the dead, he is permitted by the lawe. Yf any be
+proued to haue liued euyll, the iudges geue sentence that the bodye shall
+not be buried. And who so is founde vniustelye to haue accused, suffreth
+greate punyshemente therfore. When no manne wyll accuse, or he that accused
+is knowen to haue slaunderously done it, the kinsfolke endyng their
+mournyng: tourne them selues now to the prayse of the dead, nothing aftre
+the maner of the Grecians, for that the Egiptians thinke themselues all to
+be gentlemen alike. But beginnyng at his childehode, in the whiche thei
+reherse his bringing vp, nourtering and scholyng, thei passe to his mannes
+age, their commending his godlines, his iustice, his temperaunce, and the
+residewe of his vertues. And calling vpon the vndre earthe, goddes, they
+beseche them to place him emonge the godlye and good. To the which wordes
+all the whole multitude crieth Amen: showtyng oute, and magnifieng the
+glorye of the deade, as thoughe they shoulde be with the vnder earth
+goddes, among the blessed for euer. This done euery man burieth his dead,
+some in Sepulchres made for the purpose, and other that haue no suche
+preparacion, in their strongest wall at home in their house, setting vp the
+cofre ther tabernacle wyse. But they that for some offence, or debte of
+enterest, or suche like, are denied their bewriall, are sette vp at home
+without any cofre, vntle their successours growyng to abilite canne
+dischardge their debtes and offences, and honourably bewrie them.
+
+There is a maner emong them, sometyme to borowe money vpon their parentes
+corpses, deliueryng the bodies to the creditours in pledge. And who so
+redemeth theim not, ronneth into vtter infamie, and is at his death, denied
+his bewriall. A manne (not altogether causeles) mighte merueile, that thei
+could not be contente to constitute lawes for the framyng of the maners of
+those that are onliue, but also put ordre for the exequies, and Hearses of
+the deade. But the cause why thei bent them selues so much hervnto, was for
+that thei thought ther was no better waie possible, to driue men to
+honestie of life. The Grekes, which haue set furthe so many thynges in
+fained tales, and fables of Poetes (farre aboue credite) concernyng the
+rewarde of the good, and punishment of the euill: could not with all their
+deuices, drawe men to vertue, and withdrawe them from vices. But rather
+contrariwise, haue with them that be leudely disposed: broughte all
+together in contempte and derision. But emong the Egiptians, the
+punishemente due vnto the wicked and lewed, and the praise of the godlie
+and good, not heard by tales of a tubbe, [Footnote: Swift took the title of
+his well-known book from this old expression. It appears in Bale's "Comedye
+Concerning Three Laws," compiled in 1538: "Ye say they follow your law, /
+And vary not a shaw, / Which is a tale of a tub."] but sene daiely at the
+eye: putteth both partes in remembraunce what behoueth in this life, and
+what fame and opinion thei shall leaue of them selues, to their posteritie.
+And hervppon it riseth, that euery man gladly emong them, ensueth good
+ordre of life. And to make an ende of Thegiptians, me siemeth those Lawes
+are of very righte to be compted the beste, whiche regarde not so muche to
+make the people riche, as to aduance them to honestie and wisedome, where
+riches of necessitie must folowe.
+
+
+¶ The vj. Chapitre.
+
+¶ Of the Poeni, and thother peoples of Aphrique.
+
+Of the Penois there are many and sondrie nacions. Adrimachidæ lieng toward
+Egipte, are like of maners to Thegiptians, but their apparell is like to
+the other Penois. Their wiues haue vpon eche legge, a houpe of Latton
+[Transcriber's note: "Lat houpe ofton" in original]. Thei delight in long
+heare, and looke what lyce it fortuneth any of them to take aboute them:
+thei bite theim, and throwe them awaie, the whiche propretie, thei onely of
+all the Poeni haue. As also to present their maidens that are vpon mariage,
+to the kyng, whiche choosyng emong them the maiden that liketh hym beste,
+sieketh in her lappe, that aftre can neuer bee founde.  The Nasamones (a
+greate and a terrible nacion, spoilers of suche Shippes as fortune to be
+throwen vpon the Sandes in the streightes) towarde Sommer, leauyng their
+cattle vpon the Sea coaste, goe doune into the plaine countrie to gather
+Dates, whiche are there very faire, and in greate plentie. Thei gather the
+boughes with the fruicte, not yet perfectely ripe, and laie them a Sonnyng
+to ripe. Afterward thei stiepe theim in Milke, and make soupinges and
+potages of theim. It is the maner emong theim, for euery man to haue many
+wiues: and the felowship of their wiues, that other vse in secrete: thei
+vse in open sights, in maner aftre the facion that the Massagetes vse. It
+is also the maner of the Nasamones, when any man marieth his first wife, to
+sende her about to euery one of the ghestes, to offer hym her body. And
+asmany as receiue her into armes, and shewe her the curtesie she comes for,
+must giue her some gifte, whiche she hath borne with her, home to her
+house. Their maner of takyng an othe, and foreshewyng of thinges to come,
+is thus.
+
+Thei sweare by the menne that ware (by reporte) the best and moste iuste
+men emong them, layeng their handes on their Graues, or Tumbes. But for the
+fore knowledge of thynges, thei come to the Graues of their kyndreade, and
+there when thei haue praied their stinte, laye them doune vpon them to
+slepe: and loke what thei dreame, that, doe thei folowe. Where in
+confirmyng of our promise, we vse to strike handes (as we calle it) thei
+vse to drincke one to another: or elles if thei lacke liquour, to take
+duste fro the earth, and one to licke part of that to another. The
+Garamantes shonne the felowship and the sighte of all other peoples, and
+neither vse any kinde of weapon, or armour, ne yet dare defende them selues
+against other that vsed them. They dwell somwhat aboue the Nasamones, more
+vp londe. Aboute the sea coaste towarde the weste, ther bordereth vpon them
+the Maces: whiche shaue their heades in the crowne, and clyppe them rounde
+by the sides. The Gnidanes (nexte neighbours to the Maces) when they giue
+battaylle to the ostruthes, their brieding vnder the grounde, are armed
+with rawe felles of beastes. Their women ware prety wealtes of leather,
+euery one a greate manye whiche (as it is sayde) they begge of suche menne
+as haue lien with them. So that the moe she hath, the more she is estemed,
+as a deinty derling beloued of many. The Machlies dwelling aboute the
+mershe of Tritonides, vse to shaue their fore parte of their heade, and the
+Anses their hindre parte. The maydens of the Anses, at the yerely feastes
+of Minerua, in the honoure of the goddesse their country woman: deuiding
+them selues into two companies, vse to giue battaile, one parte to another
+with staues, and with stones: sayeng that thei obserue the maner of their
+country in the honour of her that we calle Minerua. And the maiden that
+departeth the battayle without wounde, thei holde her for no maide. But
+before ther battayle be fought, they determine that what mayden so euer
+beareth her selfe mooste valeaunte in the fielde, all the other maydens
+with commune consente shall garnishe her, and arme her, both with the
+armour of Grecia, and the helmet of Corinthe. And shal sette her in a
+chariot, and carye her rounde about the mershe. The same menne vsen their
+women as indifferently commune, as kyen to the bulle. The children remaine
+with the women vntil they be of some strengthe. Ones in a quartre the men
+do assemble wholy together, and then looke with whome the childe fantasieth
+mooste to abide, him do they compte for his father.
+
+There is a people named Atlantes, of the mounte Athlas, by the whiche they
+dwell. These giue no names one to another as other peoples do, but echeman
+is namelesse. When the sonne passeth ouer their heades, they curse him, and
+reuyle him with all woordes of mischiefe: for that he is so broiling hote,
+that he destroieth bothe them and ther countrye.
+
+They eate of no kinde of beaste, neither dreame in their sliepe. The Aphres
+(whice are all brieders of catteile) liue with flesshe and milke, and yet
+absteine they fro cowes milke, and all cowe fleshe, according to the maner
+of the Egiptians, and therefore kepe they none vp. The women of Cyrene
+thincke it not lawfull to strike a cowe, for Isis sake that is honoured in
+Egipt, to whome also they appoincte fasting, and feastefull daies, and
+obserue them solempnly. But the women of Barcea absteine bothe from cowe
+fleshe and sowe flesh. When their children are iiii. yeare olde they vse to
+cauterise them on the coron [Footnote: Query, frontal.] vaine (and some on
+the temple also) with a medecine for that purpose, made of woolle as it is
+plucked fro the shiepe: because thie should not at any time be troubled
+with rheumes or poses, [Footnote: A local name for a cold in the head. (See
+N. Bailey's Dict., vol. i.)] and by that meanes they say they liue in very
+good health. Thei sacrifie after this maner. When in the name of their
+firste frutes they haue cutte of the eare of the beaste, they throwe it
+ouer the house. That done, they wring the necke on the one side. Of all the
+goddes they offre sacrifice to no more but Sonne and Mone. All the Aphres
+burye their deade as the Grecians doe, sauing the Nasamones, which bury
+them as thoughe they ware sitting: wayting well when any man lieth in
+drawing on, to set him on his taile, leaste he should giue vp the ghoste
+lieng vpright. Their houses are made of wickers, and withes, wrought aboute
+trees, moch like vnto those that we calle frankencence trees, and in suche
+sorte that they may tourne them rounde euery waye. The Maries, shaue the
+lefte side of their heade, and lette the heare growe on the right. They die
+their bodie in redde, and vaunte that they come of the Troianes. The women
+of the Zabiques (which are the next neighbours to the Maries) driue the
+cartes in the warres, in the which the men fight. Ther are a people called
+Zigantes, wher beside the great plentye of hony that they gather fro the
+Bies, they haue also certeine men that are makers of honye. They all die
+them selues with red, and eate apes fleshe, wherof thei that dwel in the
+mounteines haue great plentye. These al being of the part called Libye,
+liue for the moste parte a wilde lyfe abrode in the fieldes like beastes,
+making no household prouision of meate, ne wearing any maner of appareil
+but gotes felles. The gentlemen, and men of honour emong them, haue neither
+cities nor townes, but Turrettes builte vpon the waters side, in the which
+they laye vp the ouerplus of that that they occupy. They sweare their
+people euery yere to obeye their Prince, and that they that obey in diede,
+shoulde loue together as felowes and companions: but that the disobediente
+shoulde be pursued like felons and traitours. Their armour and weapon, are
+bothe acording to the nature of the country and contrimen: for wher thei of
+themselues are very quicke, and deliure [Footnote: Nimble. "All of them
+being tall, quicke, and deliver persons." _Hollinshed_, vol. ii., ccc. 5.]
+of bodye, and the country champaigne, and playne, they neither vse swearde,
+dagger, ne harneis, but onely cary thre Iauelines in their hande, and a
+nombre of piked and chosen stones, in a case of stiffe leather hanging
+aboute them. With these they vse bothe to fight and to skirmishe. In his
+coming towarde the ennemy, he throweth his stone, fetching his ronne, and
+maketh lightlye a narowe mysse, thoughe it be a good waye of: suche
+continuall practise they haue of it. They kiepe neither lawe ne faithe.
+
+The Troglodites (whiche are also named of the Grecians pastours, for their
+fieding and brieding of catteille) a people of Ethiope, do lyue in
+companies, and haue their heade ouer them, whome they call Tiraunte. But
+not meaninge in him so much tirany in diede, as some time some of our
+gouernours vnder a fayrer name do execute. None of them hathe any seuerall
+wife, and therfore no seueral children, but bothe those in commune, the
+tiraunte excepted: Who hathe but one wyfe onely. To the which yf any manne
+do but approach or drawe nighe: he is condempned in a certeine nombre of
+cattaile to be paied to the Tiraunte. From the beginning of Iuly vntle
+about middle August (at the which time thei haue great plenty of raine)
+thei nourishe them selues with milke, and bloude, sodden a litle together.
+The pasture vplond being, dried away with the heate of the Sonne: They
+sieke downe to the marshe, and lowe groundes, for the whiche onely they be
+often at debate. When their catteil waxeth olde or sicke, they kyll them,
+and eate them, and altogether liue vpon such. They do not giue the childe
+the name of the father, but name him aftre a bull, a rambe or an eawe. And
+those call thei father (the beastes I meane of the masle kinde) and thother
+of the femel kynde, they call mother, because their daily fode is giuen by
+them. The people called Idiote, vse for their drincke the iuyce of a whinne
+named Paliurus. But the men of worshyp and gentlemen vse the iuce of a
+certeine floure they haue emonge them, whiche maketh drincke moche like the
+worste of the Renishe muste. And because thei cary great droues of catteile
+with them, they chaunge their soile often. Their bodies are all naked,
+sauing their priuities, whiche they hide with felles of beastes. All the
+Troglodites are circumcised aftre the maner of the Egiptians, sauing only
+the Claudians: whiche they so terme of claudicacion or limping. They onely,
+dwellinge from their childe hode within the country of the Hesternes, are
+not touched with rasour or knife. The Troglodites that are called
+Magaueres, carye for theyr armour and weapon, a rounde buckler of a rawe
+oxe hide, and a clubbe shodde with yron. Other haue bowes, and Iauelines.
+As for graues or places of buriall, they passe not. For they binde the
+heade, and the fiete of the dead together with witthes of Paliurus, and
+then setting it vp vpon some hilly place, haue a good sporte to all to
+bethwacke it with stones, vntle they lie heaped ouer the corps. Then laye
+they a goates horne on the toppe and departe, biddinge sorrowe go plaie
+him. They warre one with another, not as the Griekes vpon rancour and
+Ambicion, but onely for foode sake. In their skirmishes, firste they go to
+it with stones, as afore ye haue hearde, vntle it fortune some nombre to be
+hurte. Then occupieng the bowe (wherin they are very sure handed) thei
+kille one another vpon hepes. Those battayles are attoned by the women of
+mooste auncient age. For when they be ones comen into the middle emong them
+(as they maye do withoute harme, for that is compted abhominacion in any
+wise to hurte one of them) the battaille sodenly ceaseth. They that are
+nowe so fiebled with age, that they can no longer followe the heard:
+winding the tayle of an oxe aboute their throte choke vp and die. But he
+that differreth to rydde him selfe in this sorte: It is laweful for another
+(aftre a warninge) to doe it. And it is there compted a friendly
+benefaicte. Men also diseased of feures, oranye other incurable malady,
+they doe in lyke maner dispatche: iudginge it of all griefes the woorste,
+for that manne to liue, that canne nowe nothinge doe, why he shoulde desyre
+to lyue. Herodote writeth, that the Troglodites myne them selues caues in
+the grounde, wherin to dwell. Men not troubled with anye desire of riches,
+but raither giuing them selues to wilfull pouertie. They glory in nothing
+but in one litle stone, wherin appere thre skore sondry colours: which we
+therfore calle Exaconthalitus. They eate sondry kindes of venemous vermyne.
+And speake any distincte worde they cannot, but sieme rather to busse or
+thurre betwene thetiethe, then to speake.
+
+There is another people dwelling in that Ethiope that lyeth aboue Egipte,
+called Ryzophagi, whiche bestowe muche time in digging vp of the rootes of
+Riedes growing niere aboute them, and in wasshing and clensing of the same,
+whiche afterward they bruse betwixt stones till thei become clammie, and so
+makes wiete cakes of them, muche facioned like a brick a hande broade.
+Those bake thei by the Sonne, and so eate them. And this kinde of meate
+onely, serueth them all they life tyme plentifully and enough, and neuer
+waxeth fulsome vnto theim. Thei neuer haue warre one with another, but with
+Lions, whiche comyng out of the deserte there, partly for shadowe, and
+partly for to praie vpon smaller beastes, doe oftymes wourie diuers of the
+Æthiopes, comyng out of the Fennes. In so muche that that nation had long
+sences bene vttrely destroyed by the Lions, excepte nature of purpose, had
+shewed them her aide. For toward the dogge daies, there come into that
+coaste, infinite swarmes of Gnattes, without any drifte of winde to enforce
+them. The men then flieng to the fennes, are not harmed by them. But thei
+driue the Lions with their stingyng and terrible buszyng, cleane out of
+that quartre. Next vpon these, bordre the Ilophagi and Spermatophagi, the
+one liuynge by suche fruicte as falleth from the trees, in Sommer, and the
+residew of the yere by suche herbes as thei picke vp in the shadowed
+groundes. The other, the Ilophagi, siekynge to the plaines with their wiues
+and their children, climbe trees, and gather, eate, and cary home: the
+tendre croppes and buddes of the boughes. And thei haue by continualle
+practise, suche a nimblenes in climbyng, that (a wondrefull thynge to be
+spoken) thei wille leape from boughe to boughe, and tree to tree like
+Cattes or Squirelles, and by reason of their slendrenes and lightenes,
+wille mounte vp on braunches and twigges, without daunger or hurte. For
+thoughe their fiete slippe, yet hange thei feste by the handes: and if thei
+bothe faile theim, yet falle thei so light, that thei be harmelesse.
+
+These folkes go naked, and hold their wiues and children in commune. Emong
+them selues they fighte for their places without weapon: but against
+foreiners with staues. And wheare thei ouercome, there chalenge thei
+Lordeshippe. Thei communely dye for hongre, when their sight faileth them:
+whiche was their onely instrumente to finde their foode. The residewe of
+the countrie there aboute, do those Æthiopians holde, which are named
+Cynecy, not very many in nombre, but muche differing in life from the rest.
+For their Countrie beyng wooddie, and wilde, fulle of thicquettes, and
+skante of watre, thei are forced by night, for feare of wilde beastes, to
+slepe in trees: and toward the mornyng, all weaponed together, to drawe
+doune to the waters, wher thei shroude them selues into couert, and so
+abide close till the heate of the daie. At the whiche tyme the Bugles,
+Pardales, and other greate beastes, what for the heate, and what for
+thriste, flocke toguether to the watres. Assone as thei haue druncken, and
+haue well laden their beallies with watre, the Ethiopes startynge out vpon
+them with stakes, sharpened and hardened in the fire, and with stones, and
+with arrowes, and suche like weapon, at this aduauntage, slea them vpon
+heapes, and deuide the carkesses by compaignies to be eaten. And sometyme
+it happeneth that thei theim selues are slaine by some beast of force,
+howbeit very seldome. For thei euer by their pollicies and traines, doe
+more damage to the beastes, then the beastes can doe vnto them. If at any
+time thei lacke the bodies of the beastes, then take thei the rawe hides of
+suche as thei lateliest before had slaine, and clensyng them cleane fro the
+heare, thei sokynglie laie them to a softe fire; and when thei be throughly
+hette, deuide them emong the compaignie, whiche very griedely fille
+themselues of them.
+
+They exercise their children whilest thei be boies, to throw the darte at a
+sette marke, and he that hitteth not the marke receiueth no meate. By the
+whiche maner of trainyng, hongre so worketh in the boies that thei become
+excellente darters.
+
+The Acridophagie (a people borderyng vpon the deaserte) are somewhat lower
+of stature then the residewe, leane, and exceding blacke. In the Spring
+time, the Weste, and Southwest winde, bringeth vnto them out of the
+Deaserte, an houge nombre of Locustes, whiche are of verie greate bodie,
+and of wynge very filthily coloured. The Ethiopians well accustomed with
+their maner of flighte and trade, gather together into a long slade
+betwixte two hilles, a great deale of rubbeshe and mullocke, from places
+nighe hande, apte for fingry, and the grasse and all wiedes there aboute.
+And laieng it ready in heapes aforehande, a long the slade, when thei see
+the Locustes come with the winde like cloudes in the aire, thei set al on
+fire, and so swelte theim in the passing ouer, that thei bee skante full
+out of the slade, but thei fall to the grounde in suche plentie, that thei
+be to all the Acridophagi, a sufficient victuallyng. For thei poudre them
+with salte (wherof the countrie hath plentie) and so continually from yere
+to yere, liue by none other foode. For thei neither haue any kinde of
+catteille, ne fisshe can haue, beyng so farre fro the sea. And this maner
+of meate siemeth to theim, verie pleasaunte and fine.
+
+Of bodie thei are very lighte, swifte of foote, and shorte liued as not
+passyng xl. yeres, he that liueth longest. Their ende is not more
+incredible, then it is miserable. For when their drawe into age, their
+briedeth a kinde of winghed lice in their bodies, of diuers colours, and
+very horrible, and filthie to beholde: whiche firste eate out their
+bealies, and then their brest, and so the whole body in a litle space. He
+that hath this disease, first as thoughe he had on hym some tickelyng
+ytche, all to beskratcheth his bodie with suche pleasure, as is also
+mingled with some smart, And within a litle while aftre, when the lyce
+beginne to craule, and the bodie beginneth to mattre, enraged with the
+bittrenes and grief of the disease, he teareth and mangleth his whole bodie
+with his nailes, putting furth in the mean while many a greuous grone. Then
+gussheth there out of hym, suche aboundaunce of lice, that a manne would
+thinke they had bene barelled in his body: and that the barel now broken,
+the swarme plomped out. And by this meanes, whether throughe the enfectious
+aire, or the corrupcion of their fieding, thei make a miserable ende.
+
+Vpon the Southe border of Affrike, dwell there menne called of the Grekes
+Cynnamie, and of their neighbours Sauluages: Bearded, and that with
+aboundaunce of heare. Thei kiepe for the saufegarde of their liues, greate
+compaignies of wilde Mastiues: for that from midde Iune, till midde Winter,
+there entreth into their countrie, an innumerable sorte of Kine of Inde.
+Whether thei flie thether to saue them selues from other beastes, or come
+to sieke pasture, or by some instincte of nature vnknowen to manne, it is
+vncertaine. Against these, when the menne of their owne force, are not able
+to resist: thei defende themselues by the helpe of their dogges, and take
+many of them. Whereof thei eate parte whilest thei are freshe, and parte
+reserue thei in pouldre, for their aftre niede. Thei eate also many other
+kindes of beastes, whiche thei hunt with their dogges.
+
+The laste of all the Affriens Southewarde, are the Ichthiophagi. A people
+borderyng vpon the Troglodities, in the Goulfe called Sinus Arabicus:
+whiche vnder the shape of man, liue the life of beastes. Thei goe naked all
+their life time, and make compte of their wiues and their children in
+commune. Thei knowe none other kindes of pleasure or displeasure, but like
+vnto beastes, suche as thei fiele: neither haue thei any respecte to
+vertue, or vice, or any discernyng betwixte goode or badde. Thei haue litle
+Cabanes not farre from the Sea, vpon the clieues sides: where nature hath
+made greate carfes, diepe into the grounde, and hollowe Guttres, and
+Criekes into the maigne lande, bowting and compayng in and out, to and fro,
+many sondrie waies. Whose entringes thenhabitauntes vse to stoppe vp with
+great heapes of calion and stones, whereby the criekes serue them now in
+the steade of nettes. For when the sea floweth (which happeneth there twise
+in the daye, aboute the houres of thre, and of nyne) the water swelleth so
+highe, that it ouerfloweth into the maigne shore, and filleth those
+crieques with the sea. And the fisshe folowing the tide, and dispersinge
+them selues abrode in the maigne londe to seeke their foode: at the ebbe
+when the water withdraweth, retiring together with it alway to the dieper
+places, and at laste remaining in these gutters and crieques, they are
+stopped in with the stone heapes, and at the lowe water lye drie. Then come
+the enhabitauntes with wyfe and children, take them, and laye them oute
+vpon the rocques against the midday sonne, wher, with the broiling heate of
+the same, they be within a while skorched and parched. Then do they remoue
+them, and with a litle beating separate the fysshe fro the bones. Then put
+they the fisshe into the hollowes of the rocques, and beat it to pomois,
+minglinge therewith the side of the whynne Paliurus. And so facion it into
+lumpes muche like a bricke, but somewhat longer. And when they haue taken
+them againe a litle by the sonne, they sitte them downe together, and eate
+by the bealy.
+
+Of this haue thei alway in store, accordinge to the plenty that Neptune
+gyueth them. But when by the reason of tempest the sea ouerfloweth these
+places aboue his naturall course, and tarieth longer then his wonte, so
+that they can not haue this benefight of fisshing, and their store is all
+spent: they gather a kynde of great shelle fysshe, whose shelles they grate
+open with stones, and eate the fisshe rawe, in taste muche like to an
+oyster. If it fortune this ouerflowing by the reason of the winde, to
+continue longe, and their shellefysshe to fayle them: then haue they
+recours to the fysshebones (which they do of purpose reserue together in
+heapes) and when thei haue gnabeled of the softest and gristely partes with
+their tiethe, of those that are newest and beste, they beate the harder
+with stones into pieces, and eate them. Thei eate as I haue said in the
+wilde field together abrode, reioicing with a semblaunte of merinesse, and
+a maner of singyng full vntuned. That done they falle vppon their women,
+euen as they come to hande withoute any choyse: vtterly voide of care, by
+reason they are alwaye sure of meate in good plentye.
+
+Thus foure daies euer continual, busied with this bealy bownsing chiere,
+the v. daie thei flocke together to go drincke, al on a droue, not vnlike
+to a heard of kiene to the waters, shouting as they go with an Yrishe
+whobub. And when they haue dronke till their bealies stonde a strutte, so
+that they are skant able to retourne: euerye bodie layes him downe
+dronckardelike to reste his water bolne bealy, and that daye eateth
+nothing. The next daye agayne they fall to their fyshing: And so passe they
+their lyfe continually.
+
+Thei seldome falle into any diseases, for that they are alway of so
+vniforme diete. Neuerthelesse they are shorter lyued then we are. Theyr
+nature not corrupted by any perswasion taken of other, compteth the
+satisfieng of hongre, the greatest pleasure in the world. As for other
+extraordenary pleasures, they seke them not. This is the maner of liuing
+propre vnto them that lye within the bosome of the sayde Arabique sea. But
+the maner of them that dwell without the bosome, is moche more merueilous.
+For thei neuer drinke ne neuer are moued with any passion of the mynde.
+These beynge as it ware by fortune throwen oute into the desertes, farre
+from the partes miete to be enhabited, giue them selues altogether to
+fyshing, which they eate haulfe rawe. Not for to auoyde thirste (for they
+desire no moyste thynges) but rather of a nature sauluage and wilde,
+contented with such victualle as commeth to hande. They compte it a
+principall blessednes to be withoute those thinges what so euer they be,
+that bringe sorowe or griefe to their hauers. Thei are reported to be of
+such patience, that though a manne strike them with a naked sweard, thei
+will not shonne him, or flye from him. Beate them, or do theim wronge, and
+they onely wil looke vppon you, neither shewinge token of wrathe, nor
+countenaunce of pitie. Thei haue no maner of speache emong them: But onely
+shewe by signes of the hande, and nodding with the heade, what they lacke,
+and what they would haue. These people with a whole consent, are
+mayntayners of peace towarde all men, straunger and other. The whiche maner
+althoughe it be wondrefull, they haue kept time oute of mynde. Whether
+throughe longe continuance of custome, or driuen by necessitie, or elles of
+nature: I cannot saye. They dwell not as the other Icthiophagi doe, all in
+one maner of cabanes, but sondry in diuers. Some haue their dennes, and
+their cabanes in them opening to the North: to the ende they might by that
+meanes be the bettre shadowed fro the sonne, and haue the colder ayre. For
+those that are open toward the Southe, by the reason of the greate heate of
+the sonne, caste forthe such a breathe, fornais like, that a manne can not
+come niere them. They that open towarde the Northe, builde them preaty
+Cabanes of the ribbes of whales (whiche in those seas they plentuously
+find) compassing them aboute by the sides, accordynge to their naturall
+bendinge, and fasteninge them together at bothe endes with some maner of
+tyenge. Those do they couer with the woose and the wiedes of the sea
+tempered together. And in these they shroude them selues fro the sonne:
+nature by necessitie diuising a way how to helpe and defende her selfe.
+
+Thus haue ye hearde the lyfe of the Icthiophagi, and now remaineth there
+for Aphrique onely the Amazones to be spoken of, which menne saye in the
+olde tyme dwelte in Libye. A kinde of warlike women, of greate force, and
+hardinesse, nothing lyke in lyfe vnto our women. The maner amonge them was
+to appointe to their maidens a certein space of yeres to be trayned, and
+exercysed in the feictes of warre. Those beynge expired, they ware ioyned
+to menne for yssues sake. The women bare all the rule of the commune
+wealthe. The women ware princes, lordes, and officiers, capiteines, and
+chiefteines of the warres. The menne had noughte to doe, but the drudgery
+at home, and as the women woulde appoincte them. The children assone as
+thei ware borne, were deliuered to the men to nouryshe vp with milke, and
+suche other thinges as their tendrenes required. If it ware a boye, they
+eyther brake the right arme assone as it was borne, that it mighte neuer be
+fytte for the warres, or slue it, or sente it oute of the country. If a
+wenche, they streighte ceared the pappes, that thei might not growe to
+hindre them in the warres. Therefore the Grecians called theim Amazones, as
+ye woulde saie, pappelesse. The opinion is, that thei dwelt in the Ilonde
+named Hespera, which lieth in the marsshe, named (of a riuer that runneth
+into it) Tritonis, ioyning vpon Ethiope, and the mounte Atlas, the greatest
+of all that lande. This Ilonde is very large and greate, hauyng plentie of
+diuers sortes of fruictes, whereby the enhabitauntes liue. Thei haue many
+flockes of shiepe, and goates, and other small catteile, whose milke and
+flesshe they eate. They haue no maner of graine, ne knowe what to doe
+therwith.
+
+
+OF ASIE.
+
+THE SECONDE PARTE.
+
+¶ The first Chapitre.
+
+¶ Of Asie and the peoples moste famous therin.
+
+Asie, the seconde part of the thre wherin to we haue said that the whole
+erth is diuided: tooke name as some hold opinion, of the doughter of
+Oceanus, and Tethis, named Asia, the wife of Iaphetus, and the mother of
+Prometheus. Or as other affirme, of Asius, the sonne of Maneye the Lidian.
+And it stretcheth it self from the South, bowtyng [Footnote: Bending] by
+the Easte into the Northe: hauyng on the West parte the two flouddes, Nilus
+and Tanais, and the whole Sea Euxinum, and parte of the middle earth sea.
+Vpon the other thre quarters, it is lysted in with the Occean, whiche where
+he cometh by Easte Asie, is called Eous (as ye would saie toward the
+dawnyng) by the South, Indicus (of the countrie named India) and aftre the
+name of the stoure Scithiane, vpon the northe Scythicus. The greate
+mounteine Taurus ronnyng East and West, and in a maner equally partyng the
+lande in twaine: leaueth one parte on the Northe side, called by the Grekes
+the outer Asie: and another on the South, named the inner Asie. This
+mounteine in many places is founde thre hundred lxxv. miles broade: and of
+length equalle with the whole countrie. About a fiue hundred thre skore and
+thre miles. From the coast of the Rhodes, vnto the farthest part of Inde,
+and Scythia Eastwarde. And it is deuided into many sondrie partes, in
+sondrie wise named, whereof some are larger, some lesse. This Asie is of
+suche a sise, as aucthorus holde opinion, that Affrike and Europe ioyned
+together: are scante able to matche it in greatnes. It is of a temperate
+heate and a fertile soile, and therefore full of all kindes of beaste,
+foule, and worme, and it hath in it many countries and Seignouries.
+
+On the other side of the redde Sea, ouer against Egipte in Affrike: lieth
+the tripartite region, named Arabia, whose partes are, Petrea: boundyng
+West and Northe vpon Siria: and right at fronte before hym Eastwarde,
+Deserta: and Arabia Felix by Southe. Certein writers also adioyne to
+Arabia: Pancheia, and Sabea. It is iudged to haue the name of Arabus, the
+sonne of Apollo and Babilone.
+
+The Arabiens beyng a greate people, and dwellyng very wide and brode: are
+in their liuyng very diuers, and as sondrie in religion. Thei vse to go
+with long heare vnrounded and forked cappes, somewhat mitre like, all aftre
+one sorte, and their beardes partie shauen. Thei vse not as we doe, to
+learne faculties and sciences one of another by apprenticehode, but looke
+what trade the father occupied, the same doeth the sonne generally applie
+himself to, and continue in. The mooste aunciente and eldest father that
+can be founde in the whole Countrie, is made their Lorde and Kyng. Looke
+what possessions any one kindrede hath, the same be commune to all those of
+that bloude: Yea one wife serueth theim all. Wherefore he that cometh
+firste into the house, laieth doune his falchion before the dore, as a
+token that the place is occupied. The seniour of the stocke enioieth her
+alnight Thus be thei all brethren and sistren one to another, throughout
+the whole people. Thei absteine fro the embrasinges neither of sister ne
+mother, but all degrees are in that poinct as indifferent to than, as to
+beastes of the fieldes. Yet is adulterie death emong them. And this is
+adulterie there: to abandon the bodie to one of another kindred. And who so
+is by suche an ouerthwarte begotten: is iudged a bastard, and otherwise
+not. Thei bancquet not lightly together, vndre the nombre of thirtie
+persones. Alwaie foresene that, two of the same nombre at the leaste, be
+Musicens. Waiters haue thei none, but one kinsman to minister to another,
+and one to helpe another. Their tounes and cities are wallesse, for thei
+liue quietly and in peace one with another. Thei haue no kinde of oyle, but
+that whiche is made of Sesama, but for all other thynges, thei are most
+blessed with plentie. They haue Shiepe greater than Kien, and verie white
+of woulle. Horses haue thei none, ne none desire, for that their Chamelles
+in al niedes serue them as well. Thei haue siluer and golde plentie, and
+diuerse kindes of spices, whiche other countries haue not. Laton, Brasse,
+Iron, Purple, Safron, the precious rote costus, and all coruen woorkes, are
+brought into theim by other. Thei bewrie their kyng in a donghille, for
+other thei wille skante take so muche laboure. There is no people that
+better kiepeth their promise and couenaunt, then thei doe, and thus thei
+behight it.
+
+When thei wille make any solempne promise, couenaunte, or league, the two
+parties commyng together, bryng with them a thirde, who standyng in the
+middes betwixte theim bothe, draweth bloude of eche of them, in the palme
+of the hande, along vndre the rote of the fingres, with a sharpe stone: and
+then pluckyng from eche of their garmentes a little iaggue, [A small
+piece.] he ennoyncteth with that bloude seuen other stones, lyeng ready
+betwixte theim, for that purpose. And whilest he so doeth, he calleth vpon
+the name of Dionisius and Vrania, whom thei accompte emong the nombre of
+goddes, reuengers of faithelesse faithes. This done, he that was the
+sequestrer of the couenaunte become thsuretie for the parties. And this
+maner of contracte, he that standeth moste at libertie, thinketh miete to
+be kepte.
+
+Thei haue no firynge but broken endes and chippes of Myrrhe, whose smoke is
+so vnwholsome, that excepte thei withstode the malice therof with the
+perfume of Styrax, it would briede in them vncurable diseases. The Cinamome
+whiche groweth emong theim, none gather but the priestes. And not thei
+neither, before thei haue sacrificed vnto the goddes. And yet further thei
+obserue, that the gatheryng neither beginne before the Sonne risyng, ne
+continue aftre the goyng doune. He that is lorde and gouernour emong them,
+when the whole gather is brought together, deuideth out vnto euery man his
+heape with a Iauelines ende, whiche thei haue ordinarily consecrate for
+that purpose. And emongest other, the Sonne also hath a heape deuided out
+for hym, whiche (if the deuision be iuste) he kindeleth immediatly with his
+owne beames, and brenneth into asshes. Some of the Arabiens that are
+pinched with penurie, without all regard of body, life, or helth, doe eate
+Snakes, and Addres, and suche like vermine, and therefore are called of the
+Grekes Ophyophagi.
+
+The Arabiens named Nomades, occupie much Chamelles, bothe in warre and
+burden, and all maner cariage, farre and nighe. The floude that ronneth
+alonge their bordes, hathe in it as it ware limall of golde in great
+plentie. Whiche they neuertheles for lacke of knowledge do neuer fine into
+masse.
+
+Another people of Arabia named Deboe, are for the great parte shepemasters,
+and brieders. Parte of them notwithstanding, occupie husbandrie, and
+tilthe. These haue suche plentie of gold, that oftetimes emong the cloddes
+in the fieldes thei finde litle peables of golde as bigge as akecornes,
+whiche thei vse to set finely with stones, and weare for owches aboute
+their necke and armes, with a very good grace. They sell their golde vnto
+their borderers for the thirde parte of Laton, or for the halfe parte of
+siluer. Partly for that they nothing estieme it, and specially for the
+desire of the thinges that foreiners haue. Nexte vnto them lie the Sabeis,
+whose riches chiefely consisteth in encence, Myrrhe and Cinamome, howbeit
+some holde opinion also that Baulme groweth in some places of their
+borders. Thei haue also many date trees very redolente of smelle, and the
+roote called Calamus.
+
+There is in that contry a kinde of serpentes lurking in the rootes of
+trees, of haulfe a foote lengthe, whose bitinge is for the moste parte
+death. The plenty of swiete odours, and sauours in those quarters, doeth
+verely stuffe the smelling. And to avoyde that incommoditie, they
+oftentimes vse the fume of astincking gomme, and gotes heare chopped
+together. Ther is no man that hath to do to giue sentence vpon any case but
+the king. The mooste parte of the Sabeis apply husbandrie. The residewe
+gatheringe of spices and drugges. They sayle into Ethiope for trade of
+marchaundise, in barkes couered with leather. The refuse of their cinamome
+and Cassian they occupy for firing. Their chiefe citie is called Saba, and
+stondeth vpon a hyll. Their kynges succed by discente of bloude, not any
+one of the kindred certeine, but suche as the people haue in moste honour,
+be he good or be he badde. The king neuer dare be sene oute of his Palace,
+for that there goeth an olde prophecie emong them of a king that shoulde be
+stoned to deathe of the people. And euery one feareth it shoulde lighte on
+him selfe. They that are about the king of the Sabeis: haue plate bothe of
+siluer and golde of all sortest curiously wrought and entallied. Tables,
+fourmes, trestles of siluer, and all furniture of household sumptuous aboue
+measure. They haue also Galeries buylte vppon great pillours, whose
+coronettes are of golde and of siluer. Cielinges voultinges, dores and
+gates couered with siluer and golde, and set with precious stones:
+garnisshinges of yuorye, and other rare thinges whiche emong men are of
+price. And in this bounteous magnificence haue thei continued many yeres.
+For why the gredy compasse how to atteyne honoure with the vniuste rapine
+of other mennes goodes, that hath tombled downe headeling so many commune
+wealthes, neuer had place emong them. In richesse equal vnto them, are the
+Garrei, whose implementes of household are all of golde and siluer, and of
+those and yuorie together, are their portalles, their cielinges, and
+rophes, made. The Nabatheens of all other Arabiens are the beste husbandes,
+and thriftiest sparers. Their caste is wittye in winning of substaunce, but
+greater in kepinge it. He that appaireth the substaunce that was lefte him,
+is by a commune lawe punished: and contrariwise that encreaseth it, muche
+praysed and honoured.
+
+The Arabiens vse in their warres swerde, bowe, launce, slinge, and battle
+ax. The rable of helhoundes (whom we calle Sarasines) that pestilent
+murreine of mankinde, came of this people. And as it is to be thoughte, at
+this daye the great parte of Arabia is degenerate into that name. But thei
+that dwell towarde Egipte, kepe yet their olde name, and lyue by butin,
+[Footnote: Booty, from the French "Butin."] like prickers of the bordre,
+wherin, the swiftenes of their camelles doeth them good seruice.
+
+
+¶ The seconde Chapitre.
+
+¶ Of Panchaia, and the maners of the Panqueis.
+
+Panchaia (a countrie of Arabia) is iudged of Diodore the Sicilian to be an
+islonde of xxv. miles brode. It hath in it thre noble cities Dalida,
+Hyracida, and Oceanida. The whole contrie (excepte a litle vaine of sandie
+grauelle) is fertile and plenteous: chiefely of wine and encence. Whiche
+groweth ther in suche aboundaunces that it sufficeth the whole worlde for
+the francke fume offeringe. There groweth also good store of Myrrhe, and
+diuers other redolente thinges, whiche the Panqueis gather, and selle to
+the merchauntes of Arabia. At whose hande other buienge them againe,
+transports them into Egipte, and Sirie. And fro thence they are spred
+abrode to all other peoples. The Panqueis in their warres vse wagons aftre
+the maner of menne in olde time.
+
+Their commune wealth is deuided into thre sundry degrees. The firste place
+haue the priestes, to whome are ioyned the artificers. The seconde the
+houseband men. And the thirde the menne of warre: with whom the catteile
+maisters or brieders be coupled. The priestes are the heades, and chiefe of
+all the residewe, and haue aucthoritie aswell in sentence of lawe, as to
+put ordre in al ciuile affaires: the sentence of deaths onely excepted.
+
+The housebandemen, tille the grounde, and attende vpon the fruictes, and
+bring all into the commune store. And thei that shalbe founde moste
+diligente in that laboure and occupation: are chosen by the priestes (but
+not aboue the nombre of ten at one time) to be iudges ouer the distribution
+of the fruictes. Vpon consideracion that other by their aduancement might
+be stirred to like diligence. The catteile maisters, yf ther be any thing
+either apperteining to the sacrifices, or commune affaires, touching
+nombre, or weight, do it with all diligence,
+
+No man amonge the Panchais hath any thinge that he can call proprely his
+owne: his house, and his gardein excepted. For bothe the customes, and
+reuenewes, and all other profectes, are deliuered in to the priestes
+handes. Who acordinge as they finde necessarie and expediente, iustely
+distribute them. But they themselues are graunted double share. Their
+garmentes by the reason of the finesse of the wolle of their shiepe,
+especially aboue other, are verye softe and gentle clothe. Bothe menne and
+women vse ther, to sette oute them selues with Iuelles of golde, as
+cheines, braselettes, eareringes, tablettes, owches, ringes, Annuletes,
+buttons, broches, and shoes embraudered, and spangled with golde, of diuers
+colours. The menne of warre serue onely for the defence of their countrey.
+
+The priestes aboue all other, giue them selues vnto pleasaunte life, fine,
+nette and sumptuous. Their garmentes are rochettes of fine linnen, and
+sometime of the deintiest wollen. Vpon their heades thei weare mitres
+embraudred, and garnisshed with golde. They vse a kinde of voided shoes
+(whiche aftrewarde the Grieques toke vp, and called sandalium) very finely
+made, and of sondry colours. And as the women weare, so do they, all maner
+of Iuelles sauing earinges. Their chiefe occupation is to attende vpon
+goddes seruice, settinge forthe the worthie diedes of the goddes, with
+himpnes, [Footnote: Hymns.] and many kindes of commendacion. Yf thei be
+founde withoute the halowed grounde, it is lawfull for any manne to slea
+them. They saye that they came of the bloude of Iupiter Manasses, at suche
+time as he came firste into Panchaia, hauinge the whole worlde vndre his
+dominion. This countrie is full of golde, siluer, latton, tinne, and yron,
+of the whiche it is not laweful to cary any one out of the realme. The
+giftes both of siluer and golde, whiche in greate nombre of longe time,
+have bene offred to their goddes, are kepte in the temple: whose dores are
+by excellent workemanship garnished with golde, siluer and yuorie. The
+couche of their God is vi. cubites longe, and foure cubites brode, all of
+golde, gorgeous of worcke, and goodly to beholde. And by that, is there
+sette a table of like sorte in euery poincte: for sise, stuffe, and
+gorgeousnes. They haue but one temple, all of white stone, builte vpon
+pilours, grauen, and embossed, thre hundred and xxxviii. taylours yardes
+square, that is to saye, euen of lengthe and bredthe, euery waye so muche.
+And somewhat acordinge to the syse of the temple, it is sette full of highe
+ymages very precious: coruen and grauen. Rounde about the temple haue the
+priestes their habitacion. And all the grounde aboute them xxv. myle
+compasse: is halowed to their goddes. The yerely rente of that grounde is
+bestowed vpon sacrifice.
+
+
+¶ The iii. Chapitre.
+
+¶ Of Assiria and Babilonia, and the maners of those peoples.
+
+As saieth sainct Augustine, the countrie called Assiria, was so named of
+Assur, the sonne of Sem. And at this daie, to the ende that time might be
+founde an appairer, of al thinges, with the losse of a sillabe is becomen
+Siria: Hauyng for his bounde, on the East, the countrie called Inde, and
+part of Media. On the West the floude Tygris, on the Southe Susiana, and on
+the Northe the maigne mounteigne Caucasus. It is a deintie to haue in
+Assiria a showre of raine: and therefore are thei constreined for the due
+moistyng of their lande, to tolle in the riuers by pollicie of trenching
+and damming: wherwith thei so plentifie their grounde, that thei communely
+receiue two hundred busshelles for a busshell, and in some speciall veine,
+three hundred for one. Their blades of their Wheate and Barlie are fowre
+fingers brode. Their Sesamum, and Milium (Somer cornes) are in groweth like
+vnto trees. All the whiche thinges Herodotus the historien, thoughe he
+knoweth them (as he writeth) to be vndoubtedly true, yet would he that men
+toke aduisemente in the reportyng of theim: for that thei mighte sieme vnto
+suche as neuer sawe the like, incredible. Thei haue a tree called Palma,
+that beareth a kinde of small Dates. This fruicte thei fiede muche vppon,
+and out of the bodie of the tree, thei draw at one time of the yere a
+liquor or sappe, wherof thei make bothe wine and hony. In their fresh
+waters thei vse boates facioned round like a buckler, which the Armenians
+that dwelle aboue them, do make of salowe wikers wrought one within an
+other, and couered with rawe leather. The appareile of the Assyrians is a
+shirte downe to the foote, and ouer that a short garment of wollen, and
+last of al a faire white pleicted cassaque doun to the foote agayne. Their
+shoes are not fastened on with lachettes, but lyke a poumpe close about the
+foote. Which also the Thebans dydde vse, and but they twayne, no moe. They
+suffre theyr heares to growe and couer them with prety forked cappes
+somwhat mytrelyke. And when they goe abroade, they besprinkle them selues
+with fragraunt oyles, to be swete at the smelle. They haue euery man a
+rynge with a signet, and also a sceptre finely wrought: vppon whose toppe
+thei vse to sticke either an apple, or a rose, or a lillye, or some lyke
+thynge. For it is a dishonour to beare it bare.
+
+Emongest all the lawes of that people I note this chiefly as worthie
+memorie. When their maidens came to be mariageable, thei ware from yere to
+yere, brought foorthe into the Marquette, for suche as would buye them to
+be their wiues. And because there ware some so hard fauoured, that menne
+would not onely be loth to giue money for them, but some menne also for a
+litle money to take theim: the fairest ware first solde, and with the
+prices of theim brought into the commune Treasourie, ware the fowler
+bestowed. Herodote writeth that he heard by reaporte, that the Heneti (a
+people on the bordre of Italie towarde Illiria) ware wonte to vse this
+maner. Whervpon Sabellicus takyng an occasion, writeth in this maner.
+Whether there ware suche a maner vsed emong that people (saieth he) or not,
+I haue litle more certaintie to laie for my self then Herodote had. But
+thus muche am I able to saie: that in Venice (a citie of famous worthines,
+and whose power is well knowen at this date, to be greate, bothe by Sea and
+by lande) suche maner as I shall saie, was sometyme vsed. There was in the
+Citie of Venice, a place dedicate, as ye would saie to our Ladie of Pietie.
+Before whose doores it happened a child or twaine, begotten by a skape
+(whiche either for shame or necessitie could finde no mother, or for the
+nombre of parteners, no one propre father) to bee laide. And when by the
+good Citezeins suche tendrenes had been shewed to two or thre, as the
+mothers loked for, and manhode (to saie the truthe) doth require: the dore
+of pitie became so fruictfull a mother, that she had not now one or twoo in
+a yere, but three or fower in a quarter. Whiche thyng when the gouernours
+of the citie perceiued, thei toke ordre by commune consente, that from
+thens foorthe suche women children onely, as should fortune so to bee
+offred to Pietie, should bee nourisshed at the commune charge of the citie,
+and none other. And for those accordyngly, thei ordained a place wher thei
+ware brought vp, hardly kepte in, and diuersely enstructed accordyng to
+their giftes of witte and capacitie, vntill thei ware mariage able. At the
+whiche tyme, she that had beautie and good qualities bothe, found those a
+sufficient dowrie to purchase her choyse of husbandes. And she that hadde
+but beautie alone, thoughe her qualities ware not so excellente, yet for
+her honestie that beside forth was singuler in theim all, founde that
+beautie and honestie could not be vnmaried. These therefore ware not
+permitted to euery mannes choise, but graunted to suche as ware thoughte
+menne worthie of suche women. If there ware any that lacked the grace of
+beautie, yet if she ware wittie, and endewed with qualities (together with
+her honestie) a small dowrie purchased her a husband in good time. But if
+there ware any in whom there happened neither commendacion of beautie nor
+wit, but onely bare honestie: for her bestowyng was there a meane found, by
+waie of deuocion, as we terme it when we signifie a respecte of holines in
+the diede.
+
+Menne vnmarried beyng in daungier vpon Sea or on Lande, or beyng sore
+distressed with sickenes, makyng a vowe for the recouerie of healthe, where
+vnto thei holde them selues bounden in conscience (if it fortuned theim at
+that tyme to be deliuered) for satisfaction of their vowe in that case not
+vprightly perfourmed, vsed to take for their wiues, suche of the simplest
+as other had left. So that in processe they alwaie founde husbandes, and
+the commune wealthe a diminishyng of charge.
+
+Another Lawe of the Babilonians there was, more worthie of memorie a greate
+deale, for that it imported more weight. And that was this. Thei had from
+their beginnyng no Phisicens emong theim, but it was enacted by the
+consente of the Realme, that who so was diseased of any malady, should
+comon with other that had bene healed of the like afore. And acordyng to
+their counsaile, practise vpon himself. But he that vsed or attempted any
+other waie, to be punished for it. Other write that the sicke ware brought
+out into the Marquet place, where suche as had bene deliuered of the like
+grief afore: ware bounde by the lawe, to go fro persone to persone, and
+shewe theim by what meanes thei had bene remedied.
+
+Thei bewrie their dead in Honie, and obserue the same maner of mournyng
+that the Egiptians do. If any man haue medled with his wife in the nighte,
+neither of theim bothe toucheth any thyng the next mornyng, before thei be
+washed:
+
+There was in Babilon a Temple dedicate to Venus, and it hath bene the maner
+in tyme paste, that when their came any straunger to visite this Temple,
+all the women of Babilon should come vnto him or them, with greate
+solempnitie and fresshely appareiled, euery one hauing a garlande on her
+heade, with some seueralle knowledge of distinction one from another, and
+offre their seruice to the straungier. And looke whom he liked, he must
+laie doune in her lappe, suche somme of money as pleased him. That done
+thei bothe withdrew themselues fro the temple a greate distaunce, and laie
+together. That money was consecrate to Venus.
+
+There were certein kindredes emong theim, that liued with none other thyng
+but fisshe dried against the Sonne, and brused in a Mortare, and so laied
+vp till niede ware. And then did thei mingle it, and kneade it with water
+into a maner of paaste, and so baked it, and eate it. There ware thre
+sortes of menne that bare rule and office emong them. The king, the nobles
+with the Seniours, and those that had serued in the warres and ware now
+exempte. Thei had also menne skilfull in the secretes of nature, whiche
+thei calle Magi, and Chaldei, suche as ware the priestes of Egipte,
+institute to attende vpon the seruice of their Goddes. These men all their
+life daies, liued in the loue of wisedome, and were connyng in the cours of
+the Sterres. And sometyme by foretokenyng of birdes flight and somtyme by
+power of holy verses and nombres tourned awaie the euilles fro menne, and
+benefited them with thinges that ware good. Thei could expounde Dreames,
+and declare the significacions of vncouth wondres. So that men ware certein
+of suche successe, as thei had foreshewed. Thei wente not into straunge
+scholes to learne their knowledge, as the Grecians doe, but learned the
+science of these thynges at their fathers handes, as heirtage from one
+generation to another, euen from their childhode at home in their houses.
+Whereby it came to passe that beyng sokingly learned, it was bothe the more
+groundedly learned, and also without tediousnes. Thei had one vniforme and
+constaunt waie of teaching, and one constantnes of doctrine, not waueryng
+and almoste contrary to it self, as the doctrine of the Greekes: where eche
+Philosopher almoste had his waie, and iudgemente, of the principles and
+causes of thynges. But these menne agre al in one, that the worlde is
+eternall and euerlastyng, with out begynnyng and without ende. And that the
+ordre of the whole, was disposed by the prouidence of the highest. The
+bodies aboue to haue their course, not at all aduentures and without rule,
+but by an inuiolable lawe of God, acordyng to his ordenaunce and will moste
+certein. Thei haue learned by long markyng and notyng of thynges tyme out
+of mynde, one aftre another: how by the course of the Starres, to
+prognostique, that is to foreshewe vnto men, many thynges to come. Thei
+holde that of all other Sterres, the planetes are strongest of Influence,
+namely Saturnus. To the sonne thei attribute brightnes and vertue of life.
+Mars, Iupiter, Mercurie, and Venus, thei obserue moste,(for that thei haue
+a course propre by themselues) as interpretours of the mindes of the goddes
+to foresignifie thinges vnto men. Which opinion is so grounded in them,
+that they haue called all those foure planetes, by the one name of
+Mercurius, as ye woulde saye commune currours or messengers. Thei also do
+warne menne of many thinges, bothe hurtefull and availeable: by the
+marking, and knowledge of winde and weather, of raine and droughte, of
+blasing sterres, of the eclipses of the Sonne and Mone, of earthquakes, and
+manye suche like.
+
+Furthermore thei ymagine in the firmament other sterres, subiecte in
+influence vnto these former, wherof some are in the haulfe heauen
+continually in our sighte, and some in the other haulfe continually oute of
+our sight And as the Egiptiens haue feigned them selues xii. goddes, so
+likewyse haue thei. To euerie of the whiche they referre one moneth, and
+one signe of the Zodiaque. Thei haue prophecied vnto kinges, many
+aduentures. As vnto Alexandre victory, when he made his exploicte towarde
+Darius. Likewise to Hirchanour and Seleucus, and other the successours of
+Alexandre, prophecied thei many thinges: As also to the Romaines, which had
+most sure successe. Thei make compte also of xxiiij. other starres:
+without, and beside the waie of the zodiaque, xii. towarde the Northe, and
+the residewe towarde the Southe. Of the whiche, so many as appiere in
+sight, they iudge to apperteigne to the quicke, and the other to the dead.
+These troublesome mases haue thei broughte into the worlde more then
+enoughe, beside the accompte that thei make of their obseruacions and
+deuinacions from their beginninge to Alexandras time: nombringe them thre
+thousande and fourty yeres (a shamefull lie) excepte thei will entreprete
+their yeres by the Mone, as the Egiptians doe, comptinge euery monethe for
+a yere.
+
+
+¶ The iiii. Chapiter.
+
+¶ Of Iewry, and of the life, maners, and Lawes of the Iewes.
+
+Palestina, whiche also is named Iudea, beinge a seueralle prouince of
+Siria; lieth betwixte Arabia Petrea, and the countrie Coelosiria. So
+bordering vpon the Egiptian sea on the West, and vpon the floude Iordon on
+the Easte, that the one with his waues wassheth his clieues, and the other
+sometime with his streame ouerfloweth his banckes.
+
+The Bible, and Iosephus by ensample therof called this londe Cananea: a
+countrie renowned for manifolde substaunce. Fertile of soyle, well watered
+with riuers, and springes, and rich with precious balme. Lienge in the
+nauelle of the world, that it neither might be broyled with heate, ne
+frosen with colde. By the reason of the which mildenes of aier, it was
+iudged by the Israelites or Hebrues, (and rightlye so iudged) to be the
+country that God promised vnto Abraham, Isaac, and Iacob, flowinge in
+aboundaunce of milke and honie. Vpon the hope of enioyinge of this londe,
+folowed they Moses oute of Egipte fortye yeres wandering in Campe. And
+before thei ware broughte into Cananea by Iosua, his substitute, ouercame
+with strong hande, one and thirty kinges.
+
+This is the people that onely of all other may chalenge the honour of
+auncientie. This is the people alone the mighte haue glorified in the
+wisedome, and vnmedled puritie of Language, as beinge of all other the
+firste. This is the people that was mother of lettres, and sciences. Amonge
+these remained the knowledge of the onely and euerliuinge God, and the
+certeintie of the religion that was pleasaunte in his eies. Among these was
+the knowledge, and foreknowledge of al, sauinge that Helas, they knewe not
+the visitour of their wealthe and the ende of their wo, Iesus the sauioure
+of all that woulde knowe him, and sieke life in his deathe. But him whome
+thei knew not, when by reason thei should: him shal thei yet ones knowe in
+time when the father woulde.
+
+The Israelites, the Hebrues or the Iewes (for all in effecte soundeth one
+people) liue aftre the rule of the lawes, whiche Moses their worthy duke,
+and deuine chiefteine, declared vnto theim. Withoute the whiche also or
+anye other written, thei liued holily, hundred of yeares before: atteininge
+to the truthes hidden from other, by a singuler gifte aboue other. That
+Philosophre of Philosophers, and deuine of deuines, Moses the marueilous,
+waienge in his insight, that no multitude assembled, coulde be gouerned to
+continuaunce without ordres of equitie and lawes: when with rewardes to the
+good, and reuenge vpon the euill, he had sufficiently exhorted, and trained
+his people to the desire of vertue, and the hate of the contrarie: at the
+last beside the two tables receiued in the mounte Sinah, added ordres of
+discipline, and ciuile gouernaunce, full of all goodlines and equitie.
+Whiche Iosephus, the Iewe, (a manne of greate knowledge, and eloquence,
+aswel in the Hebrewe, his natural tongue, as in the Grieke, amonge whome he
+liued in notable fame not a fewe yeres) hath gathered, and framed into one
+seuerall treatise. Out of the which, because I rather fansie, if I maye
+with like commoditie, to folowe the founteines of the first Authours, then
+the brokes [Footnote: _Broke_, literally, broken meat. It here means
+"disconnected passages."] of abredgers, which often bring with them much
+puddle: I haue here translated, and annexed to the ende of this booke,
+those ordres of the Iewes commune welthe, sendyng the for the reste to the
+Bible. And yet notwithstanding, loke what I founde in this Abredger,
+neither mencioned in the bible, nor in that treatise, the same thus ordrely
+foloweth.
+
+The heathen writers, and the Christianes, do muche diffre concerninge the
+Iewes, and Moyses their chiefteine. For Cornelius the stylle [Footnote:
+Cornelius Tacitus. The reference, however, is wrong. The passage quoted
+does not appear in the Annals: it is from Book v., § 5. of the History.] in
+his firste booke of his yerely exploictes, called in Latine Annales, dothe
+not ascribe their departure oute of Egipte to the power and commaundement
+of God: but vnto necessitie, and constrainte, with these wordes:
+
+A great skuruines, and an yche saieth he, beinge risen throughe oute
+Egipte, Bocchoris, the king sekynge remedye in the Temple of Iupiter
+Hammon, was willed by responcion to clense his kingdome: And to sende awaye
+that kinde of people whom the goddes hated (he meaneth the Iewes) into some
+other contrey. The whiche when he had done, and they (as the poompe of al
+skuruines, not knowing wher to become) laye cowring vndre hedges, and
+busshes, in places desert, and many of them dropped away, for sorowe and
+disease: Moyses (whiche also was one of the outecastes, saieth be)
+counselled them not to sitte ther, awayting aftre the helpe of God or of
+man, whiche thei ware not like to haue: but to folowe him as their
+capteine, and lodesman, and committe them selues vnto his gouernaunce. And
+that hervnto thei all agreinge, at wilde aduentures, withoute knowing what
+thei did, tooke their iorney. In the which thei ware sore troubled, and
+harde bestadde, [Footnote: Beset. "What then behoveth so bestad to done."
+Gascoigne's Works, 1587.] for lacke of water. In this distresse, when thei
+ware now ready to lye them downe, and die for thirst, Moyses espienge a
+great heard of wilde Chamelles comming fro their fiedinge, and going into
+woddie place ther beside, folowed them. And iudginge the place not to be
+without watre, for that he sawe it fresshe and grene, digged and founde
+plenty of watre. Wherwith when thei had releued themselues, thei passed on.
+vi. daies iourney: and so exployted that the seuenth daye thei where thei
+builte their Citie, and their temple. Moyses had beaten out all the
+enhabitauntes of the contry, then to the entent he might satle the peoples
+hartes towarde him for euer: deuised them newe ordres, and ceremonies
+cleane contrary to all other nacions. For (saieth Cornelius) Looke what so
+euer is holy amonge vs, the same is amonge them the contrary. And what so
+euer to vs is vnlawfulle, that same is compted lawefull amonge theim. The
+ymage of the beaste that shewed them the waye to the waters, and the ende
+of their wanderinge: did they set vp in their chambres, and offre vnto it a
+rambe, in the despight of Iupiter Hammon, whom we worship in the fourme of
+a Rambe. And because the Egiptians worshippe their goddesse Apis in the
+fourme of a cowe, therforethei vse to slea also in sacrifice a cowe. Swines
+flesshe thei eate none, for that thei holde opinion that this kynde of
+beaste, of it selfe beinge disposed to be skoruie, mighte be occasion
+againe to enfecte them of newe. The seuenth daye thei make holy day. That,
+is to say spende awaie in ydlenes and rest: for that on the seuenth daye,
+they founde reste of theyr wandering, and misery. And when they had caughte
+a sauour in this holye daye loytering: it came to passein processe of tyme,
+that thei made a longe holydaye also of the whole seuenth yere: But other
+holde opinion that thei do obserue suche maner of holyedaies, in the honour
+of Saturne the god of fasting and famine: with whose whippe thei are lothe
+againe to be punisshed. Their breade is vnleauened. These ceremonies and
+deuises, by what meanes so euer thei ware brought in amonge them, thei do
+stiffely defende. As thei are naturally giuen, to be stiffe in beliefe, and
+depe in loue with their owne althoughe towarde alother thei be most
+hatefull enemies. So that theineither will eate ne drincke with them: no
+nor lye in the chambre that a straunger of a nother nacion lyeth in. A
+people altogether giuen vnto leachery, and yet absteining from the
+enbrasinges of the straunger. Emong them selues thei iudge nothinge
+vnlawfull. Thei deuised to rounde of the foreskinne of their yarde (whiche
+we call circumcision) because thei would haue a notable knowledge betwene
+them, and other nacions. And the firste lesson thei teache vnto their
+children, is to despise the goddes. The soules of those that die in
+tormentes, or in warre, thei iudge to be immortall. A continuall feare haue
+thei, and a regard of heauen and helle. And where the Egiptians honour many
+similitudes and Images of beastes, and other creatures, whiche thei make
+themselues: the Iewes onely doe honour with their spirite and minde, and
+conceiue in their vndrestandyng, but one onely Godheade. Iudging all other
+that worshippe the Images of creatures, or of manne: to bee vngodlie and
+wicked. These and many other thinges doth Cornelius write, and Trogus also
+in his xxxvi. booke.
+
+There ware amonge the Iewes thre seueralle sectes, differyng in life from
+the reast of the people. The Phariseis, the Sadduceis, and the Esseis. The
+Phariseis vsed a certeine rough solempnesse of appareille, and a very
+skante fare: determinyng the Tradicions of Moyses, by certein ordenaunces
+and decrees, whiche they themselues sette vp. Thei caried vpon their
+foreheades, and on their lefte armes pretie billettes of Paper, facioned
+for the place, wherein ware written the tenne preceptes of the two Tables.
+And this did thei for that the Lorde saieth: And these shall thou haue
+(meanyng the commaundements) as a remembraunce hanging before thine eyes,
+and alwaie ready at thine hande. These were called their Philacteries, of
+these two woordes Phylexi and Thorat, wherof the former signifieth to
+Kiepe, and the other, the Lawe. These menne also hauyng vppon their skirtes
+muche broder gardes then other, stacke them full of Thornes, whiche beatyng
+and prickyng them on the hieles as thei wente, might putte them in
+remembraunce of the commaundementes of God. Thei attributed all thynges
+vnto God, and destenie, which they call Emarmeni. Neuertheles thei
+graunted, that it laie muche in the free choise of manne: either to doe, or
+not to doe the thinges that are iust and godlie, but yet destenie to helpe
+in al cases. Whiche destenie thei thought to depende of the influence of
+the bodies aboue. Looke what their superiors and Elders had saied, or
+answered to any demaunde, thei neuer would contrarie it. Thei belieued that
+GOD should come to Iudge the worlde, and that all soules ware euerlastyng.
+And as for the soules of the good, thei helde opinion, that thei passed
+from one bodie to another, vntill the daie of the generall resurrection.
+But the soules of the wicked, to be plonged into euerlasting prison and
+dongeon. The name of Pharisei was giuen vnto them for that thei ware
+disguised fro the commune maner of other, as ye would saie, Sequestred.
+
+The Sadduceis denied that there was any destenie, but that God was the
+beholder of all, and that it laie in the choise of manne, to do well or
+euill. And as for ioye or sorowe that the soule should suffre aftre this
+life, thei denied. Neither belieued thei any resurrection: because thei
+thoughte the soule died with the bodie. Thei would not belieue that there
+ware any spirites, good or bad. Neither would thei receiue more of the
+Bible, then the fiue bookes of Moses. Thei ware sterne men, and
+vncompaignable: not so muche as ones kepyng felowshippe one with another.
+For the whiche sternesse, thei named theim selues Sadduceis, that is to
+saie iuste menne.
+
+The Esseis ware in all pointes verie like vnto our cloisterers, abhorryng
+mariage and the companie of women. Not for that thei condempned Mariage, or
+the procreation of issue, but for that thei iudged a manne ought to be ware
+of the intemperauncie of women. And that no woman kept herself true to her
+husbande. Oh shameful opinion, and muche better to be reported by the dead,
+then to be credited of the quicke, bee it neuer so true. Thei possessed all
+thinges in commune. As for checkes or reuilings, was to them muske and
+honie, and slouenly vndaftinesse, a great comelinesse. So that thei ware
+alwaie in a white surcote, all was well. Thei had no certein abiding in any
+one citie: but Celles ouer all, where so euer thei became. Before the
+risyng of the Sonne, they spake nothyng that touched any worldly affair:
+but praied the Sonne to rise. After whose vprijste thei laboured vntill
+eleuen of the clocke. And then, washyng firste their whole bodie in water:
+thei satte doune together to meate, in solempne silence euery manne.
+Swearing they compted forswearyng. Thei admitted no manne to their secte,
+vndre a yere of probation. And aftre what time thei had receiued him: yet
+had thei two yeres more to proue his maners and condicions. Suche as thei
+tooke with a faulte, thei draue fro their compaignie. Enioyned by the waie
+of penaunce, to go a grasing like a beast, vntill his dieng daie. When
+tenne ware sette in a companie together, no one of them spake without the
+consente of the other nyne. Thei woulde not spitte within the precincte of
+the compaignie emong theim, ne yeat on their righte side. They kept the
+Sabboth with suche a precisenesse, that thei would not that daie, ease
+nature of the belie burden. And when vpon other daies, nature forced theim
+to that easemente, thei caried with theim a litle spade of woode, wherewith
+in place most secreate, thei vsed to digge a litle pit, to laie their
+bealie in. And in the time of doyng, thei also vsed a very greate
+circumspection, that their clothes laie close to the grounde rounde aboute
+theim, for offending (saied thei) of the Maiestie of God. Vpon whiche
+respecte, thei also couered and bewried it, assone as thei had done that
+nature required. Thei ware of verie long life, by the reason of the
+vnifourme diete that thei vsed, alwaie aftre one rate of fare: whiche was
+onely the fruicte of their countrie Balme. Thei occupied no money. If any
+manne suffered for wel doyng, or as wrongfully condempned, that thoughte
+thei the beste kinde of death. Thei helde opinion that all soules ware made
+in the beginnyng, and put in to bodies from tyme to tyme, as bodies did
+niede them. And for the good soules beyng ridde of their bodies againe,
+thei saied there was a place appointed beyond the Weast Occean, where thei
+take repose. But for the euill, thei appoincted places toward the East, as,
+more stormie colde and vnpleasante. Ther ware amonge them that prophecied
+thinges. Some of them gaue themselues to wedlocke: least if they shoulde be
+of the oppinion that men oughte to absteine vttrely from women, mankinde
+shoulde fade, and in processe be extincte, yeat vsed thei the compaignie of
+their wiues nothing at riote.
+
+The lande of Siria (whereof we haue named Iewrie a parte) is at this daie
+enhabited of the Grekes, called Griphones, of the Iacobites, Nestorians,
+Sarracenes, and of two Christian nations, the Sirians and Marouines. The
+Sirians vse the saie Masse, aftre the maner of the Grekes: and for a space
+ware subiecte to the churche of Rome.
+
+The Marouines agree in opinion with the Iacobites. Their lettres and tongue
+are al one with the Arabique. These Christianes dwelle at the Mounte
+Libanus. The Sarracenes, whiche dwelle aboute Ierusalem (a people valeaunt
+in warre) delight muche in housbondrie and tilthe. But contrary wise, thei
+that enhabite Siria, in that poincte are nothing worth. The Marouines are
+fewe in nombre, but of all other thei are the hardieste.
+
+
+¶ The v. Chapitre.
+
+¶ Of Media, and the maners of the Medes.
+
+Media (a countrie of Asia) as Solinus writeth, toke the name of one Medus,
+the sonne of Medea and Egeus, kyng of Athenes. Of whom the people ware also
+called Medes. But Iosephus affirmeth that it was so named of Medius the
+sonne of Iapheth. This countrie, as it is sene in Ptolomie, hath on the
+Northe, the sea named Hircanum, on the West Armenia, and Assiria, on the
+Southe Persie, and on theast Hircania and Parthia. Sauing that betwixte
+Parthia and it, there ronneth a mounteigne, that separateth their
+frontiers. The feactes that thei mooste exercise, are shooting and ridyng.
+Wherein thei be righte experte, and almoste (for those quartres) without
+matche or felowe. It hathe bene there a longe continued and aunciente
+custome, to honour their kynges like goddes. The rounde cappe, whiche thei
+cal Tiara: and their long slieued garmentes, passed from them to the
+Persians, together with the Empire. It was a peculier maner vsed of the
+Kynges of the Medes, to haue many wiues. Which thyng was aftrewarde also
+taken by of the communes: so that at lengthe it was thought vnmiete to haue
+feawer wiues then seuen. It was also a goodlie thyng for a woman to haue
+many husbandes: and to be without fiue at ones, was compted a miserable
+state. The Medes entre leagues and couenauntes, both aftre the maner of the
+Grekes, and also with drawing bloud vpon some parte of the arme aboute the
+shouldre, one of another, whiche thei vse to licke eche of others body. All
+that parte of the countrey that lieth towarde the Northe, is barrein and
+vnfruictefulle. Wherefore thei vse to make store of their fruicte, and to
+drie them, and so to worke them into a masse, or lumpe for their foode. Of
+rosted Almondes thei make their breade: and their wine of the rootes of
+certein herbes. Thei eate great plentie of the fleshe of wilde beastes.
+
+
+¶ The. vi. Chapitre.
+
+¶ Of Parthia, and the maner of the Parthians.
+
+A Certeine nombre of Outlawes and Banisshed menne, called Parthie, gaue
+name to this Countrie: Aftre suche time as by train, and stealth thei had
+gotten it. On the Southe it hath Carmania, on the North Hircanum, on the
+Weast The Meades, and on the Easte the country of Arabia. The countrie is
+hilly, and full of woddes, and of a barreine soyle. And a people which in
+the time of the Assiriens, and Medes, were scante known and litle estiemed.
+In so moche that when that highe gouernaunce of the whole (whiche the
+Grekes call the Monarchie) was yelde into the handes of the Persians: thei
+ware made a butin, as a nombre of raskalles without name. Laste of all thei
+ware slaues to the Macedonies. But afterward in processe of time, suche was
+the valeauntenes of this people and suche successe had thei: that thei
+became lordes, not ouer their neighbours onely rounde about theim, but also
+helde the Romaines (the conquerours of the worlde) suche tacke, that in
+sondrie warres they gaue them great ouerthrowes, and notablye endamaged
+their power. Pliny reherseth xiiii. kingdomes of the Parthians. Trogus
+calleth them Emperors of the East part of the worlde, Asthoughe they, and
+the Romaines holding the Weste, had deuided the whole betwixte them.
+
+Aftre the decay of the Monarchie of the Macedonians, this people was ruled
+by kinges. Whome generally by the name of the first king, thei termed
+Arsaces. Nexte vnto the kinges maiestie, the communaltie bare the swaye.
+Oute of whome they chase bothe their Capteignes for the warres, and their
+gouernours for the peace time. Their language is a speache mixte of the
+Scithians and Medes. Their appareil at the firste, was aftre their facion
+vnlike to all other. But when thei grewe vnto power, louse and large, and
+so thinne: that a man mighte see thoroughe it, aftre the facion of the
+Medes. Their maner of weapon, and armour, was the same that the Scithians
+vsed. But their armies ware altogether almoste of slaues and bondemen,
+contrary to the maner of other peoples. And for that no manne hath
+aucthoritie amonge them to giue fredome vnto anye of this bonde ofspring:
+The nombre of them by continuance, came vnto a greate multitude. These do
+thei bringe vp, and make of as deerly, as thei do of their owne children:
+teachinge them to ride, to shote, to throwe the darte, and suche like
+feates, with great diligence and handsomenes. Eche communer ther, acording
+to his substaunce, findeth a greate nombre of these to serve the kinge on
+horsebacke, in all warres. So that at what time Anthonie the Romaine made
+warre vpon the Parthians, wher thei mette him with fyftie thousande
+horsemen: there ware of the whole nombre but eyghte hundred fre borne. They
+are not skylfull to fighte it oute at hande stripes, ne yeat in the maner
+of besieging or assaulting: but all together aftre the maner of skirmisshe
+as they spie their aduantage. Thei vse no trompet for their warninges or
+onsettes but a dromme: neither are thei able to endure long in their
+fighte. For yf they ware so good in continuaunce, as thei be violente at a
+brunte: ther ware no multitude able to susteine their force. For the moste
+parte thei breake of, when the skirmishe is euen at the whottest. And
+within a while aftre thei feigne a flight, wher with thei beginne againe a
+newe onsette. So when thou thinckest thy selfe mooste sure of the honour of
+the fielde, then arte thou at the poinct of the hardest hazarde. Their
+horsmen vse armour of mayle entrelaced with fethers: bothe for their owne
+defence, and the defence also of their horses. In times passed thei
+occupied no golde ne siluer, but only in their armour. Vpon regarde of
+chaunge in their luste, thei mary echeone many wiues, and yet punishe thei
+none offence so greuously as adultery. For the auoyding whereof thei doe
+not onely forbidde their women by generall restrainte from all feastes, and
+banckettinges of men: but also from the sighte of them. Some neuerthelesse
+do wrighte, amonge the whiche Strabo is one, that thei vse to giue their
+wiues sometime to their friendes, as in the waye of mariage, that thei maye
+so haue issue. Thei eate none other fleshe but suche as thei kylle at the
+chace. Thei be euer on horsebacke, whether thei go to the fielde or the
+banket, to bye, to selle, to commune of aughte with their friende, or to do
+any thing that is to be done. Yea thei dispatche al commune and priuate
+affaires, sittinge on horsebacke. And this is to be vnderstonden of the fre
+borne: for the slaues are alwaies on foote. Their buriall for all menne
+(sauinge the kinge) is the dogges bealy, and the kytes. But when thei or
+suche like haue eaten of, the fleshe, then couer thei the bare bones with
+earth. Thei haue great regarde vnto their goddes, and the worship due vnto
+them. Thei are men of a proude nature, busie medlers, and sedicious,
+craftie, deceiptfull, malaparte, and vnshamefaced: for thei holde opinion
+that it becometh the man as well to be Sterne, as the woman to be milde.
+Thei be euer in some stirre, either with their neighbours, or elles amonge
+themselues. Men of fewe wordes, and readier to doe, then to saye. And
+therefore whether it go with them or against them, thei lappe it vp in
+scilence. Thei obey not their superiours for any reuerence, but for feare.
+Altogether giuen to lechery, and yet skante in fiedinge. No farther trewe
+of worde or promesse, then semeth them expediente for their owne behoue.
+
+
+¶ The. vii. Chapiter.
+
+¶ Of Persia, and the maners and ordinaunces of the Persians.
+
+Persia (a countrie of the Easte) was so called of Persius the Sonne of
+Iupiter and Danæ. Of whome the chiefe citie of the kingdome also, was named
+Persepolis, whiche in Englishe soundeth Perseboroughe (or as we corruptly
+terme it) Perseburie, and the whole nation Persiens. This countrie as
+Ptolemie writeth in his fiueth booke, hath on the Northe, Media: on the
+West, Susiana: on the Easte, the two Carmaniæs: and on the Southe, an
+inshot of the Sea, called the Bosome of Parthia. The famous cities thereof,
+were Axiama Persepolis and Diospolis. By the name of Iupiter thei
+vnderstode the whole heauen. Thei chiefely honour the Sonne, whom the calle
+Mitra. Thei worship also the Mone, the planet Venus, the fyre, the earthe,
+the water, and the windes. Thei neither haue aultare nor temple, nor ymage,
+but celebrate their deuine seruice vndre the open heauen vpon some highe
+place for that purpose appoincted. In doinge sacrifice thei haue no farther
+respecte, but to take awaye the life from the beaste. As hauing opinion,
+that forasmuche as the goddes be spirites, thei delighte in nothinge but
+the spiritual parte, the soule. Before thei slea it, thei set it aparte by
+them, with a corone upon the heade, and heape vppon it many bittre
+banninges and curses. Some of the nacion notwithstandinge, when thei haue
+slaine the beaste: vse to lay parte of the offalle in the fire.
+
+When thei sacrifie vnto the fire, they timbre vp drie stickes together,
+cleane without pille or barcke. And after what time they haue powred on
+neates tallowe, and oyle, thei kindle it. Not blowing with blaste of
+blowesse or mouthe: but makinge winde as it ware with a ventile, or
+trenchour, or suche like thinge. For yf any manne either blow into it, or
+caste in any deade thing, or any durte, or puddle, it is deathe to the
+doer. The Persians beare suche reuerence to their floudes, that thei
+neither wasshe, pysse, nor throwe deade carcase into them. No not so moche
+as spitte into them: But very reuerentlye honour their water after this
+maner. Comminge to lake, mere, floude, ponde, or springe: thei trenche out
+a litle diche, and ther cot thei the throte of the sacryfice. Being well
+ware, that no droppe of blode sprinckle into the water by. As thoughe all
+water ware polluted and vnhalowed ouer all: yf that should happen. That
+done their Magi (that is to say men skylful in the secretes of nature)
+layeng the flesh vppon a heape of Myrtus, or Laurelle, and tymbryng smalle
+wandes about, sette fyre thereon and brenne yt. And pronouncyng certein
+curses, they myngle oyle, mylke, and hony together, and sprinkle into the
+fyre. But these cursinges make they not against the fyre ne water. But
+against the earthe, a greate whyle toguether: holding in their hande a
+boundle of smalle myrte wandes. Their kinges reigne by succession of one
+kindred or stocke. To whom who so obeyeth not, hath his heade and armes
+striken of: and so wythout buriall is throwen out for karreine. Policritus
+sheweth that euery king of the Persians, buyldeth his howse vpon a greate
+hille: and ther hourdeth vp all the threasure, tribute, and taxe that he
+receyueth of the people: to be a recorde aftre his deathe how good a
+husbonde he hath bene for the commune wealthe. Suche of the subiectes as
+dwelle vpon the sea coast, are taxed to paie money. But those that inhabite
+toward the mydde londe: suche commodities as the quarter beareth or hath
+wher they dwelle. As apothecary druggues, woolle, coulours, and suche like
+and cateille accordingly. He is not permitted any one cause, to putte any
+man to death. Neither is it lawfull for any other of the Persians to
+execute any thyng against any of his house or stock, that maie sieme in any
+wyse cruelle. Euery one of them marie many wiues: and holde many concubines
+also beside, for the encrease of issue.
+
+The king Proclaimeth rewarde vnto him, that within one yere begetteth most
+children. Fiue yere aftre thei are begotten, thei come not in the fathers
+sight, by a certein ordenaunce vsed emong theim: but are broughte vp
+continually emong the women: To the ende that if the childe fortune to dye
+in the time of his infancie, their fathers grief maie be the lesse. Thei
+vse not to marie but in one tyme of the yere: toward midde Marche. The
+bridegrome eateth to his supper, an apple of that countrey, or a litle of
+the maribone of a Chamel: and so without any farther banquetting goeth to
+bedde. From fiue yeres olde, to twentie and fowre, thei learne to ride, to
+throwe the Darte, to shoote, and chiefly to haue a tongue voide of all
+vntruthe. For their nourituryng and trainyng in good maners, thei haue
+appoincted theim Masters of greate sobrenes and vertue, that teache them
+dieties, and pretie songes, conteinyng either the praises of their Goddes,
+or of some worthy Princes. Whiche sometime thei sing, and sometyme recite
+without note: that so they mighte learne to confourme their liues vnto
+theirs, whose praises thei sieme themselues to allowe. To this lesson
+assemble thei alwaie together, at the calle of a Trompette. And as thei
+growe into yeres, an accompt is required of them how well thei haue borne
+awaie the lessons of their childhode. Thei vse to ronne the race, and to
+course, bothe on horsebacke and on foote: at the leadyng of some noble
+mannes sonne, chosen for the nones. The field for the race, is at least
+thre mile and thre quarters longe. And to the ende that heate or colde
+should the lesse trouble them, they vse to wade ouer brookes, and swimme
+ouer riuers, and so to rowme and to hunte the fieldes, and to eate and
+drinke in their armour, and wette clothes. The fruyctes that eate are
+akecornes, wild Peares, and the fruicte of the Terebinthine tree. But their
+daiely foode aftre their ronnyng, and other exercises of the bodie: is hard
+Bisquette, or a like crustie breade, Hortechocques, Gromelle sede, a litle
+roste flesshe or soden, whether thei lust: and faire water their drincke.
+Their maner of Huntyng, is with the bowe, or the Darte on horse backe. Thei
+are good also in the slynge. In theforenoone thei plante and graffe, digge
+vp settes, stubbe vp rootes, make their owne armour, or fisshe and foule,
+with the Angle or nette. Their children are decked with garnishynges of
+golde. And their chief iuelle is the precious stone Piropus, whiche thei
+haue in suche price, that it maie come vppon no deade corps. And that
+honour giue thei also to the fire, for the reuerence thei beare there vnto.
+From twentie, till fiuetie: thei folowe the warres. As for byeng and
+sellyng, or any kinde of Lawe prattle, thei vse not. Thei cary in their
+warres, a kind of shieldes facioned like a losenge, a quiure with shaftes,
+and a curtilace. On their heades a copintanke, embatled aboute like a
+turrette, and a brestplate emboussed, of skaled woorke. The princes and
+menne of honour did weare a treble Anaxirides, facioned muche like a coate
+armour, and a long coate doune to the knees, with hangyng slieues acordyng.
+The outside colours, but the lining white. In Somer thei weare purple, and
+in Wintre Medleis. The abillementes of their heades, are muche like the
+frontlettes that their Magj doe weare. The commune people are double coated
+doune to the midde Leggue, and haue about their heade a great rolle of
+Sendalle. Their beddes and their drinking vessell, are garnished with gold.
+When they haue matier of moste importaunce to common of, thei debate and
+conclude in the middes of their cuppes: thinkyng it muche surer that is so
+determined, then aftre any other sobrer sorte. Acqueintaunce mieting of
+equall degre, griete one another with a kisse. But the inferiour mietyng
+with his bettre, enclineth his bodie foreward with lowe reuerence. Thei
+bewrie their corpses in the grounde, cearyng them all ouer with waxe. Their
+Magicens thei leaue vnbewried, for the foules to disspetche. The children
+there, by an ordenaunce no where elles vsed: doe carnally knowe their
+mothers. Thus have ye heard what the maners of the Persians ware sometyme.
+
+Herodotus reherseth certeine other, their facions not vtterly vnworthe the
+tellynge. That thei compted it vilanie to laughe, or to spitte before the
+kyng. Thei thought it fondenes in the Grekes, worthie to be laughed at, to
+imagine goddes to be sprong vp of menne. What so euer was dishoneste to be
+done, that thoughte thei not honeste to be spoken. To be in debte was muche
+dishonour, but of all thinges moste vile for to lie. Thei vse not to bewrie
+their deade bodies, vntill thei haue bene torne with dogges, or with
+fowles. And the parentes brought to niedinesses vse there to make
+cheuisaunce of their doughters bodies, which emong no nation elles was euer
+allowed. Howbeit some holde opinion, that it was also the propretie of the
+Babilonians. The Persians at this daie, beynge subdued of the Saracenes,
+and bewitched with Mahometes brainsicke wickednesse, are cleane out of
+memorie. A people in those daies, whiche through their greate hardinesse
+and force, ware of long tyme Lordes of the Easte parte of the worlde. But
+now tombled cleane from their aunciente renowne, and bewried in dishonour.
+
+
+¶ The. viij. Chapitre.
+
+¶ Of Ynde, and the vncouthe trades and maners of life of the
+   people therein.
+
+Ynde, a Countrie also of the Easte, and the closyng vp of Asia toward that
+quartre: is saied to be of suche a maigne syse, that it maie be compared
+with the thirde parte of the whole earth. Pomponius writeth, that alonge
+the shore, it is fowrtie daies sailyng the nighte also comprised therein.
+
+It tooke the name of the floude called Indus, whiche closeth vp the lande
+on the Weste side. Beginnyng at the Southe sea, it stretcheth to the
+Sonnerisynge: And Northward to the mount Caucasus. There are in it many
+greate peoples: and Tounes and Cities so thicke, that some haue reported
+them in nombre fiue thousande. And to saie truthe, it ought not to sieme
+greatly straunge vnto folkes, though the countrie be reported to haue suche
+a nombre of Tounes, or to be so populous: consideryng that of all other,
+the Yndiens alone, neuer discharged theim selues of any ouerplus of issue,
+as other haue done: but alwaie kepte their owne offspryng at home in their
+owne countrie. Their principall floudes are Ganges, Indus, and Hypanis. But
+Ganges farre passeth in greatnes the other twaine. This lande by the
+benefite of the battling breathe of the gentle Weast winde, reapeth corne
+twise in the yere. And other Wintre hath it none, but the bittre blastes of
+Theasterly windes called Etesiæ. Thei lacke wine, and yet some men reporte,
+that in the quartre called Musica, there groweth a good wine grape. In the
+Southe parte thereof, groweth Nardus, Cinnamome, Peper and Calamus
+aromaticus: as doeth in Arabia and Aethiope. The woode Ebenum (which some
+suppose to be our Guayacum) groweth there, and not elles where. Likewise of
+the Popiniaye and the Vnicorne. As for precious stones, Beralle, Prasnes,
+Diamantes, firie Carbuncles and Pearles of all sortes, be founde there in
+greate plentie. They haue twoo Sommers, softe pimpelyng windes, a milde
+aier, a rancke soile, and abundaunce of watre. Diuerse of them therefore
+liue an hundred and thirtie yeres. Namely emong the Musicanes. And emong
+the Serites, yet somewhat longer.
+
+All the Yndians generally, weare long heare: died either aftre a bright
+asshe coulour, or elles an Orenge tawnie. Their chief ieuelles, are of
+Pearle and precious stones. Their appareille is verie diuers: and in fewe,
+one like another. Some go in Mantles of Wollen, some of Linnen some naked,
+some onely brieched to couuer the priuities, and some wrapped aboute with
+pilles, and lithe barckes of trees. Thei are all by nature blacke of hewe:
+euen so died in their mothers wombe acordyng to the disposicion of the
+fathers nature, whose siede also is blacke: as like wise in the
+Aethiopians. Talle men and strongly made. Thei are very spare fieders,
+namely when thei are in Campe. Neither delighte thei in muche preasse. Thei
+are as I saied, greate deckers and trimmers of them selues, haters of
+theft. Thei liue by lawe, but not written. They haue no knowledge of
+lettres, but administer altogether without booke. And for which they are
+voide of guile, and of very sobre diete: all thing prospereth well with
+them. Thei drinke no wine, but when thei Sacrifie to their goddes. But
+their drincke is a bruage that thei make sometyme of Rize, sometime of
+Barlie. Their meate for the mooste parte is soupynges made also of Rize.
+
+In their lawes, bargaines, and couenauntes, their simplicitie and true
+meanyng well appeareth: for that thei neuer are muche contencious aboute
+them. Thei haue no Lawes concernyng pledges or thynges committed to another
+mannes kiepyng. No witnessynges, no handwritynges, no sealynges, ne suche
+like tokens of trecherie and vntrust: but without all these, thei trust and
+be trusted, thei belieue and are belieued, yea, thei oftentymes leaue their
+houses wide open without keper. Whiche truely are all great signes of a
+iuste and vprighte dealyng emong them. But this peraduenture can not seatle
+well with euery mannes fantasie: that thei should liue eche manne aparte by
+himself, and euery body to dine and to suppe when he lust, and not all at
+an howre determined. For in dede for the felowshippe and ciuilitie, the
+contrary is more allowable. Thei commende and occupie muche as a commune
+exercise, to rubbe their bodies: specially with skrapers made for the
+nones. Aftre whiche, thei smothe them selues again with Ebenum, whereof I
+spake afore.
+
+In their Toumbes, and Bewrialles, very plaine and nothyng costlie: But in
+trimming and arraieng of their bodies, to, to, gaude glorious. For there
+aboute thei neither spare gold, ne precious stone ne any kinde of silke
+that thei haue. Thei delighte muche in garmentes of white Sarcenet. And for
+that thei sette muche by beautie, thei cary aboute with theim phanelles to
+defende them from the sonne, and leaue nothyng vndone, that maketh for the
+bettre grace of their faces. Thei sette asmuche by truthe alone, as by all
+other vertues together.
+
+Age hath there no prerogatiue, except thei winne it with their wisedome,
+and knowledge. Thei haue many wiues, whiche thei vse to buye of their
+parentes for a yoke of Oxen. Some to serve them as their vndrelynges, and
+some for pleasure, and issue. Whiche maie neuerthelesse vse buttoke
+banquetyng abrode (for any lawe or custome there is to restreine theim)
+excepte their housebandes by fine force, can compelle them to kepe close.
+
+No one emong the Yndians either sacrifieth coroned, ne offreth odours, ne
+liquours. Thei wounde not their Sacrifice in no maner of wise: but smore
+[Footnote: To smother, from the Dutch _smooren_] hym by stopping the
+breath. Least thei should offre any mangled thing vnto God, but that that
+ware in euery parte whole. He that is conuicte of false witnessyng, hath
+his fingres cutte of by the toppe ioynctes. He that hath taken a limme from
+any manne, suffreth not onely the like losse, but loseth also his hande.
+But if any man haue taken from an artificer, his hande, or his eye, it
+lyeth hym vpon his heade.
+
+The kyng hath a garde of bought women: who take chardge of his bodie, and
+haue the trimmyng and orderyng thereof, the residue of the armie, remainyng
+without the gates. If the Kyng fortune to be droncken, it is not onely
+lawfull for any one of these women to slea hym: but she shall also as in
+the waie of rewarde, be coupled in mariage to the nexte king. Whiche (as is
+saied) is one of his sonnes, that afore enioied the Croune. It is not
+lawfull for the king to slepe by daie time: and yet in the night tyme to
+auoide trecherie, he is forced euery houre to chaunge his chambre. When he
+is not in campe, he ofte tymes cometh abroade: bothe to giue sentence, and
+to heare matters dependyng in question. And if it be time of daie to trimme
+his bodie: he bothe heareth the pleaes, and is rubbed in the meane season
+with the skrapers afore mencioned, by thre of his women. He cometh furthe
+also to Sacrifices, and to hunting: Where he is accompaignied with a rable
+of women, in as good ordre as ours ware wonte to be vpon Hocke Mondaie.
+[Footnote: Hock-Monday fell eight days after Easter, Hock-tide was a
+festival instituted in memory of King Hardicanute's death in 1042.
+Hock-Tuesday money was a duty paid to the landlord in ancient times.] His
+waie is ranged with ropes, and his garde of menne abideth without. But if
+it fortune any to steale in, to the women (whiche is contrary to their
+ordre and duetie) he loseth his heade for it. There go afore hym Tabours
+and Belles. When he hunteth in places fensed aboute, two or thre armed
+women stande preste, [Footnote: Preste--_ready_.] for his aide, and
+defence. But when he hunteth in open place, he is caried vppon an
+Eliphante: and euen so sittyng on his backe shooteth, or throweth the darte
+at his game. Some of his women ride vppon Horses, some vpon Elephantes. As
+likewise in the warres, where thei fight with all kinde of weapons
+skilfully.
+
+Suche menne also as haue gathered thinges into writynges, recorde: that the
+Yndians worshippe as their goddes the father of raine Iupiter: Ganges their
+floude, and the familiar spirites of their countrie. And when their kyng
+washeth his heade, thei make solempne feast, and sende his highnes greate
+giftes, eche man enuyenge other, who maye shewe hym self most riche, and
+magnificent.
+
+The commune wealth of the Yndians, was sometyme deuided into seuen states
+or degrees. The Sages (whiche other calle Philosophers) ware of the first
+ordre, or state: the whiche although thei ware, in nombre feawer then any
+of the rest: yet ware thei in honour and dignitie aboute the kyng, farre
+aboue all other. These menne (priuiledged from all busines) neither be
+troubled with office, ne be at any mannes commaundemente: But receiue of
+the communes suche thinges as serue for the Sacrifices of their goddes, and
+are requisite for bewrialles. As though thei ware bothe well acqueinted,
+and beloued in heauen, and knewe muche of the trade in helle. For this
+cause haue thei bothe giftes and honour largely giuen them. And in very
+diede thei do muche good among the people. For in the beginning of the
+yere, assemblyng together, thei foreshewe of raine, of drouthe, of winde
+and of sickenesse: and of suche like thynges as maie to profeight be
+foreknowen. For as well the kynge as the people, ones vndrestandyng their
+foresawes, and knowyng the certeintie of their iudgemintes by former
+experience: shone the euilles, and are preste to attende vpon that, that is
+good. But if any of their said Sages shall fortune to erre in his
+foresighte: other punishmente hath he none, then for euer after to holde
+his peace.
+
+The seconde ordre is of housebande menne, whiche beyng more in nombre then
+any of the other states, and exempte fro the warres, and all other labour:
+bestowe their tyme onely in housebandrie. No enemie spoileth them, none
+troubleth them: but refraineth fro doing them any hurte or hinderaunce,
+vpon respect of the profighte that redoundeth to the whole, throughe their
+trauailles. So that thei, hauyng libertie without all feare to followe
+their business, are instrumentes and meanes of a blessed plenteousnesse.
+Thei with their wiues and children, dwell alwaie in the countrie, withoute
+resortyng to the tounes or citie. Thei paie rente to the Kyng (for all the
+whole Countrie is subiecte to their kyng) neither is it lawfull for any of
+the communes to occupie and possesse any grounde, without paieynge rente.
+And the housebande men beside this rente, yelde vnto the Kynges maiestie, a
+fiueth of their fruictes yerely.
+
+The thirde ordre standeth all by brieders and fieders, of all sortes,
+whiche like wise neither enhabite toune ne village: but with tentes, in the
+wilde fieldes. And these with huntyng and foulyng in sondrie wise, so kiepe
+vndre the beastes and hurtefull foules: that whear other wise the
+housebande menne should in siede tyme, and towarde harueste, be muche
+acloyed [Footnote: This word, meaning overburthened, is frequently met with
+in Chaucer.] and hyndered by the fowles, and theim selues alwaie by the
+beastes, the countrie is quiete from al suche annoyance.
+
+In the fowrthe ordre are Artificers, and handicraftesmen. Whiche are
+deuided, some into Smithes, some into Armourers, some for one purpose, some
+for another, as is expediente. These doe not onely liue rente free, but
+also haue a certaine of graine allowed them at the kinges allowaunce.
+
+In the fiueth ordre are the menne of warre, a greate nombre daiely
+exercised in armes, bothe on Horsebacke, on Elephantes, and on foote. And
+all their Elephantes, and horses miete for their warres, are found of the
+kinges allowaunce.
+
+The sixteth ordre is of Surueiours or Maisters of reporte, whiche haue the
+ouer sighte of all thynges that are done in the realme, and the charge to
+bryng reaporte vnto the kyng.
+
+In the seuenth place, are thei that be Presidentes, and heades of the
+commune counsailles, very fewe in nombre, but worthy men for their
+nobilitie and wisedome. Oute of these are chosen counsailours for the
+kynges Courtes, and officers to administre the commune wealth, and to
+determine controuersies: yea, capitaines for the warres, and Princes of the
+realme.
+
+The whole state of Ynde beyng deuided into these ordres or degrees: it is
+also ordeined, that a man shall not marie out of the ordre, wherin his
+callyng lieth, ne chaunge his trade. For neither maie the souldiour occupie
+housebandrie thoughe he woulde: ne the artificers entremedle with the
+doctrine of the Sages.
+
+There are also amonge the Yndians, persons of honour appointed to be as it
+ware Tutours of straungiers, to see that no wronge be done them, to put
+ordre for their kepyng, and Phisicke, if any falle sicke. As also (if it
+fortune any of them to die) for the bewrieng of theim, and to deliuer their
+goodes, and money to their nexte friendes.
+
+All causes are brought afore the iudges, who heare the parties, and
+punysshe the offenders diligently. Ther is no slauery amonge them. Yea,
+thei haue a certaine ordinaunce, that none shalbe slaue or bonde amonge
+them, but all fre, and of equalle aucthoritie and honour. For thei holde
+opinion that who so accustometh his selfe neither to be Lorde ouer other,
+ne to wronge any bodie: that man hath prepared him selfe sauftie and ease
+what so euer shall happen hym by any aduenture. And a fonde thing ware it
+to make the lawes indifferente for all, and not to make the states of the
+men indifferente.
+
+But because ther are in Inde manye sondrie contries, diuerse bothe in
+people and tongue (as in so large a thing muste nedes happen) ye shall
+vnderstond that thei do not all alike vse suche trade as I haue described,
+but in some places somewhat worse.
+
+Of those that lie towarde the Easte, some occupie brieding, and some do
+not. Other dwellinge in the mershe and fennes vpon the riuers side: occupie
+fisshing, and liue by the same all rawe. And thebettre to worcke their
+feate, thei make them selues boates, of suche canes as growe ther, of a
+wonderfull biggenes, So, that so muche of the cane as is betwixte ioyncte,
+and ioyncte, is a iuste proportion of timbre for one of their boates.
+
+These of all the other Indians, are appareilled in matte, made of a
+certayne softe kinde of mere rushes. Which when they haue gathered out of
+the floude, and sliced out in maner of lace: they brayde together muche
+like oure figge fraile, or suche like kinde of mattinge, and make them
+selues ierkins therof.
+
+Those that be yet by Easte of them, are brieders of cataille: and liue
+altogether with rawe fleshe, and haue to name Padians. Whose conditions are
+sayde to be suche.
+
+As often as it fortuneth any of their citezeins to besicke, yf it be a
+manne: his nierest friendes, and those that are moste aboute him, kylle him
+by and by, leaste (saye thei) his fleshe shoulde waxe worse. Yea, thoughe
+he woulde dissemble the matier, and denie him self to be sicke, it boteth
+not. For withoute pardon, they kille him, and make a feaste with him. If it
+be a woman, looke how the menne did by the manne, so do the women by a
+woman. Likewise do thei with bothe sortes, when thei waxe croked for age,
+or become impotente: where broughte, what by the one meanes and the other,
+none of them die for age.
+
+Ther is another sorte of the Indians that kille no liuinge thing, ne
+plante, nor sowe, nor builde house: but liue with herbes, and a certeine
+sede whiche groweth there of the owne accorde, muche like vnto gromelle,
+whiche thei gather with the cuppe or shelle that it groweth in, and so
+seeth it, and eate it. If any of these falle sicke, he wandereth forthe
+into some deserte place, and ther laieth him downe: no manne taking hede
+either to his lieng or to his dienge.
+
+All these Yndians that I nowe haue spoken of, in quenching of natures
+heate, vse their women as secretly as beastes do their females.
+
+These Yndians haue a kinde of sages, that the Griekes calle Gimnosophistæ,
+whiche as the worde Sophista soundeth now, might merily be interpreted
+briechelesse bablers. But as Sophista did signifie then, naked Sages: or to
+giue one Grieke worde for a nother, naked Philosophres. These (as Petrarche
+writeth) haunte the outemoste borders, and shadowie partes of that
+countrie, wandering naked accordinge to their name, vp and downe, heather
+and theather studienge, and searching the natures of thinges, the course of
+the heauens, and the secretes of knowledge. Thei continue sometime al the
+whole daye from the sonne rising, till his downe goinge: beholdinge the
+same with stedfaste eye, neuer tourning away the heade (althoughe it be
+ther moste feruently hote) searching and spienge aftre certaine secretes in
+the body thereof.
+
+At another time thei passe the daye likewyse, standing one while on one
+legge, another while on another in the broilinge sande of that contrie.
+Froste nor snowe, nor firie heate greued not them.
+
+Amonge these, is ther a people called Brachmanes, whiche (as Didimus their
+king wrate vnto Alexandre when he went aboute to subdue them) liue a pure
+and simple life, led with no likerous lustes of other mennes vanities. This
+people longeth for no more then nature requyreth naturallye. Thei are
+content with suche foode as commeth to hande, desiryng no suche as other
+menne tourne the worlde almoste vpside downe to haue, leauing no element
+vnransaked to gette a gowbin [Footnote: A large mouthful. From the old
+French, _Gobeau_.] for their glotenous gorge: but suche as the earth
+vnploughed, or vndoluen, yeldeth of her self. And because thei acqueinte
+not their table with surfet, in dede thei know not so many kindes of
+sickenesses, ne so many names of diseases as we doe: but thei bettre knowe
+what sounde healthe meaneth, and staied continuaunce of the same then euer
+we are like.
+
+Thei haue no neide to craue one anothers helpe and reliefe, wher no manne
+maketh clayme by (thine) and by (myne) but euery manne taketh what he
+lusteth and lusteth no more then he niedeth. Enuie cannot dwelle ther, ne
+none of her impes, wher all be equalle, and none aboue other, and all alike
+poore, maketh all alike riche. Thei haue no officers of Iustice among them,
+because thei do nothing that ought to be punisshed. Ther can no lawe
+appiere, because none offence appeareth.
+
+The whole people hath one onely lawe, to do nothinge against lawe that
+nature prescribeth. To cherishe labour, to barre out ydlenes, and banis all
+[Transcriber's note: 'colle' in original] couetyse. That lechery licke not
+away the vigour of their spirites, and strength: nor lacke throwe menne in
+desperate doompes. That euery manne hath enoughe, wher no manne couettes
+more. That neuer content, is of all other the moste cruell restles plague.
+For whome she catcheth, she throweth a foote beneth beggery, whilest thei
+canne finde none ende of their scrattinge, but the more thei haue, the
+fellier gnaweth their longing.
+
+Thei warme by the Sonne, the deawe is their moisture, the riuer is their
+drinke, the faire grounde their bedde. Care breaketh not their sleape,
+Compassing of vanities wearieth not their minde. Pride hath no stroke ouer
+them, among whom ther is no diuersite. Neither is their any kinde of bonde
+knowen amonge them: but the bondage of the body to the minde whiche they
+onely allowe to be iuste.
+
+For the building of their houses, they sende not ouer sea for stone, thei
+burne no Calion to make lime to tempre their mortre, thei bake no brickes,
+nor digge no sande. But either make them caues in the earthe, or take suche
+as they finde ready made in the sides of mounteines and hilles. Ther dwel
+thei without feare of rage or ruine, of weather or of winde. He thincketh
+him self saeflier fenced from showres with his caue, then with a fewe
+tiles: and yet hath by it a double commoditie. A house while he liueth, and
+a graue ready made when he dyeth. Ther is no glittering apparell, no
+rattelinge in sylkes, no sylkes, no rusteling in veluettes, but a litle
+brieche of brawded russhes, or rather a couering of honeste
+shamefacednesse.
+
+The women are not sette oute to allure, ne pinched in to please, ne
+garnisshed to gase at. No heare died, no lockes outelaied, no face painted,
+no skinne sliicked, no countrefeicte countenaunce, nor mynsing of passe. No
+poticary practise, no ynckhorne termes, nor pithlesse pratling. Finally no
+colours of hipocrisie, no meanes to set out more beautie then nature hathe
+giuen them. They ioyne not in engendrure for likerous luste, but for the
+loue of yssewe and succession. Thei kepe no warres, but mainteine peace:
+not with force, but with peaceable behauour and maners. The father and the
+mother folowe not the child to the bewrialle. Thei builde no toumbes for
+the deade: more like vnto chirches then graues. They bewry not vp their
+asshes in pottes dasshed full of pearle and precious stone. For why they
+estieme in these, neither the honour of the quicke, ne the pleasure of the
+deade: but raither the trouble and paine of bothe. Pestilence or other
+diseases (as I haue sayd) the Abrahmanes are not annoyed with, for they
+enfecte not the ayer with any filthe doinges. But nature alwaye with them,
+keapeth accorde with the season: and euery elemente his tourne with oute
+stoppe or barre. Their Phisicque is abstinence, which is able not only to
+cure the maladie already crepte in: but also to holde oute suche as
+otherwise mighte entre. Thei couette no sightes, nor shewes of misrule: no
+disguisinges nor entreludes. But when thei be disposed to haue the pleasure
+of the stage, thei entre into the regestre of their stories, and what thei
+finde theremoste fit to belaughed at, that do thei lamente and bewaile.
+They delight not as many do, to heare olde wiues tales, and fantasies of
+Robin Hoode: but in studious consideracion of the wondreful workemanship of
+the worlde, and the disposinge of thinges in suche ordre of course and
+degree. Thei crosse no sease for merchaundise, ne learne no colours of
+Rethoricque. Thei haue one kinde of plaine eloquence commune to them all:
+tongue, and harte agreinge in truthe. Thei haue neither moote halles, ne
+vniuersities, whose disagreable doctrine more leaning to apisshe arte, then
+natural reason and experience, neuer bringeth anye staye, or certeinte of
+thinges. One part of this people iudgeth mannes perfeteste blessednes to
+stande in honestie. And a nother in pleasure. Not in the tickelinges of the
+taile, or pamperinges of the bealy, more bittre then pleasaunte as thou
+maye vse them: but to lacke nothing that perfecte nature desireth, ne
+nothing to do that perfecte nature misliketh. Thei thincke it no honour to
+God, to slea for him an innocente beaste; yea thei say he accepteth not the
+sacrifice of men polluted with bloode, but rather loueth a worship voide of
+all bloodsheade. That is to saye, the humble entreatie of woorde, because
+that proprety only (to be entreated with woordes) is commune to God and to
+manne. With this therefore saye they he is pleased, because we somewhat
+resemble him self therin. And this was the life of the vnchristened
+Brahmanes, wher with we Christianes are so farre out of loue, that we are
+afraid leaste any man should beleue it to be true.
+
+The Yndians called Catheis, haue eche man many wiues. And assone as any one
+husbands fortuneth to die, his whole number of wiues assemble before the
+chiefest iudges of the citie, and there eche for her self, sheweth and
+alledgeth her welle deseruinges towarde her housebande: how derely she
+loued him, howe muche she tendered and honoured him. And she that is by
+them iudged to haue borne her self beste in that behaulfe, and to haue bene
+dierest to her husbonde: she in the beste maner and moste gorgeous that she
+can deuise, triumphing and reioysinge, getteth her vp vpon the funeralle
+pyle wher her housebandes corps lieth ready to be brente, and ther kissinge
+and embrasinge the deade body, is burned together with her housebande. So
+gladde is she to haue the victorie, in the contencion of wiuely chastitie,
+and honeste behauiour toward her husbande. And the other that lyue, thincke
+them selues dishonoured: and escape not without spotte of reproche as longe
+as they liue. Their children in their infancie, are not nourished vp at the
+libertie and will of the parentes: but certeine there are appointed to
+viewe the children: whiche yf thei spie vntowardnes in the infante,
+deformitie, or lacke of lymmes, commande it to be slayne.
+
+Thei ioyne not mariages for nobilitie of birthe, or aboundaunce of
+substaunce, but for beaultie, and rather vpon regarde of frute, then of
+luste.
+
+Certaine also among the Yndians haue this custome, that yf thei be of suche
+pouertie that thei be not able to marye oute their doughters: euen in the
+floure of her age thei bringe her, or them, furthe into the marcate with
+trompet and dromme, or suche other their noyses of warre: And their, after
+the multitudeis comen together, the maiden first vncouereth her self wholie
+vp to the harde shoulders, on the backe haulfe, to be sene starke naked,
+and aftre that likewise on the bealy. Yf the multitude finde no faulte, but
+allowe her as worthye to please for her bodye, then marieth she to some one
+ther, whome she beste liketh.
+
+Megasthenes writeth that vpon diuerse mounteines in Ynde, are people with
+dogges heades, and longe clawes, cladde in hydes of beastes, speakinge with
+no voyce like vnto manne, but barking onlye, muche like vnto dogges, with
+mouthes roughe like a grater.
+
+Thei that dwelle aboute the heade of Ganges, haue no nede of anye kinde of
+meate: for they liue by the sauour of their frutes. And yf thei fortune to
+iorney, so that they thincke to fayle of the sauour when thei would haue
+it, they cary with theim to smell to, at times as thei fainte. But if it
+fortune those to smelle any horrible stincke, it is as present deathe vnto
+theim, as poyson to vs. It is recorded in writyng, that certaine of those
+were in Alexandres campe.
+
+We rede also that there are in Inde men with one eye and no mo. And certein
+so notably eared that thei hange downe to their hieles with suche a
+largenesse that they may lye in either of them as vpon a pallet: and
+soharde, that thei may rende vp trees with them. Some others also hauing
+but one legge, but vpon the same such a foote, that when the sonne is hote,
+and he lacketh shadowe, lyenge downe vpon his backe, and holdinge vp his
+fote, he largely shadoweth his whole bodie.
+
+It is redde that in Clesia certein women haue but ones childe in all their
+life time: and the children as sone as thei are borne, immediatly to become
+horeheded. Againe, that there is another nacion, much longer lived than we
+are, whiche in their youth are horeheared: and in their age, their heare
+waxeth blacke. They affirme also that there is another sorte of women that
+conceiue at fyue yeres olde, and liue not aboue the age of viii. yeres.
+There are also that lacke neckes, and haue their eyes in their shoulders.
+Ther are also beside these, certeine saluages with dogges heades, and
+shacke heared on their bodies, that make a very terrible charringe with
+their mouthes. But in these and suche like tales of the Indians, and their
+countrie: for that a manne had nede of a redie beliefe that should take
+theim for truthes, one had not niede to bee to large: considerynge
+specially that menne nowe a daies, will skante beleue the reporte of other
+mens writinges, in the thinges that almost lye vndre their noses.
+
+Ther is a place betwixt Gedrosia and the floude Yndus which is called
+Cathainus of the Cathaiens that enhabyte it. This people ware an ofspring
+of the Scithians, muche altered from their naturall condicions, and wonted
+maners, if that that Aritone the Arminiane writeth of them in his storie,
+be true.
+
+Thei passe (saieth he) all other men in quicke smelling. And thei saye of
+them selues, that though all other menne haue two instrumentes of sight,
+yet do none se with both two in dede, but thei: all other men in comparison
+either to haue no sight, or elles as it ware but with one eye. Their
+wittinesse is greate, but their boastinge greater. The whole nacion of them
+is perswaded, that thei muche passe all other men in knowledge, and the
+subtilties of sciences. Thei are all of colour shining, white, small eyed,
+beardelesse by nature. Their lettres are aftre the facion of the Romaine,
+all in squares. Thei are diuersely ledde with fonde supersticions, some
+aftre one sorte, and some aftre another. But thei are all voyde of the true
+knowledge which is in Iesus Christe. Some worship the sonne, some the mone.
+Other, ymages of yoten metalle, manie of them an oxe. And thus to sondry
+suche other monsters, hath this people in sondry wyse diuided it selfe in
+supersticion. Thei haue no maner of written lawes, nor knowe not what we
+meane when we speake of faithfulnesse or trustiness. And wher (as I said
+afore) thei haue in all handi worckes a passing subtiltie of witte, yet in
+the knowledge of heauenly thinges, thei are altogether to learne: that is
+to saie, the are vtterly ignoraunt. A cowardly people and very feareful of
+death. Yet exercise thei a maner of warre, but that thei handle rather by
+witte, and pollicie, then by strength and hardinesse. In their fighte thei
+use a kinde of shaftes, and certaine other weapons of flight, vnknowen to
+other countries.
+
+Their money is a piece of square paper, with their Kynges Image vpon it.
+And because it cannot be durable: ordre is taken, that when it is soiled or
+dusked muche, with passyng from man to man, thei shall bring it to the
+coignyng house, and make exchaunge for newe. All their vtensiles and
+necessaries of house, are of golde, siluer, and other metalles. Oile is so
+deintie emong theim, that the kyng onely vseth it, as it ware for a
+precious ointement Thus haue we treated of the Yndians, and now to their
+borderers, the Scithians.
+
+
+¶ The ix. Chapitre.
+
+¶ Of Scithia and their sterne maners
+
+Scithia (a countrie lieng by North) is said of Herodotus, to take the name
+of Scitha Hercules sonne. Or as Berosus Iudgeth, of an other Scitha, borne
+of our greate granndame Araxe, Noahes wife, that dwelt first in that
+countrie. This people in the beginnyng pente within narowe boundes, so in
+processe by litle and litle, through their valeauntnes and force enlarged
+their limites: that thei became lordes of many countries aboute, and grewe
+into a great gouernaunce and renoume. Thei nestled first vpon the floude
+Araxis so fewe in nombre and so base: that no manne thought theim worthie
+the troublyng or talkyng of. But gettyng vnto them a certain king, hardie,
+of great courage, and notable, experience in the warres: thei enlarged
+their land so, that thei made it stretche on the one parte (whiche is
+altogether Hille, and Mounteigne) vnto Caucasus, and ouer at the plain vnto
+the Occean, and vnto the greate marshe of Meotis, and Tanais the floude.
+From whence the countrie of Scithia now stretcheth all along toward the
+East. And because the mounteigne Imaus, ronnyng along as the countrie
+coasteth, deuides it in the middes into two haulues: the one haulfe is
+called Scithia within Imaus, and the other without (as ye would saie) on
+this side the Mounte, and beyonde. There neuer medled any power with theim,
+that was able to conquers theim: or muche to endamage them. Thei forced
+Darius, the Kyng of the Persians, with greate dishonour to flie their
+countrie. Thei slue Cirus with all his armie. Thei made an ende of
+Alexandre with al his power. The Romaines sente theim threates thei would
+warre with theim, but they proued in fine but wordes. Thei are a people not
+tameable with any toile, bittre warriours, and of great strength of bodie.
+At the first very rawe, and with out any ordinarie trade of life: neither
+knowyng what tillage meant, ne yet hauyng any houses or cotages to dwell
+in. But wandryng vp and doune the wilde fieldes and driuyng their catteile
+afore theim, their wiues and their children ridyng in wagons by them. Thei
+obserued iustice, without constraint of lawe. Thei compted none offence
+more heinous, then thefte. As folke that had nothyng vndre locke nor keye,
+barre, nor bolte: but altogether in the open fielde. Thei nether occupied
+golde ne siluer. Their chief foode was milke and Hony. Against colde and
+other stormes, thei wrapped their bodies in felles, and hides of beastes,
+and Mice skinnes. Thei knewe not what Wollen meante, ne any facion of
+garmente.
+
+This maner of life was in many of the Scithians, but not in all. A greate
+nombre of theim, as thei muche differed in distaunce of place from other,
+so differed thei also from other in maners: and vsed a certeine trade of
+liuyng emong them selues, wherof we aftreward will entreats, when we haue
+saied somewhat more of their facions in generall.
+
+Many of the Scithians delight in manslaughter. And the firste man that he
+taketh, in fight, his bloud drincketh he: and offreth vnto his Kynge the
+heades of all those that he ther sleaeth. For when he hath so done, he is
+admitted to be partaker of the butine what so euer it be, whereof he should
+be otherwise partles. He cutteth of the heade aftre this sorte. Firste,
+with his knife he maketh in it a gashe rounde aboute like a circle, vndre
+the eares: then taketh he it by the heare of the croune, and striketh it
+of. That done, he fleaeth it, and taweth the skinne betwixte his handes,
+vntill it become very souple and soft and kiepeth it for a hande kercher.
+This wille he hange vpon the reine of his horse, and glorieth not a litle
+in it. And he that hath moste of suche handkerchers, is compted the
+valeauntest manne. There are many also that sowe together these skinnes of
+menne, as other doe the skinnes of beastes, and weare theim for their
+clothyng. Some of them flea the right hand of their enemies beyng slaine,
+so that the nailes also remain vpon the fingres, and make couers of theim
+for their quiuers.
+
+Many of them flea the whole bodie, and stretche out the skinne vpon
+certaine stickes fitted for the nones, and so sprede them vpon their Horse.
+Of the Skulles of the heades thus slaine, thei make measures to drincke in:
+coueryng them on the outside with rawe Neates leather, and gilding them on
+the inside, if he be of habilitie. And when any gheste of estimacion
+commeth vnto theim, thei offre them to drincke in asmany as they haue, and
+declare for a greate braggue of their valeauntnesse, that so many they haue
+slaine with their owne hande.
+
+Ones euery yere, all the chief heades of the Scitians, kepe a solempne
+drinckyng. At the whiche the maner is, out of one of these Skulles, as out
+of a wassailing boule, to giue all those the wine that haue slaine an
+enemie. But he that hath done no such notable acte, tasteth not therof, but
+sitteth aparte in a corner with out honour: which is iudged among them a
+greate reproche. But thei that haue achieued many slaughters, thei drancke
+of two Goblettes together, which thei haue for that purpose.
+
+The goddes whom thei worshippe, and doe Sacrifice vnto, are these: Firste
+and chiefly vnto Vesta, then to Iupiter, and the goddesse of the grounde:
+for that thei take her to be Iupiters wife. Nexte vnto Apollo and Venus,
+Mars and Hercules. Yet erecte thei no Chapelle, Altare, nor Image to any of
+these: but onely to Mars: to whom thei offre of euery hundred prisoners
+that thei take, one for a sacrifice. To the other thei offre bothe horses
+and other beastes, but specially horses. Swine thei so little estieme, that
+thei neither offre them to any of their goddes ne vouchesauf to kiepe theim
+in their Countrie. Looke whom the kyng punissheth with death, his children
+he also commaundeth to be slain, as many as be males, but the women are
+pardoned.
+
+With whom the Scithians couenaunt or make League: after this manor thei doe
+it. They fille an earthen panne with wine, and of the parties that shall
+strike the League or couenaunte, thei drawe a quantitie of bloude, whiche
+thei mingle therwith. Then diepe thei into the panne their Curtilasse, then
+shaftes, their axe, and their darte. That done, thei wishe vnto them selues
+many terrible curses and mischiefes, if thei holde not the league or
+couenaunte. And then drincke thei the wine. And not thei onely that strike
+the couenantes, but also those that are moste honourable in their
+compaignie.
+
+The bewriall of their kynges is aftre this maner; where the Kyng dieth,
+those that are of his bloude, rounde his heare, cutte of one of his eares,
+slice his armes rounde aboute, all to begasshe his foreheade and his nose,
+and shoote him through the lifte hande, in thre or fowre places. Then laie
+thei the corps in a Carte, and cary it to the Gerrites, where the
+Sepulchres of all their Kynges are. And thei dwell vpon the floude
+Boristhenes, about the place wher it becometh first saileable. This people
+when thei haue receiued it, trenche out a square plotte in the ground very
+wide and large. And then rippe the bealy of the corps, and bowelle it
+cleane: clensyng it and drieng it from all filthe, and fille it vp with
+Siler Montanum, Frankencense, Smallache siede, and Anise siede, beaten
+together in a Mortre. And when thei haue sowed it vp againe close, thei
+ceare the whole bodie, and conueighe the same in a Carte, to the nexte
+people vndre the gouernaunce of the Scithians, whiche with honour receiue
+it, and conueigh it vnto the nexte of their dominion: and so from one to
+another, vntle it haue passed rounde aboute, to as many peoples as are of
+their dominion, and be comen againe to the place of bewriall emong the
+Gerrites, whether it is accompanied with a certain of all the peoples, to
+whom it hath comen, as thei gathered encreace from place to place. Thei,
+aftre what tyme thei haue laied the corps, cophine and all, vpon a bedde of
+state, amid the square afore mentioned: sticke doune their iauelines and
+speares aboute him, and with stickes laied ouer from one to another, frame
+as it ware a Cielyng, whiche thei couer with a funeralle palle. Then in the
+reste of the voide space, that yet remaines in the Cophine made for the
+nones: thei berwrie one of his dierest lemmans, a waityng manne, a Cooke, a
+Horsekeper, a Lacquie, a Butler, and a Horse. Whiche thei al first
+strangle, and thruste in, together with a portion of all sortes of plate,
+and of euery suche thyng as appertained to his housholde, or body. And when
+the yere comes about, then do thei thus. Thei take of those that ware
+nerest about the Kyng (now there are none aboute the king, but thei be
+Scithians free borne, and suche as his self doth commaunde: for he maie be
+serued with no bought slaue) of those take thei fiuetie and as many of his
+best horses. And when thei haue strangeled bothe the men and the horses,
+they bowell the Horses, stuffe their bealies againe with Chaffe, and sowe
+theim vp close, and sette the menne vppon their backes. Then make thei a
+voulte ouer round about the bordre of the greate square, and so dispose
+these Horse menne enuiron the same, that thei sieme a farre of, a troupe of
+liuyng horsemen gardyng the kyng.
+
+The communes haue also a maner of bewrialle aftre a like sorte. When one of
+theim dieth, his nexte neighbour and kindsfolke laie hym in a Carte, and
+cary hym aboute to euery of his frindes: whiche at the receipte of hym make
+a feaste, as well to the kindsmen, as to all the residewe that accompaignie
+the corps. And when thei haue thus caried hym aboute by the space of
+fowretene daies, he is bewried. All the braine of his heade beyng first
+piked out, and the skulle rinsed with water cleane. Aboute the bodie thei
+sette vp three sparres of woodde slopyng, and restyng one vpon another at
+the toppes. Rounde about these sparres, thei straine cappyng woollen,
+packyng theim as close as thei can. And within betwixt the sparres, as it
+ware in the middest ouer the deade, thei set a traie or shallowe trough,
+where in to thei caste a kinde of stones, that glistereth by fire light.
+
+The menne emong the Scithians do not vse to washe them selues. But the
+women vse to powre water vpon their own bodies, and to rubbe themselues
+against some roughe stone: and then with a piece of a Cipresse, Ceadre, or
+Encence tree, to grate their whole bodie, vntill it be some what bollen or
+swollen. And then enoint thei bothe that and their face, with certeine
+medicines for the nones: whereby thei become the nexte daie of a very good
+smell, and (when the medicine is washed awaie) slicke and smothe.
+
+Their commune othe, and the othe of charge in matiers of controuersie, or
+iudgemente, is by the kynges clothe of estate: by the whiche if a man
+shalbe tried to haue forsworne hymself (as their enchauntours haue a maner
+to trie with salowe roddes whether thei haue or not) by and by without
+respighte, he loseth his heade, and all his goodes, whiche tourne to the
+vse of them that haue proued him periured.
+
+The Massagetes, a people of Scithia in Asie, beyond the sea called Caspium
+mare in appareille and liuyng, muche like to the Scithians, and therefore
+of some so called: vse to fighte bothe on horsebacke and on fote, with
+suche actiuitie and force, that thei are almoste inuincible in bothe. Their
+weapons are bowe and arrowes, Launces and Armynge swordes. Their beltes
+aboute their waste, the ornament of their heades, and their pollerone, are
+garnished with golde. Their Horses are barbed on the brest, with barbes of
+gold. Their reines, bridles, and trappour are all of golde. The heades of
+their Launces are of Brasse, and their Quiuers armed with Brasse. As for
+Siluer and Iron thei occupie none. Eche manne marieth one wife, and yet are
+the wiues of them all, commune one to another, whiche thyng is not vsed
+emong any of the other Scythians. When so euer any man lusteth for the
+compaignie of his woman, he hangeth vp his quiuer vpon the carte wherein
+his wife is caryed by him, and there openly without shame coupleth.
+
+When any one of this people waxeth very aged, his friendes, acquaintance,
+and kindesfolke assembled together, make a bealy Sacrifice of hym: sleayng
+as many shiepe besides, as will serue for the fulnesse of the nombre. And
+when thei haue dressed theim, eate parte and parte like, the one with the
+other. And this kinde of departynge is compted emong theim, of all other
+moste blessed. If any fortune to pine awaie of sickenesse, hym eate thei
+not: but put in a hole, and throwe earthe vpon him. Sory for the losse,
+that he came not to the feaste.
+
+Thei neither sowe nor mowe, but liue by flesshe of suche beastes as thei
+haue, and suche fisshe as Araxe the floude doeth plenteously minister vnto
+them: and with drinckynge of Milke, wherof thei make no spare. Thei knowe
+no goddes but the Sonne: In whose honour thei offre vp Horses in Sacrifice,
+as beyng in swiftenesse moste like vnto the Sonne.
+
+The Seretines are a debonaire people, and suche louers of quietnesse, that
+they shonne to entremedle with any other people. Merchauntes passe their
+outmost floude toward them, but thei maie come no nigher. Along the banques
+there, thei sette oute suche thynges, as thei are disposed to selle. Not
+the Merchauntes, but the indwellers of the Countrie. For thei selle to
+other, and buie of none. And thei sette them in ordre as thei iudge them in
+price. The buyer cometh, and as he iudgeth theim by his eye to be worthe,
+without further trade or feloweshippe betwixte theim, so laieth he doune.
+And if thei receiue it, he departeth with the ware. Emong them is there
+neither whore nor thiefe, nor adulteresse broughte to iudgemente. Neither
+was it euer hearde, that there was a manne slaine emong theim. For the
+feare of their Lawes woorketh more strongly with theim, then the influences
+of the Starres. Thei dwelle as it ware in the beginnyng or entryng of the
+worlde. And for that thei liue aftre a chast sort: thei are neither
+skourged with Blastynges, ne Haile, ne Pestilence, ne suche other euilles.
+No manne toucheth a woman there, aftre she hath conceiued, ne yet in the
+time of her flowres. Thei eate none vncleane beastes, ne knowe what
+Sacrifisyng meaneth. Euery man there is his owne Iudge, acordyng to
+Iustice. Therefore are thei not chastised with suche corrections as happen
+vnto other for synne, but bothe continue long in life, and die without
+grief.
+
+The Tauroschithians (so called for that thei dwell aboute the mounteigne
+Taurus) offre as many as fortune to make Shipwracke vpon their shore: to
+the virgine, whose name ye shall aftre heare. And if it fortune any Greke
+or Grekes, to be driuen thether, him doe thei sacrifice after this maner.
+
+Aftre what tyme thei haue made prayer after their maner, thei strike of his
+heade with an hatchet. And (as some saie) tumble doune the carkesse into
+the Sea, (for this Virgine hath a Chapelle vpon the toppe of a high clieue,
+hangyng ouer the Sea, where this feate is doone) and naile vp the heade
+vpon a Gibet. In this poincte of nailyng vp the heade, all the writers
+agre, but in tomblyng doune the body, not so, for some affirme, that the
+body is bewried. The Virgine Deuille, to whom thei Sacrifice: is saith to
+be Iphigenia Agamemnons doughter. Their enemies as many as thei take, thus
+thei handle. Euery manne cutteth of his prisoners head, and carieth it
+home: and fasteneth it vpon the ende of a long pole, and setteth it vp:
+some vpon their house toppe some vpon their chimneis as high as thei can.
+And no merueile though thei set them so that thei might well see rounde
+about theim: for thei saie: they are the wardens and kepers of al their
+whole house. They liue by spoile, and by warre.
+
+The Agathirsians are menne verie neate and fine, and greate wearers of
+golde in their appareill. Thei occupie their women in commune, so that thei
+seme all of one kindred, and one householde: neuer striuyng nor grudgyng
+one with another, muche like in body vnto the Thracians.
+
+The Neuriens vse the maners of the Sithians. This people the somer before
+that Darius set furthe, ware constrained for the greate multitude of
+Serpentes that ware bredde in their quartres, to chaunge their dwellyng
+place. Thei verily doe belieue, and wille sweare it: that euery yere ones
+for a certaine daies, thei become Woulues, and retourne againe into their
+former shape and state.
+
+The Antropophagites (so called for that thei liue by mannes fleshe) of all
+menne, are the worste condicioned, without lawe, or officer, appareilled
+like the Scithiens: but in language like vnto no bodye but them selues.
+
+The Melanchleni do all weare blacke, as their name dothe signifie. And of
+these also are eaters of mannes fleshe: so manye as folowe the trade of the
+Scithians.
+
+The Budines are a great nacion, and a populous, graye eyed, and redde
+headed al. Their heade citie is Gelone, wherof thei are also called
+Gelonites. Thei kepe euery thirde yere a reuelle in the honour of Bacchus:
+whereat thei make reuelle in dede, yea, reuell route. Thei ware sometime
+Griekes, whiche put of fro their countrie, seatled them selues there. And
+by processe, losing the proprietie of their owne tongue, became in language
+haulfe Grekes, and haulfe Scithians. Yet are the Gelonites bothe in
+language and liuinge, different from the Budines. For the Budines being
+natiue of the place, are brieders of Catteile: The Gelonites, occupienge
+tilthe: liue by corne, and haue their frute yardes. Neyther lyke in colour
+ne countenaunce to the other. All their quartres are verye full, and thicke
+of trees. It hathe also many meres and greate. In and aboute the whiche
+thei take Ottres, and Beauers, and many other beastes: of whose skinnes
+they make them pilches, and Ierkins.
+
+The Lirceis liue by woodmanshippe, and huntinge, and aftre this maner.
+Their countrie beinge also very thicke of trees, thei vse to climbe suche
+as siemeth them beste: and there awaite their game. At the foote of euery
+mannes tree lieth a dogge, and a horse well taughte to couche flatte on the
+bealy, as lowe as can bee. When the beast cometh within daungier, he
+shoteth. And yf he hitte, he streighte commeth downe, taketh his horse
+backe, and foloweth with his hounde.
+
+The Argippians dwell vndre the foote of the highe mountaines. Men whiche
+fro their birthe are balde; bothe the males and the females. Their noses
+tourne vp like a shoinge horne, and their chinnes be great out of measure.
+The sounde of their voice vnlike to all other: ther apparell aftre the
+sorte of the Scithians. Thei haue small regarde to brieding: by the reason
+wherof thei haue smalle store of cattaile. Thei lie vndre trees, whiche in
+the wintre thei couer ouer with a white kinde of felte, and in the somer
+take the same awaye, and lie vndre the open tree. Ther is no manne that
+will harme them for that thei are compted holy halowed: neither haue thei
+anye kinde of armour, or weapon of warre. These men haue the arbitrement of
+their neighbours controuersies rounde aboute. And as thei determine so are
+thei ended. Who so flieth vnto them, is saufe as in sanctuary.
+
+The Issedonnes haue this propertie. When so euer any mannes father ther,
+dieth: all his kinsfolke bringe euery man one beast or other to the house
+of the sonne that kepeth the funeral. Which when they haue killed and
+minsed: they minse also the body of the deade. And bothe the flesshes
+beinge mingled together, thei fall to the banket. Then take thei the dead
+mannes heade, and pike the braine cleane, and all other moistures and
+ragges, and when thei haue guilte it, thei vse it for a representacion of
+the partie departed. Solempnisinge euery yere furthe, the memoriall, with
+newe ceremonies, and mo. This dothe the sonne for the father, and the
+father for the sonne, as the Grekes kepe their birthe daies.
+
+These are also sayde to be verye iuste dealers, and their wiues to be as
+valeaunt and hardie as the husbandes. Suche haue the maners of the
+Scithians bene. But afterwarde being subdued by the Tartares, and wearing
+by processe into their maners and ordinaunces: thei nowe liue all aftre one
+sorte, and vndre one name.
+
+
+¶ The x. Chapiter.
+
+¶ Of Tartarie, and the maners and power of the Tartarians.
+
+Tartaria, otherwyse called Mongal: As Vincentius wryteth, is in that parte
+of the earthe where the Easte and the Northe ioyne together. It had vpon
+the Easte, the londe of the Katheorines and Solangores, on the South, the
+Saracenes: on the Weste the Naymaniens, and on the Northe is enclosed with
+the occean. It hath the name of the floude Tartar that ronneth by it. A
+country very hilly, and full of mountaines. And where it is champein,
+myngled with sande and grauelle. Barreine, except it be in places where it
+is moysted with floodes, which are very fewe. And therfore it is muche
+waaste, and thinly enhabited. Ther is not in it one Citie, ne one village
+beside Cracuris. And wood in the moste parte of the country so skante, that
+the enhabitauntes are faine to make their fyre, and dresse their meate with
+the drie donge of neate and horses. The ayer intemperate and wonderfulle.
+Thondre, and lightening in somer so terrible, that sondry do presently die
+for very feare. Nowe is it broiling hote, and by and by bittre colde, and
+plenty of snowe. Suche stronge windes sometime, that it staieth horse and
+man, and bloweth of the rider: teareth vp trees by the rootes, and doeth
+muche harme. In wintre it neuer raineth ther, and in Somer very often. But
+so slendrely, that the earthe is skante wette with al. And yet is ther
+great store of Cattaile: as Camelles, neate, &c. And horses and mares, in
+suche plentie, as I beleue no parte of the earth hath againe. It was first
+enhabited of foure peoples. Of the Ieccha Mongalles that is to saye, the
+greate Mongalles. The Sumongalles, that is to say the watre Mongalles,
+whiche called them selues Tartares, of the floude Tartar whose neighbours
+thei are.
+
+The thirde people ware called Merchates, and the fourthe Metrites. There
+was no difference betwixte them eyther in body or language, but al aftre
+one sorte and facion. Their behauour was in the beginning very brute, and
+farre oute of ordre, without lawe or discipline, or any good facion. Thei
+liued amonge the Scithians, and kept herdes of cattalle in very base state
+and condition: and ware tributaries to all their neighbours. But within a
+while aftre, thei deuided them selues as it ware into wardes, to euery of
+the which was appointed a capitaine: in whose deuises and consentes
+consisted thordre of the whole. Yet ware thei tributaries to the Naimannes
+(their next neighbours) vntyll Canguista by a certaine prophecie was chosen
+their kynge. He assone as he had receiued the gouernaunce, abolished all
+worshippe of deuilles, and commaunded by commune decree that all the whole
+nacion should honour the highe God euerlasting: by whose prouidence he
+would seme to haue receiued the kingdome. It was further decreed that as
+manye as ware of age to beare armour, should be preste, and ready with the
+king at a certeyne daye. The multitude that serued for their warres, was
+thus distributed. Their capitaines ouer ten (which by a terme borowed of
+the Frenche, we calle Diseners) are at the commaundemente of the
+Centurians. And the Centuriane obeied the Millenarie, that had charge of a
+thousande. And he againe was subiecte to the grande Coronelle that had
+charge ouer ten thousande: aboue the whiche nombre thei mounted no degree
+of captaines.
+
+This done, to proue the obedience of his subiectes, he commaunded seuen
+sonnes of the Princes or Dukes whiche before had gouerned the people: to be
+slaine by the handes of their owne fathers, and mothers. Whiche thinge
+althoughe it ware muche againste their hartes, and an horrible diede, yet
+did thei it. Partely vppon the feare of the residew of the people: and
+partly vpon conscience of their obedience. For why, the people thoughte
+when thei sawe him begyn aftre this sorte: thei had had a god amongest
+them. So that in disobeyinge of his commaundemente, thei thoughte thei
+should not haue disobeied a king but God him selfe.
+
+Canguista takinge stomake with this power, firste subdued those Scithians
+that bordred vpon him, and made them tributaries. And where other afore had
+bene tributaries also vnto them: now receiued he in that one peoples
+righte, tribute of many. Then settinge vpon those that ware further off, he
+had suche prosperous successe that from Scithia to the sonne risinge, and
+fro thence to the middle earthe sea, and beyonde: he broughte all together
+vndre his subiection. So that he moughte nowe worthely wryte him selfe
+highe Gouernour, and Emperour of the Easte.
+
+The Tartares are very deformed, litle of bodie for the moste parte, hauyng
+great stiepe eyes: and yet so heary on the eye liddes, that there sheweth
+but litle in open sight. Platter faced and beardlesse, sauyng vpon the
+vpper lippe, and a litle about the poincte of the chinne thei haue a feawe
+heares as it were pricked in with Bodkins. Thei be communely all slendre in
+the waste. Thei shaue the hindre haulfe of the heade, rounde aboute by the
+croune, from one eare to another: compassyng towarde the nape of the necke
+after suche a facion, that the polle behind sheweth muche like the face of
+a bearded manne. On the other parte, thei suffre their heare to growe at
+lengthe like our women: whiche thei deuide into two tresses, or braudes,
+and bryng aboute to fasten behinde their eares. And this maner of shauyng,
+do thei vse also that dwelle among theim, of what nacion so euer thei be.
+Thei theim selues are very light and nimble: good on Horse, but naughte on
+foote. All from the moste to the leaste, as well the women as the menne:
+doe ride either vpon Geldynges, or Kien, where so euer thei become. For
+stoned Horses thei occupie none, ne yet Gelding that is a striker, and
+lighte of his heles. Their bridelles are trimmed with muche gold, siluer,
+and precious stones. And it is compted a ioly thyng among theim: to haue a
+great sort of siluer sounded belles, gynglyng aboute their horse neckes.
+Their speache is very chourlishe and loude. Their singyng is like the
+bawlynge of Woulues. When thei drinke, thei shake the heade: and drincke
+thei do very often euen vnto dronckennesse, wherein thei glorie muche.
+Their dwellyng is neither in tounes ne Bouroughes. But in the fieldes
+abrode, aftre the maner of thauncient Scithians in tentes. And the
+ratherso, for that thei are all moste generally catteill mastres. In the
+wintre time thei are wont to drawe to the plaines, and in the Somer season,
+to the mounteignes and hillie places for the better pasture. Thei make
+theim Tentes, or elles rounde cotages of wickres, or of Felte vndersette
+with smothe poles. In the middes thei make a round windowe that giueth them
+lighte, and letteth out the smoke. In the middes of the Tent, is their
+fire, aboute the whiche their wife and their children doe sitte. The menne
+delight muche in dartyng, shootyng, and wrastelyng. Thei are merueilous
+good hunters, to the whiche thei go armed at all pieces. And assone as thei
+espie the beaste, thei come costing together rounde aboute and enclose her.
+And when euery manne hath throwen his darte, or shotte his arrowe: whilest
+the beast is troubled and amased with the stripes, thei steppe in to her
+and slea her. Thei neither vse breade ne bakyng: table clothe ne napkin.
+
+Thei belieue that there is one GOD that made all thynges, bodily and
+ghostly, sene or vnsene, and hym thei honour: but not with any maner of
+Sacrifice or ceremonie. Thei make theim selues litle pupettes of silke or
+of felte, or of thrumme, like unto menne: whiche thei sette vp vpon eche
+side of their Tentes, and do them muche reuerence, beseching them to take
+hede to their catteille. To these thei offre the first milke of all their
+milche catteill, of what kinde so euer thei be. And before thei begin
+either to eate or drinke aught, thei sette a porcion thereof before theim.
+Looke what beaste thei kille to be eaten, thei reserue the harte all nighte
+in some couered cuppe, and the nexte mornynge seath it and eate it.
+
+Thei worshippe also and Sacrifice to the Sonne, Moone, and elementes fowre.
+To Cham also their Lorde and Kyng, thei do very deuoute honour and
+Sacrifice: supposyng him to be the sonne of God, and to haue no piere in
+the whole worlde: neither can they abide to heare any other manne name hym.
+
+This people so despiseth al other men, and thincke theim selues so farre to
+surmount them in wisedome and goodnes: that thei abhorre to speake to
+theim, or to compaignie with theim. Thei calle the Pope and all Christen
+menne, Doggues and Idolatres: because thei honour stones and blocques. And
+thei theim selues (beyng giuen to deuelishe supersticions) are markers of
+dreames, and haue dreame readers emong theim: as well to enterpreate their
+sweuens, [Footnote: From the Saxon, meaning a dream. See Bailey's _Dict._,
+London, 1737.] as to aske knoweledge of Idolles. In whom thei are perswaded
+that God speaketh: and therefore acordyng to their answeres, frame them
+selues to do. Thei marke many seasons, and specially haue regarde to the
+chaunges of the Moone. Yet make thei for no season, ne chaunge, any
+singular holidaie or obseruance: but ilike for them all indifferently. Thei
+are of so gredie a coueitousenesse, and desire, that if any of them se
+aughte, that he coueiteth to haue, and cannot obtein with the good wille of
+the owner: if it apperteigne to no Tartarre, he will haue it by force. And
+thei thincke (through a certein ordenaunce that their Kyng made) thei
+offende not therein. For suche a commaundemente had thei of Canguista, and
+Cham, their firste Kynges: That if it fortune any Tartarre, or Tartarres
+seruaunt, to finde in his waie, horse, man, or woman, without the kinges
+lettres or his saulfconduite: he should take it, him, her, or them as his
+owne for euer.
+
+To suche as lacke money thei lende, but for shamefull gaines: that is to
+saie, two shillynges of the pounde for euery Monethe. And if it fortune ye
+to faile to make paiemente at the dale: ye shall also be forced to paie the
+enterest, acording to the rate of the Vsurie. That is to saie, of euery
+tenth penie, one.
+
+Thei do so polle and oppresse their tributaries, with subsidies, taxes and
+tallages, as neuer did people but thei, that euer manne redde of. It is
+beyonde belief to saie. Thei euer coueite, and as Lordes of all, do rape,
+and rende from other, and neuer recompence aught. No, the begger that
+liueth on almose, getteth not an aguelette of hym. Yet haue thei this one
+praise worthie propretie, that if he fortune to finde them at meate: thei
+neither shutte the doore against hym, ne thruste him out, if he be disposed
+to eate, but charitably bidde them, and parte with them suche as thei haue.
+But thei fiede the vnclenliest in the worlde, as I haue saied, without
+tableclothe, napkinne, or towell to couer the borde, or to wipe at meate,
+or aftre. For thei neither washe hande, face, ne body, ne any garmente that
+thei weare. Thei nether eate bread, nor make bread, nor sallottes nor
+potage, nor any kinde of Pultz. But no maner of flesshe cometh to them
+amisse. Dogges, Cattes, Horses and rattes. Yea, sometime to shewe their
+crueltie, and to satisfie their vengeaunce, the bodies of suche their
+enemies, as thei haue taken, thei vse to roste by a greate fire: and when
+thei bee asembled a good nombre together, thei teare theim of the spittes
+like Wolues, with their tiethe, and deuoure them. And aftreward drincke vp
+the bloude, whiche thei reserue afore hande for the nones. Otherwise thei
+vse to drincke Milke. Thei haue no wine of the countrie it self, but suche
+as is brought into them thei drincke very gredilie. Thei vse to Lowse one
+anothers heade, and euer as thei take a Lowce to eate her, saieng: thus
+wille I doe to our enemies. It is compted a greate offence emong them to
+suffre drincke, or a piece of meate to be loste. Thei neuer therfore giue
+the bone to the Dogge, till they haue eaten out the marrowe. Thei neuer
+eate beaste (suche vile niggardes thei are) as long as the same is sounde
+and in good likyng: but when it fortuneth to be hurte, sicke, or febled by
+age, then bewrie they it in their bealies. Thei are greate sparers, and
+contente with smalle chaunge, and litle foode. Thei drincke in the mornyng,
+a goblet full of Milke or twaine, whiche serueth theim sometyme for their
+whole daies foode.
+
+The menne and the women moste communely are appareilled ylike. The men
+weare vpon their heades shallowe copin tackes, comming but behinde with a
+taile of a handefull and a haulfe long, and as muche in breadth: whiche
+thei fasten vnder their chinnes, for falling or blowing of, with a couple
+of strynges of ribbande lace, as we doe our nighte cappes. Their married
+women wear on their heades, fine wickre Basquettes of a foote and a haulf
+long: rounde, and flatte on the toppe like a barrelle. Whiche are either
+garnished with chaungeable silkes, or the gaiest parte of the Pecockes
+feathers, and sette with golde and stones of sondrie sortes. Asfor the
+residue of their bodie, thei wear acording to their abilitie, bothe men and
+women, Skarlet or Veluet, or other silkes. Thei weare coates of a straunge
+facion, open on the left side, whiche thei put on acordingly, and fasten
+with fowre or five Buttons. Their Somer wiedes are all communely blacke:
+and those that thei weare in Winter and foule weather, white: and neuer
+lower then the knee. Wearing furres (wherein thei muche delight) thei weare
+not the furre inwarde, as we communely doe: but contrariwise the heare
+outwarde, that thei maie enioie the pleasure of the shewe.
+
+It is harde to discerne by the appareile the maide, fro the wife, or the
+woman fro the manne: so like araied do the menne and the women go. Thei
+weare brieches, the one and the other. When they shal go to the skirmishe,
+or to battaille, some couer their armes (whiche at all other tymes are
+naked) with plates of iron, buckeled together alonge, in many pieces, that
+thei may the easelier sturre their armes. Some doe thesame with many foldes
+of Leather: wherwith thei also arme their head. Thei cannot handle a
+target: nor but fewe of theim a launce or a long sweard. Thei haue
+curtilasses of iii. quarters longe: not double edged but backed. Thei
+fighte all with a quarter blowe, and neither right downe, ne foyning. Thei
+be very redy on horsebacke, and very skilful archers. He is counted moste
+valeaunte, that best obserueth the commaundement and the obedience dewe to
+his capitaine. Thei haue no wages for their souldie, yet are they prest and
+ready in all affaires, and all commaundementes. In battayle, and otherwise
+wher oughte is to be done, very politike and experte. The princes and
+capitaines entre not the battle, but standyng aloofe, crye vnto their men,
+and harten them on: lookinge diligently aboute on euery side what is
+nedefull to be done. Sometime to make the armye sieme the greater, and the
+more terrible to the ennemy: thei set vpon horsebacke their wiues and their
+children, yea and men made of cloutes. It is no vilany amonge them to flye:
+if any thinge maye eyther be saued or wonne by it. When thei will shoote,
+thei vnarme their righte arme, and then let thei flye with suche violence,
+that it pearceth all kinde of armour. Thei giue the onset flockinge in
+plumpes, and likewise in plompes they flie. And in the flighte thei so
+shoote backe warde behinde them, that thei slea many of their ennemies
+pursuinge the chase. And when thei perceiue their ennemies dispersed by
+pursuinge the chase, or not to fighte any thing wholie together: soudeinly
+retourninge, the beginne a newe onset with a hayle of shotte, neither
+sparing horse ne man. So that oftetimes thei ouercome when thei are
+thoughte to be vanquisshed. When thei come to enuade any quartre or
+countrie, thei deuide their armie, and sette vpon it on euery parte: so
+that the inhabitours can neither haue laisure to assemble and resiste, ne
+waye to escape. Thus are thei alway sure of the victory, whiche thei knytte
+vp with moste proude crueltie. Neither sparinge manne woman ne childe, olde
+ne younge sauing the artificer onely, whom thei reserue for their own vses.
+And this slaughter make thei aftre this maner. When they haue all taken
+them, thei distribute them to their Centurians: who committe them againe to
+the slaues: to euery one fewer or more acordinge to the multitude. And when
+the slaues haue all slayne them as bouchers kylle hogges: then for a
+terrour to al other ther about: of euery thousande of the dead thei take
+one, and hange him vp by the hieles vpon a stake, amydde these deade
+bodies: and so ordre his heade as though it appiered by his facion or maner
+of hanginge, that he yet bothe harkened the complainte of his felowes, and
+lessened them againe. Many of the Tartarres when the bodies lie freshe
+bliedinge on the grounde, laye them downe alonge, and sucke of the bloud a
+full gloute.
+
+Thei kepe faithe to no manne, howe depely so euer thei binde them selues
+thervnto. Thei deale yet wourse with those that thei ouer come with force.
+The maidens and younge women thei deflowre, and defile as thei come to
+hande, neither do thei iudge it any dishonestie. The beautifuller sorte
+thei lead away with them: and in extreame misery, constraine them to be
+their slaues all their lyfe longe. Of all other thei are moste vnbrideled
+in leachery. For althoughe they marye as many wiues as they luste, and are
+able to kepe: no degre prohibited, but mother, doughter, and sister: yet
+are thei as rancke bouguers with mankinde, and with beastes, as the
+Saracenes are, and no punishmente for it amonge them. The woman that thei
+marie, thei neuer take as wife, ne receiue any dowrie with her, vntill she
+haue borne a childe. So that if she be barren he maye caste her vp, and
+mary another.
+
+This is a notable meruaile, that though amonge theim manye women haue but
+one manne: yet thei neuer lightely falle out, ne brawle one with another
+for him. And yet are the menne parcialle in theyr loue: shewing muche more
+fauour to one then another, and goynge fro the bedde of the one, streighte
+to the bedde of an other. The women haue their seuerall tentes and
+householdes: And yet liue verye chastely, and true to their housebandes.
+For bothe the manne and the women taken in adultery, suffre death by the
+lawe.
+
+Those that are not occupied for the warres, driue the catteile a fielde,
+and there kepe them. Thei hunte, and exercise themselues in wrastlinge,
+other thing doe thei not. The care of prouision for meate and drincke,
+appareille and householde, they betake to the women. This people hath many
+superstitious toyes. It is a heinous matter with them, to touche the fier,
+or take fleshe out of a potte with a knife. Thei hewe or choppe no maner of
+thing by the fire, leasse by any maner of meanes, thei might fortune to
+hurte the thing which alway they haue in reuerence, and iudge to be the
+clenser, and purifier of al thinges. To laye them downe to reste vppon the
+whippe that thei stirre theyr horse with (for spurres thei vse none) or to
+touche their shaftes therewith, in no wise thei wylle not. Thei neither
+kille younge birdes, ne take them in the neste or other waies. Thei beate
+not the horse with the bridle. Thei breake not one bone with another. Thei
+are ware, not to spill any spone meate, or drincke, specially milke. No
+manne pisseth within the compasse of their soiourning place. And if any one
+of self willed stubbornesse should do it, he ware sure withoute all mercy
+to die for it. But if necessitie constraine them to do it (as it often
+happeneth) then the tente of hym that did it, with all that is in it, muste
+be clensed and purified after this maner. They make two fires, thre strides
+one from another. And by eche fire thei pitche downe a Iaueline. Vpon them
+is tied a lyne stretching fro the one to the other, and couered ouer with
+buckerame. Betwene these ii. Iauelins, as throughe a gate, muste all
+thinges passe that are to be purified. Two women (to whome this office
+belongeth) stande, on either side one, sprinckelinge on watre, and
+mumblinge certaine verses. No straungier, of what dignitie so euer he be,
+or of howe greate importance so euer the cause of his comming be: is
+admitted to the kinges sighte before he be purified. He that treadeth vppon
+the thressholde of the tente wherein their kinge, or anye of his
+chiefteines lyeth, dieth for it in the place. If any manne bite a gobet,
+greater than he is able to swallowe, so that he be constrained to put it
+out of his mouth againe: thei by and by make a hole vndre the tent, and
+ther drawe him out, and cruelly slea him. Many other thinges ther are which
+thei compte for faultes beyonde all forgiuenesse. But to slea a man, to
+enuade a nother mannes country, contrary to all righte and reason, to
+bereue them of their goodes and possessions, to breake the preceptes of
+God, thei estieme as nothinge. Thei haue a beliefe that aftre this life
+thei shal liue for euer in another worlde (but what maner of worlde thei
+cannot telle) and ther receiue rewarde for their well doinges. When any of
+them falleth sicke, and lieth at the pointe of deathe, thei sticke vp a
+Iaueline with a piece of blacke clothe at the dore of the tente wher he
+lieth, that none come in as they passe by. For no manne when he seeth this,
+dare entre thether vncalled.
+
+Aftre what time the sicke is dead, his whole house gather together, and
+priuely conueighe the corps into some place withoute the tente, chosen for
+the purpose. Ther cut they out a trenche, broade and diepe enoughe to sette
+vp another lytle tent in: so that the toppe of the tent maye be well within
+the grounde. In that thei prepare a table with a banket: at the whiche thei
+sette the deade bodye in his beste appareille. And so together, as it ware
+with one hande, couer all with earth againe. Thei bewry with him also some
+beaste of bourden, and a horse ready sadled and appointed to ride. The
+gentlemen by their life time, appointe out a slaue (whome thei marke with
+their brande) to be specially bewried with him when he dieth. And this do
+thei vpon perswasion of a life in a nother worlde, wher thei woulde be loth
+to lacke these necessaries. Then doe the deades friendes take another
+horse, and slea him. And when they haue eaten the fleshe, thei stuffe the
+hide full of haye, and sowe it againe together and sette it vp ouer the
+graue vpon foure poles, in remembraunce of the deade. The bones do the two
+ordenarie women burne, for the clensinge and purifienge of the soule. But
+the gentlemen, and thei of higher degree, handle the hide aftre another
+maner. Thei cut it out into very fine thonges, to asmuche lengthe as thei
+can, and measure oute asmuche grounde about the Sepulchre as the thonge
+wille stretche vnto. For so muche ground thincke thei shall the deade haue
+in another worlde. At the thirtieth daye thei ende their mourning.
+
+Certaine of the Tartarres, professing the name of Christe, yet farre from
+his righteousnes: when their parentes waxe aged, to haste their death,
+crame them with gobins of fatte. When thei die thei burne them to pouldre,
+whiche thei reserue as a precious Iewelle, to strawe vppon their meate
+euery daie. But to declare with what solempnitie and ioifulnes thei sette
+vp their newe Kynge, aftre the death of tholde: because it ware to longe a
+thyng, bothe for the reader and writer to set out at length, I will shewe
+you in brief theffecte.
+
+Abrode in the fieldes, in a faire plaine ordenary for the purpose: all the
+Dukes, Erles, Barons, Lordes, and the reste of the nobilitie, together with
+the people of the whole kyngdome, do assemble. Then take thei hym, to whom
+the croune is due, either by succession, or by election. And when thei haue
+set hym vp in a throne of Golde: thei all fall doune on their knees, and
+together with one voice crie out a loude, aftre this maner. We require the,
+yea, we will and commaunde the, to take the rule and gouernaunce of vs. He
+answereth, if ye will haue me doe so, then must ye of necessitie be redy to
+do whatsoeuer I commaunde ye. To come when I calle ye, to go whether so
+euer I sende ye, to slea whom so euer I commaunde ye, without staieng or
+stackering. And to put the whole kingdome and rule in my handes, when thei
+haue aunswered, we are content: Saieth he againe, from hencefurthe then the
+speache of my mouth, shalbe my swearde. To this the people yealde with
+greate shoutes, and reioisynges. In the meane while the princes and the
+nobles, taking the king out of his throne, spread abrode on the grounde a
+piece of felte: vpon the whiche, thei cause hym in simple sorte to sitte
+doune, and thus saie to hym. Looke vp, and remembre GOD aboue the. And now
+looke doune also, and behold this felt vndre the. If thou gouerne welle,
+thou shalte haue all euen as thou wouldest wisshe it. But if contrary wise,
+thou shalt so be broughte doune againe, and so nighe be bereued of all:
+that thou shalte not haue so muche, as this poore felte left the, whervpon
+thou sittest. This ones saied, thei sette in to hym, of all his wiues the
+dierest derlyng. And liftyng vp the felte alofte, haile hym by the name of
+Emperour, and her by the name of Empresse. Then, come there presentes
+streight from al countries, and peoples of his dominion: and all the
+Threasoures that the kyng, his predecessour lefte, are brought him. Of the
+whiche he giueth giftes to al the princes and high estates: commaundyng the
+reste to be kepte for himself, and so dissolueth the Parlament as it ware.
+
+In his hande and power is then altogether, no manne can: or though he can,
+he dare not saie this is myne, or this is his. No man maie dwelle in any
+part of the lande, but in that wherevnto he is appoincted. The Emperour
+hymself appoincteth the Dukes: the Dukes, the Millenaries: the Millenaries,
+the Centurianes: and they the Disniers: and the Disniers the residewe. The
+seale that he vseth hath this superscription. GOD in heauen, and Chutchuth
+Cham in earth, the force of God, and Emperour of all menne. He hath fiue
+armies of greate multitude and force: and fiue chiefteines, by whom he
+subdueth all that stande against hym. He hymself neuer speaketh to any
+foreine ambassadours, nor admitteth them to his presence, as is aboue
+saied: excepte bothe thei and their giftes (without the whiche specially
+thei maie not come) bee purified by the ordenarie women. The Kyng
+aunswereth by another mannes mouthe. And the persone by whome he
+aunswereth, be he neuer so honourable, for the tyme that he becommeth the
+kynges mouthe, kneleth on his knees and giueth so diligent care, that he
+swarueth not from the Kyng in one woorde. For it is not lawefull for any
+manne, to chaunge the kynges woordes: ne for any man in any wise, to replie
+against suche sentence as he giueth. He neuer drincketh in open presence,
+but some body first sing to hym, or plaie vpon some instrumente of
+Musicque.
+
+The gentlemen and menne of honour when thei ride, haue a phannell borne
+afore them, on a Iauelines ende, to kiepe awaie the Sonne. And as it is
+saied, the women likewise. These ware the maners and facions of the
+Tartarres, for a two hundred yeres paste.
+
+The Georgians, whom the Tartarres aboute the same tyme did subdue: ware
+Christians, aftre the fourme of the Greke Churche. Thei ware neighbours to
+the Persians. Their dominions stretched out a great length, from Palestine
+in Iewrie to the mounteignes called Caspij. Thei had eightene Bishopries:
+and one Catholicque: that is to saie, one generall bishoppe, whiche was to
+them, as our Metropolitane to vs. At the firste thei ware subiecte to the
+Patriarche of Antioche. Menne of greate courage and hardinesse. Thei all
+shaued their crounes: the Laietie square, the Clercques rounde. Their women
+(certeine of theim) had the ordre of Knighthode, and ware trained to the
+warres. The Georgianes when thei ware sette, ordered, and raunged in the
+fielde, and ware at poinct to ioyne the batteill: vsed to drincke of a
+gourdfull of strong wine, aboute the bigguenes of a mannes fiste. And to
+sette vpon their ennemies: muche amended in courage.
+
+Their Clercques, whiche we calle the Spiritualtie, mighte vse bothe Simonie
+and vsurie at their wille. There was continuall hatred betwixte Tharmenians
+and them. For the Armenians ware also Christians, before the Tartarres had
+subdued the Georgianes and them. But thei differed in many thinges, from
+the belief and facions of the true Churche. Thei knewe no Christemas daie,
+no vigilles, nor the fowre quartre festes, whiche we call Embryng dales.
+Thei fasted not on Easter euen, because (saie thei), that Christ rose that
+daie aboute euen tide. Vpon euerie Saturdaie, betwixte Easter and
+Whitsontide, thei did eate flesshe. Thei ware greate fasters, and beganne
+their Lente thre wekes afore vs: and so streightly fasted it, that vpon the
+Wednesdaie and Fridaie, thei neither eate any kinde of fisshe, ne aughte
+wherin was wine, or oile. Belieuing that he that drancke wine on those twoo
+daies: synned more then if he had bene at the stewes with a whore. On the
+Monedaie thei absteined from all maner of meate. On Tewsdaie and Thursdaie,
+thei did eate but one meale. Wedensdaie and Fridaie, nothyng at al.
+Saturdaie and Sondaie, thei eate flesshe and made lustie chiere. Throughe
+their whole Lente, no manne said Masse but on Saturdaies and Sondaies. Nor
+yet on the Fridaies throughout the whole yere: for thei thought then, that
+thei brake their fast. Thei admitted to the houseale, aswell children of
+two monethes olde, as all other indifferently. When thei went to Masse,
+thei vsed to put no watre in the wine. Thei absteined from Hares flesshe,
+Beaws flesshe, Crowes, and suche other as the Grekes did, and Iewes do.
+Their Chalices ware of Glasse, and of Tree. Some said Masse without either
+albe or vestement, or any maner suche ornament. Some onely with
+thornamentes of Deacon or Subdeacon. Thei ware all busie vsurers, and
+Simonites: bothe spirituall and Temporall, as the Georgianes ware. Their
+priestes studied Sothesaieng and Nigromancie. Their Spiritualtie vsed
+Iunckettyng oftener then the Laietie.
+
+Thei maried, but aftre the death of the wife, it was not lawefull for the
+housebande to marie againe, nor for the wife, aftre the death of the
+housebande. If the wife ware a whore, the Bisshoppe gaue hym leaue to put
+her awaie, and marie another. As for the fire of Purgatorie thei knewe
+nothing of it. Thei denied also verie stifly, that there ware two natures
+in Christe. The Georgianes saied that thei swarued from the truthe of
+Christes Religion, in thirtie poinctes or articles.
+
+
+¶ The xi. Chapitre.
+
+¶ Of Turcquie, and of the maners, Lawes, and Ordenaunces of the Turcques.
+
+The lande, whiche now is called Turcquie: hath on Theaste Armenia the more,
+and ronneth endelong to the Sea of the Cilicians: hauyng on the Northe, the
+Sea named Euxinus. There are in it many countries conteined. As Lichaonia,
+whose heade citie is Iconium. Cappadocia with her heade citie, named
+Cesarea. Isauria, whiche hath for the chief citie Seleucia. Licia, whiche
+now is called Briquia. Ionia: now called Quisquoun, in the whiche standeth
+Ephesus. Paphlagonia, and in it Germanopolis. And Leuech: that hath for the
+heade Citie Trapezus. All this countrie that now is called Turcquie, is not
+enhabited by one seuerall nacion, but there be in it Turcques, Grekes,
+Armenians, Saracenes, Iacobites, Nestorians, Iewes and Christians. Whiche
+liue for the moste parte, acording to the Tradicions and Ordenaunces, that
+Mahomet the counterfeict Prophete, gaue vnto the Saracenes (a people of
+Arabie) the yere of our Lorde and Sauiour Iesus Christe. vi. hundred and.
+xxix. A manne whome I can not telle whether I maye calle an Arabiane or a
+Persian. For ther be aucthorities of writers on either behaulfe. His father
+was an idolastre aftre the maner of the heathen. His mother an Ismalite
+leaning to the lawe of the Iewes. And whilest in his childehode, his mother
+taught him aftre one sorte, and his father aftre another: thei printed in
+hym suche a doubtfull belief, that when he came to age he cleaued to
+neither. But as a manne of subtyle and guilefull witte, aftre what time he
+had bene longe conuersaunte amongest menne of the Christian religion: he
+draue a drifte, deuised out of both lawes (the olde and the newe) how he
+mighte notably enfecte the worlde.
+
+He said the Iewes did wickedly to denie Christe to be borne of the virgine
+Mary, seinge the prophetes (men of great holinesse, and enspired with the
+holy ghost) had foreshewed the same, and warned men of many yeres passed to
+looke for him. Contrariwyse he said to the Christians thei ware very fonde
+to beleue that Iesus, so dierly beloued of God, and borne of a virgine,
+would suffre those vilanies and tormentes of the Iewes.
+
+Martinus Segonius Nouomontanus, in his booke of the Sepulchre of Christe
+our king, writeth that the Turkes, and Saracenes by an auncient opinion
+receiued from Machomet: do laughe Christian menne to skorne, that seke
+thether with so greate reuerence. Sayeng that Christ the prophet of all
+prophetes endewed with the spirite of God, and voyde of all earthly
+corruption: had there no sepulchre in very diede, for that he being a
+spirituall body conceiued by the breathe of the holy ghost coulde not
+suffre, but should come againe to be iudge of the Gentiles: This saieth
+Segonius, and many other thinges sounding to like effecte: whiche the
+Mahometeines are wonte to throwe out against the Christians, bothe
+foolisshely and wickedly. When this counterfeicte prophet had saused his
+secte with these wicked opinions: he gaue them his lawe, and sorte of
+religion. Against the whiche lesse any man of righte iudgemente should
+aftrewarde write or dispute (as against a pestilent and filthie perswasion)
+he wrote a lawe in his Alcorane that it shoulde be deathe to as many as
+should reason or dispute vppon it. Wherby he euidentlie declared, that ther
+was nothing godly or goodly therin. For why shoulde he elles haue so raked
+it vp in the ashes, and forbidden it to be examined: so that the people
+coulde neuer come to knowledge what maner of thinge it is that thei beleue
+in. In the giuing of his lawe, he vsed muche the counselle and helpe of the
+moncke Sergius: of the wicked secte of the Nestorianes. And to the ende it
+might please the more vniuersally: he patched it vp together with peces of
+all maner of sectes. He thoughte it good to sette out Christe with the
+beste, affirminge that he was a manne excelling in all holinesse and
+vertue. Yea he extolled him to a more heigth then was appliable to the
+nature of man, calling him the woorde, the spirite, the soule of GOD, borne
+out of a virgines wombe, whome he also with many wondrefull praises
+magnified. He confirmed with his consente, the miracles, and story of the
+gospel, as farre as it varieth not from his Alcorane.
+
+The Godspelles said he ware corrupte by the disciples of the Apostles. And
+ther fore it behoued his Alcorane to be made, for to correcte and amende
+them. Thus fauning into fauour with the Christians, he would haue bene
+christened of Sergius. Then to procure, and moue other also to fauour his
+procedinges: he denied with the Sabellians the Trinitie. With the Manicheis
+he made two goddes. With Eunomius, he denied that the father and the sonne
+ware equal. With Macedonius he said that the holy ghoste was a creature, or
+substaunce created. With the Nicholaites He allowed the hauinge of many
+wiues at ones. He allowed also the olde testament. Althoughe sayd he, it
+were in certain places faultie. And these fondenesses did he beswiete with
+a wondrefull lure of the thinges that menne in this lyfe mooste desire.
+Lettinge louse to as many as helde of him, the bridle of al lechery and
+luste. And for that cause doth this contagious euil sprede it self so wide
+into innumerable contries. So that if a man at this day compare the nombre
+of them that are by him seduced, with the other that remaine in the
+doctrine of faithe: he shal easeli perceiue the great oddes, ware it but
+herin. That wher Europe alone, (and not al that by a great deale) standeth
+in the belief of Christe: almoste all Asie, and Aphrique, yea and a greate
+pece of Europe standeth in the Turkisshe belief of Mahomete.
+
+The Saracenes that firste receiued the brainesicke wickednesse of this
+countrefeicte prophete, dwelte in that parte of Arabia, that is called
+Petrea: wher it entrecommuneth with Iewry on the one side, and with Egipt
+on the other. So named of Serracum, a place nere vnto the Nabatheis, or
+rather as thei woulde haue it them selues, of Sara, Abrahams wife.
+
+Wherupon thei yet sticke faste in this opinion, that thei onely of al men
+are the lawfull heires of Goddes beheste. Thei gaue themselues to tilthe,
+to cattle, and to the warres. But the greater parte to the warres. And
+therefore at what time they ware hired of Heraclius in the warres againste
+the Persians: when he had gotten the victory, and thei perceiued them
+selues to be defrauded by him: kindled with the angre of the villanye thei
+had done vnto them, by the counsell and persuasion of Mahomet (who tooke
+vppon him to be their captaine) thei forsoke Heraclius. And going into
+Siria, enuaded Damasco. Wher when thei had encreased them selues bothe in
+nombre, and purueiaunce necessary for them, thei entred into Egipte. And
+subdued firste that: then Persis, then Antioche, and then Ierusalem. Thus
+their power and fame daily so encreaced, and grewe: that men muche feared,
+that any thing afterwarde shoulde be able to resiste them. In the meane
+season, the Turkes: a ferce and a cruell people, of the nacion of the
+Scithiens, driuen out by their neighbours fro the mountaines called Caspij,
+came downe by the passage of the mounte Caucasus, firste into Asia the
+lesse, then into Armenia, Media, and Persis. And by stronge hande wanne all
+as they came. Against these the Saracenes went forth as to defende the
+bordres of their gouernaunce. But forasmuche as this newecome power was to
+harde for them, the Saracenes within a while felle into such despaire of
+their state: that vppon condicion that the other would receiue Mahometes
+belief: thei ware content thei shold reigne felowlike together with them,
+in Persis. Wherto when thei had agreed, it was harde to saye whether of the
+peoples had receiued the greater dammage. The Saracenes, in yelding to them
+the haulf right of their kingdome: or the other, whiche for coueteousnes
+thereof yelded them selues to so rancke, and wicked a poyson of all vertue
+and godlynes.
+
+One bonde of belief then so coupled and ioyned them: that for a space it
+made to them no matier whether ye called them all by one name, Saracenes,
+or Turkes. But nowe as ye se, the name of the Turkes hath gotten the bettre
+hande, and the other is out of remembraunce. This people vseth moe kindes
+of horsemen then one. Thei haue Thimarceni, that is to saye Pencioners,
+aboute a foure skore thousande. These haue giuen vnto them by the kinge,
+houses, villages, and Castles euery one as he deserueth, in the steade of
+his wages or pencion. And thei attende vppon the Sensacho, or capitaine of
+that quarter, wher their possessions lye. At this daye the Turkes are
+deuided into two armies: the one for Asie, and the other for Europe. And
+either hath a chiefteine, at whose leading thei are. These chiefteines in
+their tongue be called Bassay. Ther are also another sorte muche lyke to
+our aduenturers, that serue withoute wages, called Aconizie. And these euer
+are spoiling afore when the campe is yet behynde. The fiueth parte of their
+butine is due vnto the king. And these are aboute a fourty thousande. Their
+thirde sorte of horsemen is deuided into Charippos Spahiglauos, and
+Soluphtaros. The beste, and worthiest of these, are the Charippie: of an
+honourable ordre of knighthode, as it ware for the kinges body. And those
+be euer about him, to the nombre of eyghte hundred, all Scythians and
+Persians, and elles of none other kinde of menne. These, when niede is,
+being in the sighte of the kinge: fight notably, and do wondrefull feates
+on horsebacke. Spahy, and Soluphtary be those whiche haue bene at the
+kinges bringing vp from their childehode, to serue his filthy abhominacion.
+And when thei are come to mannes state, thei marye at the kynges pleasure:
+And be enriched both with dowery of their wife, and a stipende. These for
+the moste parte serue for embassadours, deputies, lieutenauntes and suche
+other dignities, and are nexte vnto the kinge on bothe sides of him, when
+he goeth any whether as a garde. Thei are in nombre a thousande and thre
+hundred.
+
+Among the footemen are three sortes, Ianizarie, these be chosen all the
+Empire ouer, of xii. yeres of age, or there aboute, by certein that haue
+Commission for the purpose: And are for a space enstructed in the feactes
+of warre, in commune schooles. And then aftrewarde are thei chosen into
+souldie, and haue giuen them a shorter garmente, and a white cappe, with a
+tarfe tourned vpwarde. Their weapon is a Targette, a Curtilase, and a Bowe.
+Their office is to fortifie the campe, and to assaulte cities. Thei are in
+nombre aboue twentie thousande.
+
+The seconde sorte are called Asappi, and are all footemen of light
+harnesse, weaponed with swearde, target, and a kinde of long Iauelines,
+wherewith thei slea the horses of their enemies, in the skirmishe and
+battaile. These, to be knowen fro the Ianizaries, weare redde cappes. These
+are appoincted in nombre, accordyng as the case shall require. But thei are
+euer at the leaste fouretie thousande. When the warres are finished, for
+the whiche thei ware hired: these are no longer in wages. Tharmie roialle
+hath about two hundred thousande armed menne, beside a greate rable of
+footemen aduenturers, that take no wages, and suche other as be called out
+of Garrisons. And amonge these, Pioners and Cookes, Carpenters, Armourers,
+and suche other as thei must niedes haue to make the waye, wher the place
+is combresome: to dresse victualles, to amende harnesse, to make bredges
+ouer floudes, to trenche aboute their ennemies, to plante battries, make
+Ladders, and suche other thinges necessarie for the siege. Ther foloweth
+the armie also, sondrye sortes of money Masters: some for lone, some for
+exchaunge, some to buy thinges. And sondrie sortes of occupiers, such as be
+thought nedeful in such cases.
+
+But there is nothing in all that nacion more to be marueiled at, then their
+spiedinesse in doeyng of thinges: their constantnes in perilles, and their
+obedience and precise obseruinge of all commaundementes. For the least
+fault, of goeth the heade. Thei passe ouer raginge floudes, mounteignes and
+rockes: roughes and plaines, thicke and thinne, if thei be commaunded. Not
+hauing respecte to their lyfe, but to their rulers. No men maie awaie with
+more watche, no men with more hongre. Among them is no mutinyng, no
+vproures, no sturres. In theyr fyght thei vse no cries, not shoutes, but a
+certeine fiercenes of brayeng. Thei kepe suche precise scilence in the
+night, through out their campe: that thei wil rather suffre such as they
+haue taken prisoners, to run their waie, then to make any sturre. Of all
+the peoples at this daie, thei onely doe warre, acording to the ordre of
+armies. So that no manne niedeth to meruayle how it cometh that no people
+this two hundred yeare and aboue, haue had like successe vnto them. Yea, it
+may truely be sayd, that excepte it be by some plague or murreyn, or
+discorde among them selues, they can not be subdued. The apparail that the
+souldiours do vse, is most comely and honeste. In their sadles and bridles,
+there is neither curiositie, ne yet superfluitie. No man emong them weareth
+his Armour, but when niede is to fight. They carry their harnesse behynde
+theim, at their backes. They vse neither banner, standerde, ne flaggue: but
+certein Iauelins that haue streamynge out fro the toppe, diuers coloured
+thriedes, by the whiche euery hande knoweth his capiteine. Thei vse a
+dromme and a fiphe, to assemble their Bandes, and to sturre them to the
+batteile. When the batteile is done, all the armie is presented to the
+Regestour (whiche is some one of the nobles) bothe that it maye bee knowen
+who is slain, and what nombre: and that newe may be entred in their places.
+In all assemblies and mietinges, feaste, or other: thei praie for their
+souldiours, and menne of warre. But specially aboue all other, for those
+that haue suffred death for the commune quarelle of their countrie: calling
+them happie, fortunate, and blessed, that thei yelded not vp their liues at
+home, amidde the lamentacions and bewailynges, of their wiues and children,
+but loste them, abrode, amonge the shoutes of their enemies, and the
+ratling of the Harneis, and Launces. The victories of their forefathers and
+eldres, thei put into Balade, and sing theim with greate honour and
+praises: for that thei thinke the courages of the souldiours and menne of
+warre be muche quickened, and kindled thereby.
+
+Their dwelling houses are communely of timbre and claie, very fewe of
+stone: for of them are the noble mennes houses their temples, and Batthes.
+And yet are there amonge the communes, men able of them self alone, to set
+furthe an whole armie, furnisshed at all poinctes. But because thei are
+naturally giuen to sparing and to abhorre all sumptuousenesse, embrasing a
+lowe and simple state: thei wel beare this voluntarie pouertie, and rude
+homelinesse. For this cause also, doe thei not set by any kinde of Painters
+Imagerie. As for the other imagerie of coruen grauen, or molten worke, thei
+do so hate and abhorre: that they call vs Christians for delighting so
+muche in them, verie Idolatours and Image worshippers. And do not onely so
+calle vs, but wil earnestly argue, that we are so in dede. Thei vse no
+Seales to their Lettres, of what sorte so euer thei be, the kynges or
+other. But they credite the matier, assone as thei haue red the
+superscription, or heard the name of the sender. Thei occupie no belles,
+nor suffre not the Christianes that dwelle among them to do. Thei game not
+for money, or any valewe elles. And if it fortune that any manne be founde
+to do, in many sundrie wise thei reuile him, and baite him with shames and
+reproche.
+
+No man among them, of what degree or dignitie so euer he be: requireth
+forme chaire, stoole, or other kinde of seate to sitte vpon. But foldinge
+bothe him selfe and his clothes, aftre a mooste comely sorte: rucketh downe
+vpon the grounde, not muche vnlike to the sitting of our gentlewomen ofte
+times here in Englande. The table wherupon thei eate, is for the mooste
+parte of a Bullockes hide, or a Hartes skinne. Not dressed, but in the
+heare, facioned rounde, beyng a fowre or fiue spanne ouer, and so set
+rounde about on the bordre, or verge, with ringlettes of iron: that putting
+a couple of stringes throughe the ringes, it maye be drawen together, and
+shutte and opened like a purse. House, or Churche, or any other place wher
+they entende to sitte, no man entreth with his shoes on. For it is compted
+a very dishonest and vnmanerly facion, to sitte shoed. Wherfore they vse a
+maner of slippe shooes, that may lightly be putte of and on. The place
+where thei sitte, either at home, or at Churche, is in some place matted,
+and in some place ouerspred with course woollen Carpette. And some places
+also, either for the lowenes, moistenes, or vncleanelinesse therof are
+plancked with boorde.
+
+The garmentes aswell of the menne, as the women, are large and longe, and
+open afore: that thei may the more honestlie and couertly hide all, when
+nature craveth to be eased. And in doeyng those niedes, thei take greate
+hiede, that their face be not into the Southe, as it is when thei praye. As
+also that thei discouer no priuie parte, that any myghte fortune to see.
+The menne make water sitting, aswell as the women. For if a man amonges
+them, ware sene to make water standing: he should be iudged of all, a
+foole, or an hertique.
+
+From wine (as from a prouoker of al sinne and vnclennesse) thei absteine by
+their lawe. And yet eate they the Grapes, and drincke muste. Thei also
+forbeare to eate any thinge, that commeth of the Hogge: or any thinge elles
+that dieth of sickenesse, or by aduenture vnslain. But any other thinges,
+being mannes meate, thei refuse not to eate. Thei worshippe the Fridaie,
+laieng all labour and businesse aparte, with as greate solempnitie and
+deuocion, as we doe the Sondaie, or as the Iewes doe the Sabboth daie. In
+euery citie there is one principall or head Churche. In the whiche vppon
+the Fridaie at aftre Noone, thei all assemble together. And aftre solempne
+praiers, heare a sermone. Thei acknowledge one God, to whome thei make no
+like, nor equalle: and Mahomet to be his trustie and welbeloued, Prophete.
+All the Saracenes are bound to praie fiue times on the daie, with their
+faces toward the South. And before thei so do, to the ende thei maie be
+cleane from all filthe of bodie: to wasshe them selues toppe and taile,
+heade, eares, eyes, nose, mouthe, armes, handes, bealy, colions, legges and
+fiete. Specially, if he haue bene late at the soile with a woman or stouped
+on his taile to vnburden his bealie. Except he haue some lette of iournie,
+or sickenesse. But if he lacke watre to doe this withall (as that sieldome
+or neuer can happen, for that thei haue in all cities, bathes, ordenarie
+for the purpose) thei supplie the defaulte with the moulde of fresshe
+cleane earthe, wherewith thei rubbe ouer their whole bodies. Who is so
+polluted in any maner wise: suffreth no man before this clensing, to speake
+with hym, or to see him, if it be possible. Euery yere for the space of
+fiue wiekes continually together, thei faste al daie as presicely as is
+possible, bothe from meate, drincke and women. But aftre the sonne is ones
+doune, till the next daie he riseth, thei neither spare eatyng ne
+drinckyng, ne pressyng of pappes. In thende of their lente, and againe the
+sixtieth daie aftre: Thei kiepe their passeouer or Easter, in remembraunce
+of the Rambe shewed vnto Abraham, to be Sacrificed in the steade of his
+sonne, and of a certaine nighte in the whiche thei doe beleue that the
+Alcorane was giuen them from heauen.
+
+Euery yere ones, the Saracenes also are bound of duetie to visite the house
+of God, in the citie of Mecha: bothe to acknowledge their homage, and to
+yelde vnto Mohomete his yerely honour at his Sepulchre there. The Saracenes
+compelle no man to forsake his opinion or belief: ne yet labour so to
+perswade any countrie to do. Although their Alcorane commaunde theim to
+treade doune and destroie all menne of the contrary beliue yea them and
+their prophetes. But through this sufferaunce, ther are to be founde
+enhabiting in Turkie, peoples of all opinions, and beleue: euery man vsinge
+suche kinde of worshippe to his God, as to his religion apperteineth. Their
+priestes do not muche diffre from the commune people, nor yet their
+churches from their dwelling houses. Yf thei knowe the Alcorane, and the
+praiours and ceremonies or their lawe, it suffiseth. Thei are neither giuen
+to contemplacion ne yet schole study. For why thei are not occupied with
+any churche seruice or cure of soules. Sacramentes haue thei none, nor
+reliques, nor halowinges of foutes, Aulters, and other necessaries. But
+prouidinge for their wiues, their children, and householdes, thei occupie
+their time in husbondrie, marchaundise, huntinge, or some other meane to
+get the penie, and mainteyne their liuing, euen as the temporall men doe.
+Ther is nothing forbidden them, nothing is for them vnlawfull. Thei be
+neither burdoned with tillage, ne bondage. Thei be muche honoured of al
+men, for that thei are skilfull in the ceremonies of the lawe, teache them
+to other, and be the gouernours of the churches.
+
+They haue many schooles and large, In the which great nombres are taught
+the lawes there giuen by kinges, for the ciuile gouernance and defence of
+the Realme. Of the whiche some are afterwarde sette fourth to be men of the
+churche, and some to be temporalle officers. Their spiritualtie is deuided
+into many and sondry sortes of religions. Of the whiche some liue in the
+wooddes and wyldernes shonnyng all companye. Some kiepe open hospitalitie
+in cities, and yet liue by almose them selues. These if they lacke meate to
+refreshe the niedy straunger and pelligrine, yet at the least waie they
+giue him herbour and lodgyng. Other, roumyng the cities vp and downe and
+caryeng alway in bottles faire watre and fresshe, if any man be disposed to
+drinke, vnasked they willingly proffre it him, and refuse not to take, if
+he for their gentlenesse offre aught vnto them agayn. Otherwise they craue
+nothyng, but in al their woordes, gesture, behauour, and diedes: shewe
+theim selues aungelles raither then menne. And euery one of these hath one
+knowledge or other, of difference from the reaste. The Saracenes or Turkes
+are very precise executours of Iustice. Who so committeth bloudshed: hath
+in like sorte his owne shedde againe. Taken in adultery, both parties are
+streight without mercy stoned to deathe. Thei haue also a punisshement for
+fornication, whiche is to the manne taken with the diede, foure score
+ierkes or lasshes with a skourge. A thief for the first and the seconde
+time, escapeth with so many stripes. But at the thirde time, hathe his
+hande cut of, and at the fourthe his foote. He that endamageth any manne:
+as the losse or hinderaunce shalbe valewed, so muste he of force
+recompence. In claiming of goodes, or possessions, the claimer muste proue
+by witnesse that the thing claimed is his: and the denier shalbe tried by
+his othe. Witnesses they admitte none, but persones of knowen honestie, and
+suche as mighte be belieued withoute an othe. Thei haue also certeine
+spiefaultes ordinarilye appoincted (muche like to our Sompnours) that spie
+in euery shiere for suche as be necligent, and let slippe suche oraisons
+and seruice as thei be bounde to. Those if thei fortune to finde them: do
+thei punishe aftre this maner. Thei hange a borde about their neckes, with
+a great many of foxe tailes, and togginge them vp and downe the stretes:
+all ouer the citie, thei neuer lette them go vntyll they haue compounded by
+the purse. And in this also nothing vnlike to our Sompnours. It is lawfull
+for no manne, beinge come to mannes state, to liue vnmaried. It is compted
+amonge them as lawfull to haue iiii. wiues, as it is amonge vs to haue one.
+Marie what soeuer is aboue this nombre (as thei may if thei liste, and be
+able to kepe them, no degree excepted, but mother and sister, marie a
+hundred) thei are not iudged so lawfulle. The children that thei haue bothe
+by the one, and the other haue equalle porcion in the fathers enheritaunce.
+Sauing that ii. women children are compted in porcion but for one man
+childe. Thei haue not ii. of their wiues together in one house, ne yet in
+one citie. For the busines, and disquietinges that might happen therby, but
+euery wife in a seuerall towne. The housebandes haue libertye to put them
+away thrise, and thrise to take them againe. But yet when he hath ones
+putte her awaie, if any manne haue taken her, and she lust to abide with
+hym, she maie.
+
+Their women are moste honestlie appareiled. And vpon their heades doe vse a
+certeine attire, not muche vnlike the veluet bonette of olde Englande:
+wherof the one lappe so hangeth vppon whiche side semeth her good: that
+when she is disposed to go out of the doores, or to come amongest menne
+within the house, she maie hide therwith by and by her whole face, sauyng
+her eyes.
+
+The Saracenes woman, neuer dare shewe her self wher there is a company of
+menne. To go to the marchate to occupy byeng or sellyng in any wise: is not
+syttyng for their women. In the head church they haue a place farre a part
+fro the men: so close that no manne canne looke into them. Into the which
+notwithstandyng it is not laufull for euery mans wyfe to entre: but for the
+nobilitie onely. Ne yet for them neyther, but on Friday, at the onely houre
+of noone praier: whiche as I haue aforesayd, is kept amonge them high and
+holy.
+
+To see a man and a woman talke together ther, in the open strete or abrode:
+is so straunge, and so vnwonte a thing, that in a whole yere it skante
+happeneth ones. For a man to sitte with his wyfe in open sighte, or to ride
+with any woman behinde him: amongest them ware a wondre. Maried couples
+neuer dally together in the sighte of other, nor chide or falle out. But
+the menne beare alwaies towarde the women a manly discrete sobrenes, and
+the women, towarde them a demure womanlie reuerence. Greate menne, that
+cannot alwaie haue their wiues in their owne eye, appoincte redgelinges, or
+guelte menne to awaite vppon them. Whiche waite them in diede so narrowlye,
+that it ware impossible for any man beside the housebande to speake with
+the wyfe vnsene: or the wyfe by any stealthe to false her trouth and
+honestie. Finally the Saracenes do so full and whole beleue their Mahomete
+and his lawes: that thei doubte no whitte, but the kepers of them shall
+haue euerlasting blessednesse. That is to saye, after their opinion, a
+paradise of pleasure, a gardein plotte of delighte, full of swiete rindles
+of Christalline watre. In whose botomes the grauelle, popleth like
+glisteryng golde. The ayre alwaie so attempre and pure, that nothyng can be
+more swiete, more pleasaunte, nor healthsome. The grounde couered and
+garnisshed with natures Tapesserie, neither lacking any colour that
+pleasaunte is to the eye, or sauour that maie delight the nose. Birdes
+syngyng with suche armonie, as neuer mortalle eare heard. Briefly flowyng
+in all pleasure that any harte can aftre thincke. Disshes for the mouthe,
+of all deinties. All maner of Silkes, Veluettes, Purples, Skarlettes, and
+other precious apparelle. Godly younge damoselles, with graie rowlyng eyes,
+and skinne as white as Whales bone, softe as the Silke, and breathed like
+the Rose, and all at their becke. Vesselles of siluer and golde. Angelles
+for their Butlers that shall bryng theim Milke in Goblettes of golde, and
+redde wine in siluer. But contrariewise, thei threaten vnto the breakers of
+them, helle, and euerlastyng destruccion. This thei also beleue, that be a
+manne wrapped in neuer so many synnes, yet if at his death, he beleue vpon
+God, and Machomete, he shalbe saued.
+
+
+¶ The xii. Chapitre.
+
+¶ Of the Christians, of their firste commyng vp, their Ceremonies, and
+  ordenaunces.
+
+Christe Iesu, the eternalle and verie sonne of thalmightie father, the
+seconde persone in the holie inseparable, equalle, and euerlastyng
+Trinitie: Of a sette purpose, and spiritualle secrete, not reuealed from
+the beginning of tyme, and aboue mannes capacitie: was by the meane of the
+holy ghost, conceiued and borne manne. In Iewrie, of a Virgine, of the
+stocke of Dauid, a thousande fiue hundred, and twentie yeres gone
+[Footnote: It appereth by this place that this was written xxxv. yeres
+gone.]. To sette vs miserable, and vnhappie menne on foote againe, whiche
+ware in Adam and Eue, by the sinne of disobedience ouerthrowen. And to
+bryng vs againe, vnto our heauenlie natiue countrie, from the whiche we
+haue by so many ages, for that presumpcion bene banished. Finally, to
+repaire and supplie in heauen againe ones, the ruine and fal of those
+spirites, whiche a space afore our creacion, ware thurste doune fro thence.
+For the whiche purpose, we chiefly ware made. This Iesus, from thirtie
+yeres of age, vntill thirtie and fowre (in the whiche, throughe the
+maliciousnes of the Iewes, he suffred on the galowe tree) traueillyng all
+Iewrie ouer: first moued and exhorted the Iewes, and then other peoples,
+from the olde Lawe of Moses, and their wicked Image worshippe, to his newe
+ordenaunce and trade. And as many as would folowe, and doe aftre hym, he
+called theim his scholers or disciples. Out of the whiche, he gaue vnto
+xij. that he had specially chosen, Commission aftre his death (when he had
+appered to them on liue again, as he had forwarned them that he would) to
+go as Legates, or Embassatours into the whole world, and to preache vnto
+all creatures, what so euer thei had sene or learned of him. Simon Petre
+(to whom longe afore he had surrendred the gouernaunce and chiefteinshippe
+of his Church, as in reuercion aftre him) when aftre the comyng of the holy
+ghoste some wente into one coste, and some into another, euery manne his
+waie, as thei ware allotted and commaunded: came first vnto Antioche. And
+there setting vp the first and chief chaire of the Churche, kepte a
+counsaille with the other Apostles, whiche often tymes came to hym. In this
+Counsaille among other thinges it was decreed, that asmany as should
+receiue, and cleaue vnto the doctrine, and righte perswasion of Christes
+godlines: should fro thence furthe be called Christianes. This Seate of
+superioritie, beyng afterwarde translated to Rome: bothe he and his
+Successours, tooke it for their chief charge and businesse, to put the rude
+and rawe secte of their Christe, and the folowers of the same, in some good
+ordre and trade of gouernaunce. Bothe aftre the manor of Moses Lawe (whiche
+Christe came not to breake, but to consummate and finishe) and the state of
+the Romain gouernaunce, the Greke, and Egipcian: and also by paterne of the
+Ceremonies, obseruances, lawes, and ordenaunces Ecclesiasticalle and
+Temporalle, of many other peoples: But specially aftre the doctrine, of
+Christe Iesu, and the woorkyng of the holy ghoste, to bring them in to
+frame and facion. When thei ware entred in the mattier: As thei sawe that
+men not emong the Hebrues alone, but emong other peoples also, ware diuided
+into Ecclesiasticalle and Temporalle Spiritualtie and Laietie: and eche of
+them in mooste goodly wise, into their dignities and degrees (The Romain
+Emperour then being gouernour of the whole worlde alone) to haue Consulles,
+Fathers or Senatours: at whose becke all thinges ware deuised and doone:
+And in the residewe of the earthe to bee many Kynges, many Dukes, Erles,
+Presidentes, and Deputies of countries, and their Lieutenauntes:
+Maresshalles of the fielde, and highe Conestables for the communes,
+Pretours or Prouostes, Standerdbearers roialle, Centurianes, and Disners,
+Seriauntes, Conestables, Collectours, Serueiours, Porters, Scribes,
+Listers, and many other persones without office, bothe menne and women. And
+in the Temples of their Goddes, a Sacrificer roialle, whiche is to saie in
+effecte, a highe Prieste of the dignitie of a kyng. Archeflamines, Flamines
+of honour, and other Flamines inferiour and laste in degree their Priestes.
+And by like ordre emong the Hebrues: an highe Bisshoppe, and interiour
+Priestes, Leuites, Nazareis, candle quenchers, commaunders of Spirites,
+Churche Wardeines, and Syngers, whiche wee calle Chantours aftre the
+Frenche. And among the Grekes: Capiteines, or heades ouer a thousands, ouer
+an hundred, ouer fiuetie, ouer tenne, and ouer fiue. And that there ware
+yet beside these, bothe emong the Hebrues, and the Romaines, many couentes,
+or compaignies of menne and women religious. As Sadduceis, Esseis, and
+Phariseis emong the Hebrues: Salios, Diales, and Vestalles, emong the
+Romaines: The moste holy Apostles did all consente, that Petre, and thei
+that should folowe him in the seate of Rome, should for euermore be called
+Papa. As who would saie, father of fathers, the vniuersalle,
+Apostollicalle, moste holy, and moste highe bisshoppe. And that he should
+at Rome be Presidente ouer the vniuersalle Churche, as the Emperour there,
+was ruler of the vniuersall worlde. And to matche the Consulles (which ware
+euer twaine) thei appoincted fowre head Fathers, in the Greke named
+Patriarches, one at Constantinople, another at Antioche, a thirde at
+Alexandrie, and the fowrthe at Hierusalem. In the place of the Senatours,
+thei took the Cardinalles. To matche their kynges, whiche had three Dukes
+at commaundemente, thei deuised Primates: To whom ware subiecte thre
+Archebishoppes. So that the Archebishoppe or Metropolitane, standeth in the
+place of a Duke. For as the Duke had certein Erles or Barones at his
+commaundemente: so haue the Archbisshoppes, other inferiour Bisshopes at
+theirs, which also by reason muste countreuaile an Erle. The Bisshoppes
+coadiutor or Suffragane, came into the Presidentes place. Thordenarie into
+the Deputies, then did the Officialle matche with the Mareshalle. And with
+the high conestable for the communes, the Bisshoppes Chauncelour. And for
+the Pretour or Prouoste, thei sette vp an Archedeacon. In stede of the
+Centuriane, was a Deane appoincted. And for the Disnere, the Persone or
+Vicare. For the Aduocates, crepte in the Parisshe Prieste, Soule Prieste,
+Chaunterie Prieste, Morowe Masse Prieste, and suche other. The Deacon
+standeth for the Surueiour. The Subdeacon for the Serieaunte. For the two
+Conestables, came in the two Commaunders of Spirites, called Exorcistæ in
+the Greke. The Collectours office, was matched with the Churche wardeines.
+The Porter became the Sexteine. The Chauntour, scribe, and Lister, kiepe
+stille their name. The Acholite, whiche we calle Benet and Cholet,
+occupieth the roume of Candlebearer.
+
+All these by one commune name, thei called Clerj, of the Greke woorde
+Cleros, that is to saie, a Lotte. For that thei ware firste from among the
+people, so alloted vnto God. Thereof cometh our terme Clerque, and his
+cosine Clergie. Neuerthelesse, this name Clergie, was not so commune vnto
+all: but that it siemed moste proprely to reste in the seuen degrees, that
+the Pope of Rome vsed for his Ministres, when he saied Masse in persone him
+self. That is to saie, the Bishoppe, the Priest, the Deacon, and subdeacon,
+the Acholite, and the Chauntour. Vnto euery of these gaue thei in the
+churche their seueralle dignities officies, and appareile.
+
+To the Bishoppe was giuen aucthoritie, to ordeine and make other Clerckes.
+To enueile virgines, and to hallow them. [Sidenote: That is to saie, to
+make Nunnes.] To consecrate their likes, and their superiours also. To laie
+handes vpon them. To confirme and Bisshoppe children. To hallowe Churches.
+To put Priestes from their Priesthode: and to degrade theim, when thei
+deserue it. To kiepe Conuocacions and Sinodes. To make holy oile: to
+hallowe the ornamentes and vess [Transcriber's note: gap in text about 3-4
+words long. vess(els)...?] And to do also other thinges, that the inferiour
+Priestes doe. To enstructe those that be newly come to the faithe. To
+Christiane, to make the Sacramente of the Altare, and to giue it to other.
+To absolue the repentaunte of their sinnes, and to fettre the stubberne
+more streighte. To shewe furthe the Gospelle. To enioyne all Priestes to
+shaue their heades in the croune, like a circle of iiij. fingres brode,
+after the maner of the Nazareis. To kepe their heare shorte, to weare no
+bearde. And to liue chaste for euer.
+
+Their liuyng onely to rise of the firste fruictes, tenthes, and offringes:
+and vttrely to be voide of all temporalle and Laiemennes cares and
+businesse. To be honestlie appareiled, and accordyngly to vse their passe
+and conuersacion. Onely to serue God and the churche. Diligently, to plye
+the reading of holy scripture, that they themselues mighte perfectly knowe
+all thinges perteining to Christian religion, wherin thei are bound to
+enstructe other. The companies or couentes of religious, aswel men as
+women: are Benedictines, Preachers, Franciscanes, Augustines, Barnardines,
+Anthonines, Iohannites, Cisternois, and innumerable other. Whiche al haue
+their habite, and maner of liuing by them selfe: acordinge to the rule that
+echeone priuately prescribed to them selues. And liued for the moste parte
+a solitary life, professing chastitie, pouretie, and perpetualle obedience.
+And for their solitarines the Greke called them Monarchi. Some of these
+haue for the heades Abbotes, some Priours: whiche are either subiecte to
+the Pope onely, or to the bishoppes. Al these vsed coules, much aftre one
+facion, but in colour diuers, and abstained fro fleshe. The bisshoppes when
+thei say masse, haue xv. holy garmentes, aftre the maner of Moyses lawe,
+for the perfection of them. His boatewes, his Amice, an Albe, a Girdle, a
+Stole, a Maniple, a Tunicle of violette in graine fringed, his gloues,
+ringe, and chesible or vestimente, a Sudari, a cope, a mitre and a crosse
+staffe. [Marginal Note: The Latine calleth it a shiepe hooke.] And a chaire
+at the Aultares ende, wherein he sitteth. Of the whiche, vi. are commune to
+euery inferiour prieste: the Amice, the Albe, the girdle, the stole, the
+Maniple, and the vestiment. But ouer, and aboue all these the Pope, by the
+gifte of Constantine the greate, hath libertie to weare al the ornamentes
+Imperialle. That is to saye a kirtle of skarlet, a robe of Purple, a
+sceptre, and a close corone. With the whiche aftre he hath rauisshed him
+selfe in the vestrie, vppon solempne feastes, when he entendeth to do
+masse: he commeth forth to the aultare, hauing on the right side a prieste,
+on the lefte side a Deacon, a Subdeacon going before him with a booke faste
+shutte, two candle bearers, and an encensour with the censoure in his hande
+smoking. When he is comen to the griessinges, the stayers, or foote of the
+aultare: putting of his mitre, he maketh open confession [Marginal note:
+That is, he saieth confiteor.] of his sinnes together with his company.
+
+That done he goeth vp to the aultare, openeth the booke, lieng vpon the
+lefte corner of the same, kysseth it, and so procedeth in the
+Solempnisacion of the Masse. The subdeacon readeth the epistle, and the
+Deacon the godspelle. Priestes of al degrees, are charged to prayse God
+seuen times a daie, and to praye with ordenarie oraisons. Towarde the
+eueninge, euensonge: and compline more late. Matines in the morninge, and
+incontinente prime, and howres, in ordre of tyme, as thei stande in ordre
+[Footnote: Hora prima, tertia, sexta, nona.] of name. And this humbly
+before the aultare, if he maye conueniently, with his face towarde the
+Easte. The pater nostre and the Crede, said thei, onely at the beginning of
+their seruice, as the commune people do nowe a daies also. Saincte Ierome,
+at the vrgent request of Pope Damasus, parted out the Psalmes acording to
+the daies of the wieke. And appoincted for euery houre a porcion of propre
+psalmes. For the nighte houres on the holy daye, ix. and on the working
+daye, xii. For laudes in the morning, v. for euensonge as many, and for
+eche other houre but thre. He also ordeined the Epistles, Godspelles, and
+other seruice, vsed to be red out of the olde or newe testament, in maner
+altogether, sauing the note. The Anthemes (which Ambrose, Bysshoppe of
+Millayne wrate, and endited) Damasus put ordre that the quiere should sing
+side aftre side, and added to euery psalmes ende. Gloria patri, &c. The
+lessons and Himpnes that go before eche one of the howres did the
+counceiles of Thoulouse and Agathone aucthorise. The orisons, the grailes,
+the tractes, the Alleluya, thoffertorie, the Communions in the Masse, the
+Anthemes, Versicles, repitions, and other thinges, either songe or redde by
+nyghte or by daye, to the beautifieng, and praysing of God: did Gregory,
+Gelasius, Ambrose, and many other holy fathers, deuise, and put furthe, not
+at one time but at sondry. The Masse (so terme thei the sacrifice) was
+firste vsed to be done in suche simple sorte, as yet is accustomed, vppon
+good Friday, and Easter euen, with certeine lessons before it. But then
+Pope Celestinus put to the office of the Masse. Thelesphorus, Gloria in
+excelsis: But Hilarius of Pictauia made the Et in terra. Simachus ordeined
+it to be songue. The Salutacions, which by the terme of Dominus vobiscum,
+be made seuen tymes in a Masse, ware taken out of the booke of Ruthe, by
+Clemente and Anaclete, and put in, in their places. Gelasius made vp all
+the reste to the Offertory, in the same ordre thei be vsed. Excepte the
+Sequences and the Crede: wherof Nicolas put in the firste, and Damasus the
+nexte: acordinge to the Sinode of Constantinople. The bidding of the
+beades, with the collacion that was wonte to be made in the pulpite on
+Sondaies, and halydaies: raither grewe to a custome by the example of
+Nehemias, and Esdras, then was by any aucthorised. In this collation at the
+firste comming vp therof, when so many as ware presente at the Masse did
+receiue the communion, acording as was ordeyned by a decree: thei that ware
+at any discorde ware exhorted to concorde, and agremente. And that thei
+should receiue the sacrament of the aulter cleane from the filthe of sinne,
+vppon the whiche consideracion at this daye it endeth with confiteor, or an
+open confession. There ware thei wonte to teache the instrumentes of the
+olde lawe, and the newe. The ten commaundementes. The xii. articles of our
+beleue. The seuen sacramentes, holy folkes liues, and Martirdomes, holy
+dayes, doctrines, and disciplines: vertues, and vices, and what soeuer are
+necessary beside forthe, for a Christiane to knowe. Gregory linked on the
+offertorie. Leo the prefaces. Gelasius the greate Canon, and the lesse. The
+Sanctus blessed Sixtus. And Gregory the Pater noster out of the Gospelle of
+sainte Mathewe. Martialle the scholer of blessed Peter, deuised that
+Bysshoppes should gyue their benediction at the Agnus. And as for other
+inferiour priestes, Innocentius commaunded them to giue the paxe, that is
+to saye peace. Sergius tacked on the Agnus, and Gregory the poste
+communion. The closing vp of all with Ite missa est, Benedicamus, Deos
+gratias: was Leoes inuencion.
+
+The xii. articles of our beleue, whiche the blessed Apostles would euery
+manne not onely to confesse with mouthe, but to beleue also in harte, are
+these.
+
+Firste, that ther is one God in Trinitie, the father almighty maker of
+heauen and earthe. The seconde, Iesus Christe, his onely sonne our Lorde.
+The thirde, the same beinge conceiued of the holye ghoste, to haue bene
+borne of the Virgine Marie. The fourthe, to haue suffred vndre Ponce
+Pilate, to haue bene crucified, deade, bewried, and to haue descended in to
+helle. The fiueth, to haue risen agayne the thirde daye fro the deade. The
+sixteth, to haue ascended vp into the heauens, and to sitte on the right
+hande of God the father almighty. The seuenth, that he shall come fro
+thence like a triumpher, to iudge the quicke and the deade. The eight, that
+ther is an holy ghoste. The nineth, that there is an holy churche
+vniuersalle, the communion of the godly and good. The tenthe, forgiuenesse
+of sinnes. Thee eleuenth, the rising againe of the flesshe. The twelueth,
+aftre our departing, life in another worlde euerlasting.
+
+The tenne commaundementes, which God wrate with his owne finger, and gaue
+vnto the Israelites by Moses, whiche thapostles willed vs also to kiepe.
+The firste, thou shalte haue none other Goddes but me. The seconde, thou
+shalte not make any grauen Image, or likenesse of any thing that is in
+heauen aboue, in the earthe benethe, or in the water vnder the earthe, thou
+shalt not bowe doune to them, nor worshippe them. The third, thou shalt not
+take the name of thy lorde God in vaine. The fowrthe, remembre that thou
+kiepe holie thy Sabboth daie. The fiueth, honour thy father and mother. The
+sixteth, thou shalte doe no murdre. The seuenth, thou shalte not commit
+adulterie. The eight, thou shalte not steale. The nineth, thou shalt beare
+no false witnesse against thy neighbour. The tenthe, thou shalte not desyre
+thy neighbours home, his wife, his seruaunte, his maide, his Oxe, nor his
+Asse, nor any thing that is thy neighbours.
+
+The seuen Sacramentes of the churche, which are contained in the fiue laste
+Articles of our beleue, and commaunded vs by the holie fathers to be
+beleued.
+
+The firste, diepyng into the water, called Baptisyng, aftre the Greke.
+This, by canonicalle decree, in time paste was not wonte to be giuen
+(excepte greate necessitie soner required it) but to those that had bene
+scholers a space afore, to learne the thinges appertinent to Christendome.
+Yea, and that aftre thei had bene exceadingly welle enstructed in the
+faithe: and proufe taken of their profityng, by seuen examinations, which
+ware made vpon seuen seueralle daies in the Lente, and so ware thei
+Baptissed vpon Easter euen, and Whitesondaie euen. Vpon whiche daies, thei
+ware accustomed to hallowe the christening watre, in euery Paroche. But
+because this specially of all other, is chiefly necessarie vnto euerlasting
+saluation: leasse any bodie should die without it, thei decreed that assone
+as the childe was borne, godfathers should be sought for it, as it ware for
+witnesses or sureties whiche should bryng the childe vnto the Churche
+doore, and there to stande without. And then the Priest should enquire,
+before the childe be dieped in the Fonte, whether it haue renounced Sathan
+and all his pompe and pride. If it beleue certeinely and wholie, all the
+Articles of the Christiane faithe. And the Godfathers answering, yea: for
+it, the Prieste breathyng thrise vpon his face, exorciseth it, and
+catechiseth it. Aftre that, doeth he seuen thinges to the childe in ordre.
+Firste, he putteth into the mouth hallowed salt. Secondely, he mingleth
+earthe and his spattle toguether, and smereth the eyes, eares, and
+nosethrilles of the childe. Thirdly, giuyng it suche name as it shall euer
+aftre bee called by: he marketh it on the breaste and backe with holie
+oile, aftre the facion of a crosse. Fourthly, he diepeth it thrise in the
+Watre, or besprinkleth it with watre thrise, in maner of a crosse, in the
+name of the holie Trinitie, the father, the sonne, and holie ghoste. In the
+whiche, name also, all thother Sacramentes are ministred. Fiuethly, weting
+his thumbe in the holie ointement, he maketh therewith a Crosse on the
+childes foreheade. Sixthly, he putteth a white garment vppon it. Seuenthly,
+he taketh it in the hande a Candle brennyng. The Iewes before thei be
+Christened (by the determinacion of the counsaile holden at Agathone), are
+cathechised, that is to saie, are scholers at the enstruction of our beleue
+nine monethes. And are bound to fast fourtie daies: to dispossesse them
+selues of all that euer thei haue, and to make free their bonde men. And
+looke whiche of their children thei haue Circumcised, acording to Moses
+lawe: hym are thei bounde to banishe their companie. No merueile therefore
+if thei come so vnwillingly to christendome.
+
+Bishopping, whiche the Latines calle Confirmacion, a confirming, a
+ratifieng, establishyng, auethorisyng, or allowyng of that went before: is
+the second Sacramente. And is giuen of the Bishoppe onely, before the
+Aultare in the Churche, to suche as are of growen yeres, and fastyng (if it
+maie be) aftre this maner. As many as shalbe Confirmed, come all together
+with euery one a godfather. And the Bishoppe aftre he hath saied one
+orasion ouer them all, wetyng his thumbe in the holie oile, maketh a crosse
+vpon eche of their foreheades: In the name of the father, sonne, and holie
+ghoste. And giueth hym a blowe on the lefte chieke, for a remembraunce of
+the Sacrament, that he come not for it againe. The godfathers, to the ende
+the enoilyng should not droppe awaie, or by negligence bee wiped awaie,
+clappe on a faire filette on the foreheade, whiche ther iudge to be
+unlawfully taken awaie, before the seuenth daie. The holie fathers estemed
+this Sacrament so highly, that if the name giuen to the childe at his
+Christendome, siemed not good: the Bishoppe at the giuyng hereof mighte
+chaunge it.
+
+The thirde Sacramente is holie Ordres whiche in the firste Churche, was
+giuen likewise of the Bishoppe, onely in the monethe of Decembre. But now
+at sixe seueralle tymes of the yere: that is to saie, the fowre Saturdaies
+in the embre wekes (whiche ware purposely ordeined therefore) vpon the
+Saturdaie, whiche the Churche menne calle Sitientes, because the office of
+the Masse for that daie appoineted, beginneth with that woorde, and vpon
+Easter euen. This Sacrament was giuen onely to menne: and but to those
+neither, whose demeanour and life, disposition of bodie, and qualitie of
+minde, ware sufficiently tried and knowen. Aftre the opinion of some, there
+were seuen ordres, or degrees, wherby the holy fathers would vs to beleue
+that there ware seuen speciall influences, as it ware printed in the soule
+of the receiuer, wherby eche one for eche ordre, was to be compted an
+hallowed manne. Aftre the mindes of other there ware nine. That is to saie,
+Musicens (whiche encludeth singing and plaieng) Doore kiepers, Reders
+Exorcistes, Acholites, Subdeacon, Deacon, Prieste and Bishop. And for all
+this, it is compted but one Sacramente, by the reason that all these tende
+to one ende, that is to saie, to consecrate the Lordes bodie. To euery one
+of these did the Counsaile of Toledo in Spaine, appoinete their seueralle
+liueries, and offices in the Churche. The Dorekepers had the office of our
+Common Sexteine, to open the churche dores, to take hede to the churche,
+and to shutte the dores. And had therfore a keie giuen vnto theim, when
+thei ware admitted to this ordre. The Reader, in signe and token of
+libertie to reade the Bible, and holie stories, had a greate booke giuen,
+him. The Exorcistes, serued to commaunde euille sprites oute of menne, and
+in token therof, had a lesse booke giuen them. The Acholite, had the
+bearyng and the orderyng of the Tapers, Candelstickes, and Cruettes at the
+Altare: and therfore had a Candelsticke, a Taper, and two emptie Cruorettes
+deliuered hym. The Subdeacon, mighte take the offring, and handle the
+Chalice, and the Patine, carie theim to the Altare, and fro the Altare, and
+giue the Deacon Wine and water, out of the Cruettes. And therfore the
+Bishoppe deliuereth hym an emptie Chalice with a Patine, and the Archdeacon
+one Cruet full of wine, and another full of watre, and a Towelle. To the
+Deacons, is the preachyng of Goddes Gospelle to the people committed, and
+to helpe the priest in al holy ministracion. He hath the Gospelle booke
+deliuered hym, and a towell hanged vppon his one shouldre, like a yoke. The
+Prieste hath power to consecrate the Lordes bodie, to praie for sinners,
+and to reconcile them againe to God by Penaunce enioined them. He hath
+deliuered hym a Chalice with Wine, the Patine, with a singyng cake, a stole
+vpon bothe shouldres, and a Chesible. What Ornamentes the Bisshoppe hath
+giuen vnto hym, ye haue heard afore. He maie not be made Bisshoppe, but on
+the Sondaie about the iii. houre aftre Prime, betwene thoffice of the Masse
+and the Gospelle: at the whiche tyme twoo Bisshoppes, and a Metropolitane,
+laie their handes vpon his heade and a booke. The Bisshoppes in the firste
+Churche, did litle or nothyng diffre from other Priestes, and ware ruled by
+the commune Counsailes of the Churche, before that dissencion and deuision
+entred emong the people, causing theim in sondrie sortes, to cleaue vnto
+sondrie names, euery sorte as thei fortuned to be conuerted and Christened
+of a sondrie persone. As whom Paule Baptised, thei would be called
+Paulines. Whom Appollo, Appollonians, Whome Cephas, Cephites, and so of
+other. To auoide therefore these breaches of concorde, and for an
+vniformitie, the holy fathers ware driuen to decree and stablish that
+asmany as should aftreward be baptised, should be called Christianes of
+Christe. And that ouer euery Countie or Shiere, there should be sette one
+Prieste or moe, acordyng to the greatnesse of the same, suche as ware best
+tried. Whiche should haue to name, Ouersears in Englishe: in Greke,
+Episcopj. Whom we cal Bishopes, by chaungyng of P. into B. and leauing out
+the E. for shortnes, acordyng to the nature of our tongue. These mighte not
+then gouerne their Clergie, and other their Diocesans, at their owne
+pleasure, as thei did before: but acording to the decrees of the Churche of
+Rome, and the holie Counsailes of the fathers assembled. Then began thei
+firste (by the suffraunce and helpe of deuoute princes) to deuide all
+Christendome into Dioceses, and the Diocesse into Conuocacions or Chaptres,
+and those againe into Paroches, and to set that goodly ordre, that yet
+continueth, aswell emong the clergie as the laietie. That the parishe
+should obeie their lawfull Persone, the Persone the Deane: the Deane the
+Bishoppe: the Bishoppe, the Archebishoppe. The Archebishoppe, the Primate
+or Patriarche: the Primate or Patriarche, the Legate: the Legate, the Pope:
+the Pope the generalle Counsaille: the generalle Counsaile, God alone.
+
+For the fourthe Sacramente it is holden, that euery prieste rightly
+priested, acordyng to the keies of the Churche, hauing an entente to
+consecrate, and obseruynge the fourme of the woordes: hathe power, of
+wheaten breade to make the very bodie of Christe, and of wine to make his
+very bloude.
+
+Christe our Lorde hym selfe, the daye before he suffred, kepte it solemnly
+with his disciples, and consecrated, and ordeined it continually to be
+celebrated, and eaten in the remembraunce of him selfe. And about this
+mattier a man had nede of a great faythe. Firste to beleue the breade to be
+chaunged into the body, and the wine into the bloude of Christe. Againe
+thoughe this be done euery daye that yet Christ for all that should growe
+neuer a whitte the bigger for the making, nor the lesse for the eatinge.
+Thirdely that the Sacrament being deuyded into many partes, Christ should
+yet remaine whole in euery cromme. Fourthly that thoughe the wicked eate
+it, yet should not it be defiled. Fiuethly, that it bringeth to as many
+euyll as receiue it, death; and to the good euerlasting life. Sixthly that
+it tourneth not into the nature of the eater to his nourisshemente as other
+meate dothe: but turneth the eater contrariwise into the nature of it
+selfe. And yet being eaten, that it is rapte into heauen, vnhurte or
+vntouched. Seuenthly that in so smalle a syse of breade and wine, the
+infinite, and incomprehensible Christe, God and manne shoulde be
+comprehended. Then, that one, and the self same bodye of Christe, at one
+very instaunte, shoulde be in many places, and of many menne receiued at
+ones, and in sondrye parcelles. Ninethly that thoughe the bread it selfe be
+chaunged into the very flesshe of Christe, and the wine into his bloude,
+that yet to all the sences thei remaine breade and wine, and neither
+flesshe ne bloud. Further that all these commodities conteined in these
+verses folowing should happen vnto those that worthely eate it.
+
+It putteth in mynde and kindleth, encreaseth hope, and strengtheneth.
+Mainteineth; clenseth, restoreth, giues life, and vniteth. Stablissheth
+beliefe, abates the foode of sinne, and all vnclennes quencheth.
+
+Finally, to be very profitable for the saluacion aswell of those liuyng as
+deade, for whom it is specially offred by the priest in the Masse. And
+therefore to haue to name Eucharistia communio.
+
+In the beginning of the Christianne faithe (and yet amonge certeine
+schismatiques as thei saye) one whole lofe was consecrated, of suche
+bigguenesse, as when the Priest had broken it in a platter into smalle
+pieces, it, mighte suffise the whole multitude that ware at the masse to
+participate of. For in time paste the Christianes came euery day to
+communicate by a speciall commaundemente, and ordenaunce. Aftrewarde but
+ones in a wieke and that on the Sonday. But whan it began to be skant well
+kepte vppon the Sonday neither: then was it commaunded that euery manne
+should receiue it thrise in the yere, or ones at the leaste, at euery
+Easter. And that euery Christian manne, when he stode in any daungier of
+death, beyng whole of minde, should receiue it as a waifaring viande, to
+staye him by the waye: with as good preparation of bodye and soule, as he
+possibly mighte.
+
+Matrimonie (whiche is the lawefulle coupling of the manne and the woman)
+broughte in by the lawe of nature, the lawe of God, the lawe of all
+peoples, and the lawe ciuille, is the fiueth Sacrament. The holy fathers
+woulde haue but one mariage at ones, and that not in secrete but with open
+solemnitie eyther in the churche, or in the churche porche, and so that the
+priest be called to the matier. Who shold firste examine the man, and then
+the womanne, whether thei bothe consent to be maried together. Yf thei be
+agreed (whiche is chiefely in this case requisite) he taking them bothe by
+the right handes: coupleth them together in the name of the holy and
+vnseperable trinitie, the father, the sonne, and the holy ghoste. And
+commaundeth, and exhorteth them that thei alwaye remembring this their
+coupling of their owne free wille and consent: as longe as they liue, neuer
+forsake one another but loue and honour one another, be debonaire and
+buxome one to another, giuing them selues to procreacion, and not to
+lecherous luste. And that thei honestly and diligently bringe vp, suche
+children as God sendeth them of theyr bodies. Aftre that he affiaunceth
+them both with one ringe. And sprinckling holy water vpon them, reacheth
+them a stole, and leadeth them into the churche, where (yf thei ware not
+blessed afore) he blesseth them knieling before the altare. The woman hath
+on a redde fillet or frontelette, and ouer that a white veile, withoute the
+whiche it is not lawfulle for her fro that daye forwarde, to go oute of
+doores abrode, or to sitte by any manne. Twelue thinges ther be, whiche the
+holy fathers woulde haue to barre persons from contracting of matrimonie,
+and to disseuer them againe, yf thei be contracted. Errour of person, that
+is to saye, mistaking one for another. A betrowthing vpon a condicion,
+Consanguinitie or kindred, An open crime, Diuersitie of secte, Force, or
+constrainte, Holy ordres, a Bonde or former contracte, Commune or open
+honestie, Affinitie, and Disshabilitie of engendrure.
+
+The sixteth Sacramente is penaunce or repentaunce, giuen of Christe as it
+ware for a wracke boorde, wherby men are preserued fro drowninge. Eche
+Christian oughte vndoubtedly to beleue that this consisteth in foure
+poinctes. To saie, in Repentaunce of our sinnes, Canonicaile confession,
+Absolucion, and Satisfaction, or amendes. Firste let him sorowe, not with a
+lighte forthinckinge, but with a moste earneste and bittre repentaunce in
+the botome of his conscience: for the puritie and innocencie that he had
+gotten eyther by baptisme or the benefite of former repentaunce, and nowe
+hathe eftsones loste, and forgone throughe sinne. And let him hope with
+this repentaunce, to be reconciled to the fauour of God againe. And let him
+humbly, and truly with his owne mouthe, confesse to a wise prieste, in the
+steade of God: all those offences wherwith he knoweth him selfe to haue
+loste his innocencie and clennesse, and to haue prouoked the wrathe of GOD
+againste him selfe. And let him assuredly beleue that the same prieste,
+hath power giuen him of Christe (as beinge his vienre, or deputie on
+earthe) to absolue him of all his sinnes. Finally, for satisfaction or
+amendes making for the faulte: lette him not with grudginge, but
+chierfully, and gladly doe, what so euer he shalbe commaunded. Beleuing
+with vndoubted faith, that he is absolued, and quyte of all, assone as the
+priest in dewe forme of wordes, hath pronounced the absolucion.
+
+The seuenth, and the laste Sacrament is the laste enoynting, by an oyle
+that is made to this vse, by the bishope in euery diocesse, by an yerely
+custome vpon Maundy Thursdaie, like as the chrismatory oyle is. And this by
+the precepte of sainte Iames the Apostle, and by the ordinaunce of Felix,
+the fourthe Pope after Sainte Peter: was giuen only to them that laie in
+dyeng, being of full age, and requyring it. Thei vse to enoynte with a
+prescripte fourme of wordes; and with often inuocacion of sainetes: those
+partes of the bodie, wher our fiue wittes or senses: the hearing, seyng,
+smelling, tasting and touching, beare moste stroke, and with whiche man is
+iudged chiefely to sinne. That is, the eares, the eyes, the nosthrilles,
+the mouthe, the handes, and the fete. Whereby the holy fathers would vs to
+beleue, that there was not onely purchased cleane forgiuenesse of all
+smaller offences, or venialle sinnes: but also either presente recouerie,
+or a riper and gentler deathe. All the feastes and holydaies, throughout
+the yere, which the churche hath commaunded to be obserued and kept:
+beginne at the Aduente, or approache of Christe our Lorde. Whiche Peter the
+Apostle instituted to be obserued in Decembre, with fasting and praier,
+thre wiekes and a haulfe before Christemas, when we close vp the last.
+viii. daies of that moneth, with greate ioye and feaste. Thei deuided the
+yere into two and fiuetie wekes, and xii. seueral monthes. The monethes
+commonly into xxx. daies. The firste daye of Ianuary the churche recordeth
+how Christe was circumcised acordinge to Moyses lawe. The iii. daye aftre,
+howe he was worshipped of the thre Sages, with thre sondry presentes: and
+howe beinge baptissed of Iohn in Iordaine the floude, he laide the
+foundacion of the newe Lawe. The seconde of Februarie, how his mother
+vnspotted, obeyeng the maner of her country: brought hym into the temple,
+and suffred her self to be purified or clensed, whiche we calle churching
+of childe. In memorie wherof the churche vseth that daye, solempne
+procession, and halowing of candles, The fiue and twentieth of Marche, how
+the aungel brought woorde to the virgin Marie, that Christ shoulde be borne
+of her, being conceyued in her wombe; by the ouershadowing of the holy
+ghoste. At the whiche time they willed vs to faste the fourtie daies that
+he fasted him selfe, being with vs vppon earth, and to renewe the
+remembraunce of his passion, and deathe, which he willingly susteined to
+deliuer vs fro the yoke and bondage of the deuell. The laste day of that
+faste, which oftentimes falleth in Aprille, to celebrate the highest featte
+in althe yere: in remembraunce howe he ouer came deathe, descended into
+helle, vanquisshed the deuell, and retourned againe on liue, and appeared
+in glorious wyse vnto his scholers, or disciples. In Maye, how all those
+his scholers loking vpon him, he by his owne vertue and mighte, stied vp
+into the heauens. At the whiche time, by thordenaunce of saincte Mamerte,
+bishoppe of Vienne: there be made ganginges with the lesse Letanies from
+one Churche to another, all Christendome ouer. In Iune, and somtime in
+Maie, how the holy ghoste, promised to the disciples, giuen from aboue,
+appered to them like glowing tongues: and gaue them to vndrestande, and to
+speake the tonges of al nacions. Theight daie folowing, Trinitie Sondaie.
+The fiueth daie aftre that, how Christe in his laste supper, for a
+continualle remembraunce of himself, instituted the moste holsome
+Sacramente of his bodie and bloud, vndre the fourme of breade and wine
+leauyng it to be sene and eaten of his. The fiuetenth of Iuly, how the
+blessed Apostles, acordyng as thei ware commaunded, the twelueth yere aftre
+the Ascension of their Master into heauen: wente their waies into the
+vniuersalle worlde, to Preache vnto all people. The departyng of Christes
+mother out of this life, the fiuetenth daie of Auguste. And her Natiuitie,
+theight of Septembre. And thone and twentie of Nouembre, how she from, thre
+yeres of age (at the whiche tyme she was presented to the temple) vntill
+she was mariage able, remained there seruing God stil a peace. And theight
+of Decembre, how she was of her parentes begotten, that longe afore had
+bene barreine. The second daie of Iulie, how Elisabethe passyng the
+Mounteines, visited her kindeswoman.
+
+There ware also certeine holie daies appoincted to the xii. Apostles. To
+certeine Martyres, Confessours, and Virgines As the fowre and twentieth of
+Februarie to saincte Matthie. To saincte Marke the Euangeliste, the xxv. of
+Aprille. Vpon the whiche daie, Gregorie ordeined the greate Letanies to be
+songe. The firste of Maie is hallowed for Philippe and Iames the more. The
+xxix. of Iune, for Petre and Paule: and the xxiiii. of the same, for the
+Natiuitie of S. Ihon Baptiste. The xxv. of Iuly, for Iames the lesse. For
+Bartholomewe the fowre and twentie of August. For Mathewe, the one and
+twentie of Septembre. And the eight and twentie of Octobre, for Simon and
+Iude. The last of Nouembre, for S. Andrewe. The one and twentie of
+Decembre, for saincte Thomas. And the vii. and twentie of thesame moneth
+for Ihon the Euangeliste. The daie before, for Stephin the firste Martire.
+And the daie aftre for the Innocentes. The tenth of August for sainct
+Laurence. And the thre and twentie of Aprille, for saincte George. Of all
+the Confessours, there are no moe that haue holidaies appoincted, but S.
+Martine and saincte Nicholas. The firste, on the eleuenth of Nouembre: and
+the other the sixteth of Decembre. Katherine the virgine, the fiue and
+twentie of Nouembre, and Marie Magdalene the twentie and two of Iuly. There
+is also vndre the name of saincte Michael alone, the xxix. of Septembre: a
+holy daie for all blessed Angelles. And one other in commune for all the
+sainctes, and chosen of GOD, the firste of Nouembre.
+
+Thei would also that euery seuenthe daie, should be hallowed of the
+Christianes, by the name of Sondaie, as the Iewes doe their Sabboth:
+restyng from all worldly woorke, and beyng onely occupied with praising of
+GOD, and the deuine Seruice in the Churched. To learne by the Priestes
+preachyng, the Gospelle and the commaundementes of our faith. And by what
+meanes so euer we thinke in our conscience we haue prouoked the wrathe of
+God against us all the wieke afore: that, this daie to amende, to sette
+cliere, and aske pardone for. In time past euery Thursdaie also was kepte
+as the Sondaie. But because we might sieme therein, somewhat to gratifie
+the Heathen (whiche that daie kepte solempne holie daie, to Iupiter their
+Idolle) it was laied doune againe. More ouer the clerkes and the people,
+vsed bothe Thursdaie and Sondaie before Masse, to go rounde aboute the
+Churche a Procession, and the Prieste, to sprinckle the people with holy
+watre. Agapitus instituted the one and the other. The Thursdaie, in
+remembraunce of Christes Ascencion, and the Sondaie, of his glorious
+Resurrection: which we celebrate fro Sondaie to Sondaie continually, ones
+euery eight daies. The night afore euery ordenary holidaie or feastefull
+daie: the whole clergie, and the people, ware bounde to kiepe Vigile in
+euery churche. That is to saie, to wake all nighte, in deuine seruice and
+praier. But vpon consideracion of many slaunderous crimes and offences,
+that ware by diuers naughtie and malicious persones committed, by the
+oportunitie of the darke: this maner was taken awaie, and ordeined that the
+daie before the feaste, should be fasted, whiche yet kiepeth stille the
+name of Vigile. The fathers decreed that the churche in the whole yere
+should renue the memorie of fiue thynges.
+
+Fro the Sondaie called Septuagesima (because there are seuentie daies,
+betwiene that and the octaues of Easter) thei would vs to renue the memorie
+of Christes Fasting, Passion, Death and Bewrialle. The miserable falle also
+of our first parentes, and those extreme errours of mankinde, by the whiche
+thei ware ledde awaie fro the knowledge and worshippe of one verie GOD: to
+the wicked supersticion and honour of Idolles and deuelles. And further,
+the greuous and intollerable bondage that the people of Israeli suffred
+vndre the Pharao of Egipte. Vpon whiche consideracion, the bookes of
+Genesis and Exodus be redde in the seruice of the churche. Whiche sheweth
+then in all her demeanour, and appareilyng, heauinesse and sorowe.
+
+From the octaues of Easter, to the octaues of Whitsontide, Christes
+Resurrection, and Ascencion, with the commyng of the holy Ghoste. And
+together with that, the redempcion, reconclliacion, and atonement of
+mankinde with God the father, throughe Iesus Christe: and the restoryng
+againe of the children of Israeli, to the lande of beheste. Wherein was
+prefigured our reconciliacion and redempcion aforesaid. For that cause is
+all the seruice out of the newe Testament, and al thinges done with ioie
+and gladnes.
+
+From the octaues of Whitsontide, till Aduente, xx. wiekes space, and more,
+thei would haue to bee celebrated the conuersation of Christ here in the
+worlde, with his miracles and woorkes of wondre. And ouer and beside that,
+the longe pilgrimage, that mankinde, by longe reuolucion maketh, from one
+generacion to another, from the tyme of our redempcion, saluacion, and
+sauing, vntill the laste daie of time. Wherefore duryng this while, vpon
+consideracion of the diverse happe and hasarde, wherwith the Churche is
+tossed, like a Shippe in the troubled Seas, she neither greatly reioiceth,
+ne sorroweth, but redeth grcate chaunge of bookes, oute of the olde and
+newe Testamente: to the ende she maie walke the warelier, and the bettre
+wijnde her self out of the stormes, that are ready to assaile her.
+
+From Aduente to Christemas, to remembre the tyme from Moses, to the commyng
+of Messias. In the whiche mankinde certefied of saluacion, bothe by the
+lawe and the Prophetes, awaited with moste earneste desires for his
+comming, and the kingdome that he shold haue. Wherefore thei ordeined that
+the Prophecies should be redde, and fasting exercised. That the churche the
+bettre enstructed, and abled by these, mighte the worthelier receiue the
+Birthe daie of Christ her Lorde (whiche euer falleth the fowerth wieke
+aftre) and from thens holde on with feaste, and continuall gladnesse vntill
+Septuagessima. Reioisyng that he was now come: whiche should bee the
+sauluiour of the worlde. Their oratories Temples, or places of praier
+(whiche we calls Churches) might not be built without the good will of the
+Bisshoppe of the Diocese. And when the Timbre was redy to be framed, and
+the foundacion digged: it behoued; them to send for the Bishoppe, to
+hallowe the firste corner stone of the foundacion, and to make the signe of
+the crosse thervpon, and to laie it, and directe, it iuste Easte and Weste.
+And then might the Masons sette vpon the reste, but not afore. This Churche
+did thei vse to builde, aftre the facion of a crosse, and not vnlike the
+shape of a manne. The Chauncelle (in the whiche is conteined the highe
+Altare and the Quiere) directe full into the East, representeth the heade.
+And therefore ought to be made somwhat rounde, and muche shorter then the
+body of the churche. And yet vpon respecte that the heade is the place for
+the eyes, it ought to be of more lighte, and to bee separate with a
+particion, in the steade of a necke, from the body of the Churche. This
+particion the Latine calleth Cancelli; and out of that cometh our terme,
+Chauncelle. On eche side of this chauncelle peraduenture (for so fitteth it
+beste) should stand a Turret, as it ware for two eares. And in these the
+Belles to be hanged, to calle the people to Seruice, by daie and by night.
+Vndre one of these Turretes, is there commonly a voulte, whose doore
+openeth into the quiere. And in this are laid vp, the hallowed vesselles
+and ornamentes, and other vtensiles of the church. We calle it a vestrie.
+The other parte oughte so to be fitted, that hauing as it ware on eche side
+an arme, the reste maye resemble the bodye with the fete stretched in
+breadthe, and in lengthe. On eche side of the bodye the pillers to stonde.
+Vpon whose coronettes or heades the vaulte or rophe of the churche maye
+reste. And to the foote beneth, aulters to be ioyned.
+
+Those aulters to be ordrely alway couered with two aulter clothes, and
+garnisshed with the crosse of Christe, or some little cofre of reliques. At
+eche ende a canlesticke: and a booke towarde the myddes. The walles to be
+parieted without, and within, and diuersly paincted. That thei also should
+haue in euery parisshe a faire sounde stone, made holowe and fitte to holde
+water: in the whiche the water consecrate for baptisme, may be kept for the
+christening of children. Vpon the right hande of the highe aulter, that
+ther should be an almorie, either cutte into the walle, or framed vpon it:
+in the whiche thei woulde haue the Sacrament of the Lordes bodye, the holy
+oyle for the sicke, and the Chrismatorie, alwaie to be locked. Furthermore
+thei woulde that ther should be a pulpite in the middes of the churche,
+wherein the prieste maye stonde vpon Sondaies and holidayes, to teache the
+people those thinges that it behoueth them to knowe. The chauncelle to
+serue onely for the priestes, and clerkes. The rest of the temporalle
+multitude to be in the body of the church. Separate notwithstonding, the
+men on the ryghte side, and the women, on the lefte. And eche of them to be
+sobre and honest in apparelle and behauour. Whatsoeuer is contrary to good
+facion or Christiane religion, with greate dilligence to shonne it. It was
+the maner in the first churche, both among men and women, to lette their
+heare growe, to shewe out their naked skinne, and very litle or nothing to
+diffre in apparelle. Sainct Peter put first ordre, that women should couer
+their heades, and menne rounde their heare, and either of them to go in
+seueralle and sondrye apparelle. Moreouer that to euery churche, shold be
+laid out a churchyarde, of the grounde adioyning, in the whiche all
+Christen mennes bodies mighte indifferently bebewried. The same to be
+consecrate, or halowed by the bishoppe, and to enioye all the priuilegies
+that the churche may enioye.
+
+The funeralle for the deade, thei kepe not in euery place ylike. Some
+mourne and kiepe dirige and Masse seuen daies continualle together, some
+ix. some xxx. or fourtye some, fiuetie, and a hundred, and other a whole
+yere, wrapped vp in blacke. The counseile of Toledo ordeined that the corps
+beinge firste wasshed, and then wrapped vp in a shiete, shoulde be caried
+forthe with singing by menne of his owne condicion or sorte, clerkes by
+clerkes, and laye menne of laye menne. And aftre what time the priest hath
+sensed the corps, throwen holy water vppon it, and said certeine prayers,
+to laye it into the graue with the face vpwarde, and the heade into the
+Weaste. Then to throwe in the earth again, and in token that ther is a
+Christian ther bewried, to sette vp a crosse of wodde, garnisshed with
+yvie, cipres, or laurelle. These be the ordres and facions of the
+Christiane religion.
+
+
+FINIS.
+
+
+
+
+Imprinted at London
+
+by
+
+John Kyngston and Henri Sutton.
+
+The xxii daye of December
+
+Anno Domini
+
+MDLV.
+
+
+
+THE CONQUEST OF THE GRAND CANARIES,
+
+MADE THIS LAST SUMMER BY THREESCORE AND THIRTEENE SAILE OF SHIPPES,
+
+SENT FORTH AT THE COMMAND AND DIRECTION OF THE GENERAL OF THE VNITED
+PROUINCES,
+
+TO THE COAST OF SPAINE
+
+AND THE CANARIE-ISLES:
+
+WITH THE TAKING OF A TOWNE IN THE ILE OF GOMERA
+
+AND THE SUCCESSE OF PART OF THE SAIDE FLEETE IN THEIR RETURNED HOMEWARD.
+
+WHICH SET SAILE FOR SPAINE THE 25 OF MAIE, AND RETURNED HOME
+
+THE 10 OF SEPTEMB. 1599.
+
+At London:
+
+PRINTED BY P.S. FOR W. ASPLEY, DWELLING IN PAULES CHURCHYARD
+AT THE SIGNE OF THE TYGERS HEAD.
+
+1599.
+
+
+NOTE
+
+The following very curious and interesting pamphlet was not included in the
+edition of 1598-1600. It was, however, inserted in the fifth volume of the
+small edition, 4to., of 1812, and is here transposed to that part of the
+Voyages relating to the Canaries, etc. Originally printed for "W. Apsley,
+dwelling in. Paules Church-Yard, at the signe of the Tygers Head" in 1599,
+it is of the utmost rarity, and for that reason I have thought it right to
+give the original title-page.--_E. G._
+
+
+
+
+A TRUE REPORT
+
+OF A VOYAGE MADE THIS LAST SUMMER, BY A FLEETE OF 73. SHIPPES,
+
+SENT FORTH AT THE COMMANDE AND DIRECTION OF THE STATES GENERALL OF THE
+VNITED PROUINCES,
+
+TO THE COAST OF SPAINE AND THE CANARIE-ISLES.
+
+Tuesday the 25. daie of Maie the wind being Northe and Northe-east, we in
+the fleete of Roterdam, being 20. saile of ships, the sunne beeing
+Southe-west and by West, came before Flushing, and ankered neere vnto
+Cleiburch; our generall at his comming found the fleetes of North-Holland,
+and Zealand ready.
+
+Wednesday, the 26. daie wee remained there at anchor.
+
+Thursday the 27. daie of Maie, we tooke into our ships (by the Generals
+commandement) two gentlemen and foure souldiours.
+
+Friday the 28. of May 1599, the wind being northerly, we waied our anchors,
+and sailed from the Weelings with 73. ships, hauing faire weather, setting
+our course West, Southwest. Wee had 3. Admirals in this fleete, whereof the
+chiefe Admirall was the ship of William Derickson Cloper, wherein was
+embarked the honourable gentleman Peter Van Doest being generall of the
+fleete. This ship was called the Orange, carying in her top a flag of
+Orange colour, vnder whose squadron was certaine Zelanders, with some South
+and North Hollanders; Ian Geerbranston caried the white flag vnder whom the
+Zelanders and ships of the Maze were appointed. And Cornelius Gheleinson of
+Vlyshing wore in his maine top the blew flag, vnder whom were appointed
+certaine ships of the Maze with some North Hollanders. Thus were wee
+deuided into sondry squadrons, but to what ende it was so done, it is to
+me, and many others vnknowne.
+
+Saturday the 29. of Maie, hauing sight of Callis, the ships lay to the lee
+ward, and staied for the rereward. The Lord generall shot off a peece, and
+afterward hung out the princes flag, in signe that the captains shold come
+aboord him, presently al the captains entred into their boates, and rowed
+aboord the General, at which time were two pinnaces sent out of the fleet,
+whereof one was the Generals Pinnace, but vnto what place they sailed, wee
+were altogether ignorant. And when the boates rowed from the Generall, some
+of them went aboord the victualers, and tooke out of them certaine
+fire-workes. The sunne Southwest, the Generall discharged an other peece of
+ordinance, and put out the Princes flag, wherevpon presently the captaines
+went aboord him, and when our captaine returned, he had in his hande a
+letter closed vp, which hee brought from the Generall, and wee imagined
+that euery captaine had receiued the like, and then wee sailed altogether
+toward the higth of Blacknesse, where wee anchored, (which caused vs
+greatly to wonder, seeing we had so faire a wind,) but we perceiued
+afterwards, that this was done, to the ende we should there abide the
+coming of the great new ship of Amsterdam: for the soldiours which were
+appointed for her, were all with vs in a ship of our company.
+
+Sunday, the 30. of Maie, where lying at anchor al that night, the next
+morning we set saile altogether hauing the winde at North East, wee set our
+course West Northwest, the weather being faire. The same morning our
+captain read vnto vs those very articles which before had bin read vnto vs
+in the prince Mauritz his Court, and afterwards we altogether, and with one
+accord were sworne to the keeping of them: At noone we were neere vnto
+Beuersier hauing a fine gale out of the East Northeast, the euening was
+calme, the foremost shippes slacked their sailes, attending the comming in
+of the hindermost.
+
+Wednesday the ninth of Iune by the breake of daie we were hard vnder the
+coast of Spaine neere to Viuero, the winde being westerly, we sailed North
+West and by North, and North Northwest, the sunne Southwest and by West, we
+were ouer against the cape Ortegael, we sailed North West and by North, to
+fetch the wind: we were in 44. degrees 20. minuts, at twilight, we had the
+foresaid Cape of vs about 5. miles South West and by West.
+
+Thursday the 10. of Iune, the winde being at East South East, wee directed
+our course towardes the shore, and might certainly discerne that it was the
+coast of Ortegall, we bore in West Southwest directly with the land, and
+ordered all thinges as if we presently should haue had battell, and about
+noone wee had sight of the Groyne, namely the tower which standeth neere
+the Groine.
+
+Friday, the 11. of Iune, at the breake of day the winde being at North East
+and by East, sixe of our ships sailed forwarde South Southwest, meaning to
+enter the Groine, and there to learne how al things stood. The sunne being
+Southeast, Cape Prior was East from vs, wee bare South, presently after we
+spied two boates comming out of Veroli to learn what ships we were, the
+rather because that the day before they had seen our fleete at sea: we
+sailed by the wind, and lay in the wind to stay for their comming. The one
+doubting vs woulde not come neere vs, the other boat also durst not approch
+neere vs; wee called to one of the Spaniardes, saying wee came from
+Hamborch laden with cordage and other goods, desiring and praying him to
+let vs haue a Pilot to bring vs into the Groine, wherewith the boate came
+aboord vs, so that by our great haste, and policie we got one Spaniard, the
+other which remained in the boate would not come into our ship, but
+presently thrust off their boate, making all possible speede to get from
+vs. Hauing nowe gotten this Spaniarde, hee was presently deliuered into the
+handes of the Generall, who confessed that there were about 4000.
+souldiours come into the towne, with certaine horsemen, 36. waggons with
+money, and 300. pipes of wine, to furnish the Spanish fleet, that he lay
+the night past in the Groine, and was the Kings seruant. [Sidenote: The
+whole fleet cometh before the Groine.] The sun South South-West, we came
+with fleet our whole fleete before the Groine, where wee found the great
+newe ship of Amsterdam vnder the Towne.
+
+At 12. 13. and 10. fadome we cast anchor, so that wee might behold much
+people both on the shoare and vpon the wals of the town: from the castle
+and town both, they shot mightely with their great ordinance into our
+fleet, so that there were aboue 200. cannon shot discharged, wherewith some
+of our ships were hit, but not one man lost, and little hurt done
+otherwise. There lay an other castle East ward from the towne, which shot
+also most terribly, but altogether vncertainly, for we know not that they
+touched any one ship more then Moy Lambert, which was greatly, to bee
+wondered at, seeing our fleete lay so thicke together, and so neere vnder
+the castle. There laie hard vnder the castle 12. great Gallions, with some
+French ships, which also nowe and then shot among our fleete, but they lay
+so neere the walles that wee could do them no harme at all. The Lord
+Generall worthy of al praise, wisely be thinking himselfe, caused all his
+captaines and counsell to come aboorde him, that they might together
+conferre vpon this busines, and what meanes might best bee found, to inuade
+the towne and the enemy, but they concluded not to meddle with the land
+there: seeing the enemy was there, strong vpon his guard, and that 5.
+weekes past both from Amsterdam, and by a French man, they had knowledge of
+our comming; by reason of the calme, wee were constrained to towe out our
+ships with the boates in dispite of al their shot, thus we parted from the
+Groyne without profit, or effecting of any thing, leauing the Papists of
+Groyne as wee founde them, from thence (the winde being at South Southwest)
+wee bent our course towarde Cape Saint Vincent, meaning to goe to Saint
+Lucars, hoping to fal vpon them at vnawares, and ere they looked for vs.
+
+Saturday the 12. of Iune, hauing got a fine gale we ran along the coast of
+Galicia, at noone wee were before the Iland of Cesarian, and set our course
+towards Cape Finister.
+
+Sunday the 13. of Iune, the lorde Generall gaue sharpe commandement by his
+letters, forbidding al men aboorde the ships to vse any play, with tables,
+cards, or dice, either for money, or for pastime, or vpon credit.
+
+Munday the 14. of Iune, the wind blew so harde out of the North, that wee
+could not beare our topsailes with our forecourse which sailed South, the
+sunne was southward we had Port a Porte of vs, being in 41. degrees and 20
+minuts.
+
+Tuesday the 15. of Iune, as soone as day appeared, we had sight of Cape
+Roxent, and then we sailed making small way, staying for the comming
+together of the fleete: the wind as before we sailed South Southwest, and
+were in 36 degrees.
+
+Wednesday the 16. of Iune, towardes the euening we had sight of two strange
+ships eastward of our fleete, certain of our ships made towards them and
+tooke them, the one was an English man of war; the other was a Spanish
+barke with three missens: at his comming before the Generall, he said, he
+had already sent 2. prises into Englande, and woulde now with this prise
+returne home: for his victuals were almost spent.
+
+Thursday the 17. of Iune, it was very still and calme weather.
+
+Friday the 18. of Iune, the wind being at North Northeast, we sailed South
+Southwest. The Lord Generall caused all the Captaines with the Pilots to
+come aboord him: demanding of them which of them was best acquainted in the
+Isles of Canaria: and further, by what meanes, they might conquer and force
+the said Ilands, and land their people. And about noone the captaines were
+chosen and appointed which shoulde commande on lande. The Generall gaue out
+newe ensignes, to the number of 9. or 10. according to the number of the
+ships. The Lord Generall appointed to each new captaine, an Ancient bearer,
+a Lieutenant, and other officers, with 130. souldiers and mariners, and
+instructions how euery one of them should gouerne himself on the land.
+
+Saturday the 19. of Iune, the Generall commanded that the captaines should
+deliuer out victuals but twice a day, to wit, 6. and 6. to a messe: for 6.
+men, 5. cans of beere of Roterdams measure euery day, 5. pounde of breade
+and no more; a cheese of 6. l. euery weeke, one pound of butter weekely,
+likewise pease, beanes, or Otemeale twise a day, according to the order.
+Captaine Harman, and captaine Pije, had each of them commission to commande
+on the land as captaines ouer two companies of saylers, each company
+containing 130. men. Harman Thunesson was appointed Ancient to captaine
+Henricke Pije, and de Blomme Ancient to captaine Hendricke Hertman. The
+ancients were deliuered the same day.
+
+The 20. 21. 22. daies, wee sailed South Southwest, the wind being
+northerly.
+
+Wednesday the 23. of Iune, the wind was North Northeast. The Generall
+commaunded all the captaines both for the sea and land to come aboord him,
+where it was ordained and determined how the battell should be ordered,
+after they were landed. According to the latitude, we found our selues to
+be 36. miles from great Canaria.
+
+Thursday the 24. of Iune, we ranne our foresaid course. The sun being West
+Northwest, we sawe the land East and by South off vs: wee sailed East and
+by South, and with great labour and diligence bore all that might with the
+land.
+
+Friday The 25. of Iune, we continued our course to the land for our assured
+knowledge thereof, and perceiued it to be Lancerot; we saw also a small
+land (which lay between both) called Allegrania, and also the Iland
+Forteuentura, which is 24. miles great, afterward we sailed Southwest along
+the Coast of Forteuentura, which is a lande that hath very high hils.
+[Sidenote: The whole Netherlandish fleet commeth before the Island and town
+of Grand Canaria.] The sun Southwest, we were past the Iland Forteuentura,
+and were sailed out of sight thereof, running as yet Southwest: about ii. a
+clocke in the afternoone wee had sight of the Iland of great Canaria, for a
+while wee kept our way, but when the Generall was assured that it was the
+grand Canaria, wee all tooke in our sailes, and lay to the lee ward, and so
+remained vntill it was past midnight, then wee set saile againe and made to
+the lande, our course westwarde.
+
+Saturday the 26. of Iune, in the morning the whole fleet sailed West
+directly to the land the winde North and by East, and made all thinges
+ready to land; being now neere the shore, the whole fleete let fall their
+anchors harde by the great castle, which lieth North Northwest from the
+town, from whence they began to shoot mightily against the ships. The lord
+Generall and the vize Admirall with the other ships that had the greatest
+ordenance, anchored close vnder the castle, and for a certain time they
+plied each other with their great shot; the Generals main mast, and his
+missen mast were shot thorow, and his vize Admirall, namely the great new
+ship of Amsterdam was shot thorow 6. or 7. times; so that some of the
+souldiours and maryners also were slaine before they entered their long
+boates to rowe to the shore: But the ships for their parts, had so well
+bestowed their shot on the castle, that they of the castle began to faint,
+wherby they discharged not so thicke and often as before. Our men rowed to
+the land in the long boates, euery one full of souldiours, and the ships
+which could not discharge their ordenance against the castle, bent them
+against the shore, (for the enemy had three brasse peeces lying vpon the
+strand) and many people were there gathered together where our souldiours
+shoulde land. Nowe as soone as the Generall with the most parte of the long
+boates were come together, they all at one instant rowed toward the shore,
+maintaining for a while the fight on both sides with their shot. But the
+General perceiuing that the enemie woulde not abandon the place, with a
+valiant courage made to the shore, and altogether leaping into the water vp
+to the middle, maintained the fight with the enemy. Notwithstanding the
+enemy no lesse couragious, would not yet leaue the strond, so that some of
+our souldiours and mariners lost their liues before the enemy would retire:
+for the place was discommodious, and hard to lande, but most of the enemy
+were slaine, to the number of 30. or 36. and the Gouernor his right leg was
+shot off, sitting on his horse. The lord General Peter von der Doest
+leaping first on land, was thrust in his leg with a pike, and had in his
+body 4. wounds more, and was in great danger to haue lost his life but that
+one of the souldiours slewe the Spaniarde which meant to haue don it; but
+his wounds were of small moment, and his ancient bearer was slain with a
+shot, the Lieutenant Generall was shot in his throte, captaine Kruye in the
+heade, 4. soldiours were slain, and 15. hurt in the generals pinnace before
+they could come to land: But when our people now with one courage all
+together rushed vpon the enemie, (leauing their ordenance behinde them,)
+they forsooke the strond, and ran together into the town, carying with them
+their Gouernour, whose leg was shot off, and he was a knight of the order
+of the crosse, and leauing behind them 36. deade carcases on the strond,
+were presently by our people ransacked, and our dead people buried. Our men
+now hauing won the strond, put themselues presently in battell ray; the
+empty boates returned to the ships, but after our people had taken the
+strond, the castle did neuer shoot shot. [Sidenote: Twenty foure companies
+strong of Netherlanders.] After the boates were returned aboord, presently
+they rowed againe to the shore full of soldiours; our people being all
+landed, they which for the first time had commandement, set vs in 7.
+troupes, or battalions, being xxiiii. companies strong, of soldiours and
+Mariners, with twentie foure Auncientes. At which time we marched a little
+forward twenty one a brest, and standing altogether in battell; [Sidenote:
+The first castle taken.] suddainly three mariners came running to the
+Generall, (which had bin at the castle) telling him that the Spaniards
+desired to deliuer him the castle, so their liues and goods might be saued:
+the generall with some of the captaines and souldiours went first thither,
+and presently the castle was deliuered into his possession, hoping on his
+pitty and mercy, and leauing behind them all the great ordenance, namely 9.
+peeces of brasse, and 6. Iron peeces, and also al their weapons. In the
+castle were about 80. Spaniards, some cannoniers, some soldiors, and some
+people of the countrey, for the defence thereof: beside powder, shot and
+match accordingly, for the artillery, and also thirty small peeces or
+caliuers. Also wee founde 58. prisoners, the rest were slaine with shot in
+the fury, and some were run away. The prisoners (which our people had taken
+in the road with two Barkes, and a ship sunke with our ordenance, as they
+lay all 3. hard before the castle) were sent altogether aboorde the ships
+except 3. of the principals which the lord General reserued by him, to the
+end he might the better knowe the state of all things. Presently 80.
+soldiours were sent into the castle, who tooke down the kings flag, and set
+vp the princes colours. At the same instant two Negros were brought to the
+General, which were fetched out of the mountains, they said that they had
+lien there a sleepe, and knew nothing of any matter. But now when it began
+to wax dark, we marched altogether a great way towards the town, 4.
+companies of soldiors approached hard vnder the towne, and other 4.
+companies had the rereward: those of the Maze, with the Amsterdammers
+remained a pretty way from the town, vnder the hils; and the Zealanders,
+with the North Hollanders lay neere the waters side, so wee remained al
+that night in order of battell.
+
+Sunday the 27. of Iune, after we had now stood al night in battel order,
+early in the morning we marched with al our 7. troupes: hard vnder the town
+of Canarie, where we remained a while in that order: but because they of
+the castle (which lieth to the towne) shot so mightily among vs; 2. of the
+troupes retired vnder a hill, where we were a little freede from the
+castle: for while our people stood imbattailed before the town, the castle
+did vs great hurt, for sometimes they shot fiue or sixe men with one shot,
+ere we could entrench our selues before the castle: but after they
+perceiued that our people had made a small trench against the shot of the
+castle, they placed on the hill fiue or sixe small peeces of brasse called
+falconets (which shoote about a pounde of pouder) and sometimes they shot
+boules of wood, wherewith in the beginning they slew manie of our people:
+so aduantagiouslie had they placed their ordenaunce to shoot among vs. Ten
+or twelue of our Souldiours ranne vp the hill, whereof the enemy tooke one,
+and presently cut him in foure peeces. Our people seeing that they so
+tyranouslie dealte with them, about the euening tooke a Spaniarde prisoner,
+and vsed him after the same maner. The lorde, Generall perceiuing that many
+men were slaine with the ordenance, caused fiue peeces of brasse to bee
+brought from the castle which we had taken the daie before, and towarde the
+euening we beganne to make a battery, and the same euening brought into it
+three peeces, whereof two were placed presentlie to play vppon the Castle
+and the hill; but that euening were but fiue or sixe shotte made. While
+that our men made the batterie, and planted or placed the ordenaunce, the
+enemy placed his ordenance in counter-battery: and before our battery could
+be finished, and the ordenance placed, many of our men were shot, among
+whom Peter vanden Eynde commissioner, had his leg shot off, whereof he died
+within three daies after. After that it was dark, al they which lay there
+before the towne were againe set in order of battel, 15. on a ranke, and so
+remained all that night.
+
+The 28. of Iune, early in the morning euery man retired to his quarter, and
+then were two peeces more brought to the battery, which also were presently
+placed on the Rampire, and so wee began to shoot against the castle with 4.
+peeces, and with the fifth we plaied vpon the small ordenance which lay
+vpon the hils. The enemie in the castle laid many sackes of wooll, and
+placed many tonnes or barrels filled with stones vpon the castle walles
+supposing thereby to make some little defence from our ordenance; but when
+an Iron bullet chanced to hit the barrels so filled with stones, it did
+them mightie hurt, for the stones would scatter maruailouslie abroad,
+whereby many of them that were in the castle were slaine. Our men hauing
+now with their shot almost abated the force of the castle, 4. companies
+marched vp the hils, intending to beate the enemy from thence, which lay
+there with the ordenance. But the enemy perceiuing himselfe to bee
+assaulted on all partes, (for most of the ordenance of the castle were
+dismounted and made vnprofitable, the gate of the towne set one fire by the
+Generals commandement) about noone they forsooke both the castle, hill, and
+town, and with all their wiues, children, money and Iewels, and all other
+things that they coulde carry with them, fled into the mountaines. Which
+when our men perceiued, they put themselues in order of battle xv. in a
+ranke. [Sidenote: The second castle and town of Grand Canaria taken.] The
+lord Generall seeing the Spaniards shamefullie to flie, caused 2. ladders
+belonging to the enemies, to be brought out of a church which stood without
+the towne, whereof the one was too shorte, notwithstanding himselfe with
+one of the ladders climed vp the walles, one man at once followed, and by
+this meanes entered the towne ouer the wals. About noone some of our men
+ran into the castle without any reencounter: the enemy had vndermined the
+gate, but as we approched the wall, it tooke fire, but not one of our
+people was therewith hurt. They had also skattered powder in sundrie
+places, but our men themselues did fire the same: and as soone as our
+people were entred the castle, the kinges colours were taken downe, and the
+prince of Oranges set vp, and we found fiue peeces of brasse therein. When
+wee were all entered into the towne, we put our selues againe into order of
+battell 15. in a ranke in a low ground within the towne: and the souldiours
+which entered the towne by the hils side, brought to the Generall a man of
+Flushing, which they had taken out of prison: as soone as the Generall sawe
+him, he went presently with him to the prison, accompanied with some of our
+captaines, where they found 36. prisoners, which presently were discharged.
+And further they declared, that the Spaniards had taken with them 2.
+prisoners into the mountaines, which were condemned to be burnt, the one
+was an English man, the other a Dutchman, which had lien in the holy house.
+Thus with the helpe of God about noone, wee won the great Iland of Canaria,
+and the town of Allegona, battered with their owne artillery, and skaled
+with their owne ladders. Towards the euening wee were quartered in the
+housen, those wherein the Generall was, were by writing freed, that no man
+might take out any goods, in the rest euery one might go, and take what
+pillage he could find: but the Spaniards had caried all the best things
+with them into the mountaines, and in the euening all our people entered
+the town. Euery captaine with his company were seuerallie lodged, but yet
+we appointed watch on the hils, as well as in the towne, for the enemy
+shewed himselfe often vpon the hils, whereby we were forced to keep very
+good watch.
+
+The 29. of Iune, this morning some of the mariners climed vp the hils, but
+the enemy (to whom the passage were better known, then to our people)
+suddainly set vpon them, and killed 20. of them. Towards the euening some
+300. of our Soldiours marched towardes a small castle which lay halfe an
+houres iourney from the towne: but the enemy seeing our people to approch,
+forsooke the place and fled into the mountaines, our men being ascended,
+they founde in the castle three brasse peeces: and after they had appointed
+a Corporall with certaine soldiours to keepe the watch, the rest returned
+to the citty. The same night the Spaniards tooke one of our soldiors
+appointed for a forlorne Sentinel, whom they presently put to the sword.
+
+The last of Iune, as soone as day appeared, wee began to cary the pillage
+aboorde belonging to the General, and captaines, as wines and other goods.
+About noone 3. cheefe men of the Spaniards came to our people, which kept
+watch on the hils with a flag of truce in their handes, which were straight
+brought before the Generall, and within a while after, there were 2. more
+brought vnto him; but after they had bin a while with him they departed
+again towards the mountaines: and in the euening came other 7. Spaniardes
+to our watch with a flag of truce, desired to speake with the Generall: but
+they were sente backe againe into the Mountaynes.
+
+The first day of Iuly, 1599. in the morning (our people being on the hils)
+2. friers with three other Spaniards came vnto vs, desiring to be brought
+to the Generall, which our men accomplished: but the General denied to
+talke with them, wherefore they were presently sent backe againe from
+whence they came, for we were then labouring to send the goods a shipboord.
+Also at that instant was a sermon in the great church of great Canaria,
+made by the preacher of Ysilmond with great deuotion, and giuing thanks
+vnto God for our great victory, desiring him that it would please him daily
+to increase the same, to the honour of his name: at which Sermon the Lorde
+Generall was present with foure hundred persons.
+
+The second of Iuly 1599. wee were forbidden by sounde of the drum that no
+man should go beyond the forelorne sentenell placed on the Mountaines: and
+to sende backe againe into the hilles all such Spaniardes which came with a
+flag of truce, to speake with the Generall, and to put all such to the
+sworde as came with weapons. One of our Pinnaces tooke a fisherman fishing
+vnder the Ilande Forteauentura, wherin were 7. Spaniardes, which were
+brought before the General, and prently committed to prison.
+
+The 3. of Iuly in the morning we began to sende aboord our ships all the
+bels, ordenance and munition which the enemies had left behinde them, at
+which time 2000. soldiors were appointed to march to the hils, to seeke the
+enemy, which lay hid there with their wiues, children and goods, as they
+were fled out of the towne: and as soone as they approched each other, they
+began the fight on both sides with great courage, but the enemy was forced
+to flie, beeing better acquainted with the passages of the mountains then
+our people were. Our men returned with the losse of some 70. persons: among
+whom captain Iacques Dierickson with his boatson were slaine: the rest came
+into the towne againe into their appointed quarters.
+
+The 4. of Iuly, in the morning we began to burn the towne, and with pouder
+blewe vp the castle which lay by the towne, and we burned likewise all the
+cloisters and churches which were without the towne, lying neere the water
+side. The town burning, our people were set in battell, and in that order
+marched out of the towne, vntill they came to Gratiosa, the castle, which
+we first tooke, lying about halfe an houres iourney from the towne, where
+the long boates receiued our men, and caried them againe aboorde. Presently
+after wee were departed out of the towne, the enemy entered, endeuoring by
+all meanes possible to quench the fire. And while we were shipping our
+people, the enemy shewed him selfe sometimes 5. or 6. in a company, but
+they durst not approch vs. The rereward of our men being shipped, we put
+fire to the castle which we tooke first, and blew it vp: This done,
+captaine Quit imbarked himselfe also with his soldiours and pillage, which
+he had taken in the rode, for his ship wherein he was before was ready to
+sincke.
+
+The 5. of Iuly, lying in the roade, in the morning the Generall discharged
+two peeces of ordenance, and afterward put out 2. flags of the princes
+colours, thereby giuing to vnderstand, that all land captaines, and sea
+captaines also with one of their Pilots should resort to him, whereupon
+presentlie they all rowed aboorde the Generall; the Pilots which were best
+acquainted with the coast, were demanded by the Generall which were the
+weakest Ilands, and where they might most commodiouslie land: Towards the
+euening captaine Quyt his ship was fired, and suffered to driue towarde the
+strond. At which time a newe captaine was appointed to captaine Iaques
+Dirriksons ship aforesaide, who was slaine in the mountaines, namely
+captaine Kloyers Lieutenant. And the Generals Clarke of the band was
+appointed Lieuetenant to captain Kloyer.
+
+The 6. of Iuly, by reason of the contrary winds, and other inconueniences
+which happened at this present, and also because such ships, which before
+were sent to sea, and could not returne by reason of the contrary windes;
+we remained in the road, vnder the castle of Graciosa. About noone 4.
+Spaniards came out of the towne with a flag of truce to the strond,
+directly ouer against our ships, whereof 2. were brought aboorde the
+Generall in one of our long boates, (the other two with their flag of truce
+were left behinde on the stronde) which remained with the Generall vntil
+the euening, and then were set on shore, and so the 4. Spaniardes returned
+to the towne.
+
+The 7. day riding in the roade, in the morning 4. Spaniards with a flag of
+peace, came to the shore from the towne, directly ouer against our ships:
+the fleet seeing them, sent a long boate to the shore, and brought the said
+4. Spaniards aboord the General, these men brought with them the ransome of
+certaine Spaniards, which had deliuered vp the castle of Graciosa at the
+Generals pleasure, which were set to ransome, euery one according to his
+habilitie and office: and thus all the Spaniardes which were ransomed,
+together with the 4. Spaniardes which brought the ransoms, were set on
+shore with a long boat, and departed to the towne.
+
+The 8. day of Iuly, two howers after sun rising, the Generall with all the
+ships set saile, carying with him all the Spaniardes that were not
+ransomed, sailing along the coast of great Canaria; in which time Ian
+Cornelesson Zwartekeys departed this worlde, whose leg was shot off at the
+taking of the Iland of great Canaria. Hauing nowe sailed from the hight of
+the said Iland, which lay southerly from vs, we had sight of captaine
+Hertmans ship, and of 3. others which rode there at anchor: who, so soone
+as they perceiued our fleete, waied their anchors, and sailed along the
+coast with vs, which were the ships that the Generall had sent to sea.
+Sailing thus together vntill the sun was in the West, the wind began to
+rise more and more, so that we coulde not keep our direct course, but were
+forced to put to the Southwest of the great Iland of Canaria, where we
+anchored: wee had sight of the Iland Teneriffe, and of an other of the
+Ilands of Canaria, wherein is the hie mountaine called the Pyck. This hil
+was from vs 14. miles, but by the great hight thereof it seemed to bee
+within foure or fiue miles off vs, but in the daie time when the sun shined
+wee could not see it.
+
+The 9. of Iuly, lying thus at anchor, in the morning most of the long
+boates went a shore to fetch fresh water, such as they could there find and
+caried with them the deade corps of Ian Cornelesson aforesaid, the
+Constables son of the Admiralty of Roterdam, called Zwertkeys, which was
+there honorably buried on the high and drie land. This done, we set on fire
+the woode which lay on the shore piled and heaped in the woods, but in this
+place we found not any Spaniards.
+
+The tenth of Iuly, the boates being all returned to their ships with their
+people, euery one wayed their anchors and hoised their sailes, the winde at
+Northwest; but being vnder saile together, the wind slacked and by reason
+of the great calme the ships lay a drift for want of wind.
+
+The 11. of Iuly, in the morning it blewe a stout gale in our topsailes out
+of the Northeast, but as we approched the Iland of Teneriffa, the winde
+altered often; sixe or seuen of our shippes, and the rest which were next
+vnto the shore, had sometimes a gale in their topsailes, and sometimes
+againe without wind: so that we lay a drift, and could keepe no reckoning
+either of the wind or course, and were forced to alter our course more than
+12. times a day.
+
+
+A declaration of the taking of Gomera one of the Ilands in Canaria, and how
+  we afterwardes left it.
+
+
+The 12. day of Iuly sailing thus with great variety of wind, vnder the
+great Iland Teneriffa, the day appearing, we had the wind more certain,
+filling our topsailes with a full gale from the Northwest: And when it was
+faire day light we saw our fleet scattered far one from another, by meanes
+of the foresaid mutable windes. Some ships lay driuing by reason of the
+calme, and other some had a little gale, but the most part of our fleet
+were West of vs, towards whom with all speed, we with the rest of the ships
+made. Being al come together, wee endeuored to reach the Ilande Gomera,
+wherein is a little towne: towardes the euening many of our ships were
+neere the Iland, but the most part were to the lee ward; so that before it
+grew toward the euening none of vs could come neere the towne.
+Notwithstanding in the twilight and shutting vp of the euening: Ian
+Garbrantson Admirall of the white flag, his vize Admirall, and a Pinnace
+following, were come neere the town. Thus the Admirall sayling so neere to
+the Iland, they of Gomera discharged 2. pieces at him, but touched him not.
+The saide Admirall seeing this, passed on a little farther with the other
+ships which were neere him, and then tooke in their sailes, and cast their
+anchors. The other ships which were behinde, laboured all they might to
+come also vnder the Iland to them.
+
+The 13. of Iuly, the Admirall of the white flag lying thus at anchor neere
+to Gomera, the greatest part of the fleete were yet in the morning betweene
+the Iland of Teneriffa and Gomera, so that parte of the ships were beyonde
+the towne, and must sometimes cast about to conducte the others in, which
+were in the lee of vs. When wee had nowe for the most part passed the hight
+of the Iland, the Generall gaue a signe to all captaines to come aboorde
+him, being vnder saile, directing his course to the Iland of Gomera, and
+the other ships did their endeuour to follow him and anchored about the
+necke of the valley, lying North North East off the towne. The ships being
+all come to anchor, the captaines entered presently into the long boates,
+and aboorde the Generall to know his minde: and after they had beene a
+while in the Generals ship, they returned to their ships, and 4. companies
+of souldiours were chosen out, and landed in the valley. Which done, al the
+ships waied their anchors, and sailed directly toward the towne, and then
+came to anchor againe. After that all our ships lay thus together in the
+road neere the valley, before the town: we discharged certaine peeces
+against the town, but they made no shewe at all of resistaunce, for they
+had buried foure brasse peeces as soone as they had sight of vs, which lay
+on the strond neere vnto a small castle; the other sixe companies were also
+set on land in the long boates, without any resistance: for the Spaniardes
+with their wiues, children, and all their goods whiche they coulde carry
+with them were fled into the mountains. [Sidenote: The towne of Gomera
+abandoned by the Spaniards.] The first 4. companies that were landed, as
+they marched along the hils side towards the towne, perceiuing that the
+enemy fled with all his goods towards the hils, sent out a certaine number
+of soldiours to intercept them, and to take from them the goods which they
+caried away. And to accomplish this enterprise, our souldiours descended
+the hill into the valley, meaning suddainly to set vpon the Spaniardes; but
+the enemie perceiuing their intent, hid themselues in caues which were
+neere vnto them, vntill our souldiours were in the valley. The Spaniardes
+perceiuing that they were strong enough to encounter with our people,
+suddainly leapt out of their dens, and beset our souldiours on both sides.
+[Sidenote: Eighty Netherlanders and diuers Spaniards slaine.] Our people
+seeing themselues thus compassed with their enemies, behaued themselues
+most valiantly, so that many of the Spaniards lost their liues, and 80. of
+ours were slaine in this valley: among whom were 2. Lieutenants (the one
+was Meerbecks sonne, and the other was Lieutenant to captaine Bynon) which
+had receiued aboue 50. wounds in their bodies, so pittifullie were they
+massacred, thus were these worthie champions intercepted. The rest of those
+4. companies, which were not present at this fury of the Spaniardes,
+towardes the euening, descended the hills, and marched into the towne.
+Presently after this, watch was appointed in al places of the towne, and
+some of the soldiours began to dig the ground, to seeke for such goods as
+the Spaniardes had buried, but at that instant they founde nothing, except
+only certain pipes of wine.
+
+About the sunne setting was brought in a Spanish prisoner, which was de
+deliuered to the Prouest marshal, by the Generals commandement, to the end
+he might bring them to all such places in the Ilande, whereas the
+Spaniardes had hidden their goods: But because nothing could then be
+effected by reason that the euening approched, and it began, to bee too
+dark, the Spaniard was committed to a keeper vntil the next morning for the
+purpose aforesaide. But the night being far spent, and the keeper taking
+small regard to his charge, the Spaniard secretlie stole awaie and ran to
+the mountaines.
+
+The 14. of Iuly, in the morning the long boates rowed againe to the shore,
+and caried aboorde such goods as the enemy had left behind them, which for
+the most, part were wines, for they had caried clean awaie all other things
+into the mountains, and had left almost nothing in the towne, but only the
+wines which they had buried in the earth: In the afternoone our people
+found 3. bels, which they had buried in the fields, where corne had growne.
+
+The 15. of Iuly in the morning our people running vp to the hils 10. or 12.
+in a company to hunt and seeke for pillage were suddainly inuironed by the
+enemy, and 6. or 8. of them slaine; the rest saued themselues by flight.
+About noone there was a generall muster taken of all the soldiours, to see
+how many wee had lost: and such ships as were appointed to returne home,
+began to deliuer out the victuals. The same day were two copper peeces
+founde: whereof the one was 16. foot and halfe long, and the other about
+14. foot.
+
+The 16. day in the morning the Lord Generall gaue notice to all captaines
+to resort to him aboord his ship, because some of the captaines had not
+sent victuals vnto the soldiors that were on land, whereby they suffered
+hunger, and sundry of the soldiours had complained to the General thereof:
+At afternoone, the enemy came to the hill which lieth ouer the towne,
+crying and calling vnto our men to come and fetch againe their muskets, and
+towards the euening many marriners with their weapons landed, and at that
+instant also all things were ordered to march very early the next morning
+vp the hils to fetch againe our muskets, caliuers, and other weapons, which
+the Spaniards before had in mockery, and gibing wise willed vs to fetch
+from them. But now when all things were ordered for this seruice: the same
+night arose a strong gale of winde, encreasing more and more, that in the
+ende it grewe to a mightie tempest, that notwithstanding our fleet did ride
+vnder the Iland Gomera in the road before the towne, some were forced to
+way their anchors and to put to sea, to preuent the mischiefe like to
+happen to the ships, by reason they lay so neere one another. And when
+those shipps were a little way in the Sea, they cast their anchors, and
+there remained. By this occasion the generals aforesaid enterprise was kept
+backe: we iudging it as a warning, that the Generall should spare and
+preserue his people from the bloud-thirsty Spaniards, which had their holes
+and dens in the hils, and perhaps might haue taken away many of our liues.
+And heere by the way; by the name of the Iland Canaria, the Spaniards may
+rightly bee called Canarians or Canes, for Canaria is by interpretation,
+dogs kinde, for they ran as swift as dogs, and were as tyrannicall and
+bloud thirsty as the rauening Wolfe, or any other wild beast, which they
+sufficiently manifested, for as soon as they could lay handes on any of our
+people (like vnto mad curs, agreeing with their name Canarians) they would
+presently woary them.
+
+The 17. this hurtfull night ended, and the tempest ouer passed, and alaid,
+the couragious soldiors were all in redines, desirous to execute this peece
+of seruice, exspecting and desiring nothing more, then to march vp the
+hils, and to incounter their idolotrous enemies. But vpon good
+consideration, this enterprise was staied, and some 300. soldiours sent
+into the same valley, where 3. daies before our people had beene suddainly
+compassed, intrapped, and slaine by the Spaniards. Our soldiours being come
+to the valley aforesaid found no resistance, neither could once see a
+Spaniard; but found a smal peece of brasse about a fadome long, and two
+barrels of gunpowder; and when our souldiours perceiued that there was no
+good to bee done (forbearing to mount the hils, because they had no
+commission so to do) with such thinges as they had they returned to the
+towne. The euening now approaching, the Generall commanded to carry aboord
+the ships, such goods as they had there found, and digged out of the
+ground, which was accordingly done and accomplished, among which things
+were three brasse peeces, some bels and other goods.
+
+Sunday the 18. of Iuly, we remained at anchor in the road of the Iland
+Gomera.
+
+Munday the 19. of Iuly, remaining yet in the Iland Gomera, and seeing that
+the Spaniardes continued in their secret holes, and dens of the mountaines,
+wee set fire on the towne, and as neere as we could burnt down all places,
+as Cloisters churches, hermitages and houses, remaining yet in the towne
+vntill it was noone. After that all this was accomplished: we the vnited
+soldiours forsooke the towne, and presently the Lord General, with al his
+company, went aboord the ships. Thus we left the Iland Gomera burning,
+which was neuer before done by any nation. The Spaniardes seeing that the
+soldiours were departed out of the Iland, with all speed possible, in great
+heapes came running out of their secret caues and holes, to quench the
+fire, like as they of Allegona in the Iland of great Canaria before had
+done.
+
+Wednesday the 20. of Iuly, we lay stil in the road before Gomera, in this
+time 2. of our soldiours were put into captain Cloiers ship, and in lew of
+them, we receiued out of his ship 2. others, which were hurt, with two
+Spaniards.
+
+
+The summary or briefe declaration of the Admirals departing towardes the
+  West Indies.
+
+Aftre that the Generall had left the Ilands, he giueth order to the fleete,
+  taketh his leaue of all the Captaines and officers in most honorable
+  sort: he aduanceth the voyage to the West Indies with his Nauy: the rest
+  of the ships returne into the low Countries, euery one from whence he
+  came.
+
+After that the Iland of great Canaria was by the vnited soldiours taken,
+and won by force of armes, and the Iland Gomera conquered, for sundry
+reasons they were forsaken, after they had caried to their ships such
+things as they found, fired the townes, churches, cloisters, and houses,
+and rased their Castles. The Lord Generall commanded all Captaines and
+officers of the fleete to resorte vnto him aboord his ship. The same
+principals being come accordingly, he welcommed them and shewed them al
+friendship he could, thanking them for their good and faithfull endeuours
+which they had shewed in this seruice, which he performed with a singular
+oration, praying Almighty God that he woulde vouchsafe to be his only
+loadsman and merciful defender, in all his enterprises, to the honor of his
+name, and happy successe of the vnited Netherlandish prouinces. After this,
+the lorde Generall againe in most friendly sort, and kind speeches,
+perswaded and desired all the saide captaines and officers, (alleadging
+many reasons and examples) to perseuer in their good beginning of true and
+faithfull seruice for God, and for their good Lords and principall
+magistrates, the honorable gentlemen and states of the vnited Netherland;
+and to the good liking of their valiant and high borne gentleman, and
+gouernour General prince Mauritz, their principal lorde and commander, &c.
+with these and such like matters the daie was spent.
+
+Wednesday the 21. of Iuly, the wind was northerly: The lord Generall
+commanded all the captaines and officers to resort vnto him: and in most
+curteous maner againe the second time, tooke leaue of them all, ordaining
+and appointing in his place as Admirall Generall ouer all those shippes
+which were to returne home, the valiant captaine Ian Gerbrantson, desiring
+and straightly charging them at there present, to shew all obedience and
+duty vnto him, as to his owne person, and that they should make his minde
+knowne to all others which had not beene there present. After these
+speeches, and leaue taken, [Marginal note: The Netherlandish fleet diuide
+themselues into two companies, whereof the one returneth homewardes, and
+the other proceedeth for the West Indians.] the Admirall Ian Gerbrantson
+put out the princes colours in the maine top: and the honorable gentleman
+Peter von der Doest presentlie caused the princes flag also to be spread;
+and as soone as the sunne was Southwest, all the ships at one instant waied
+their anchors, and hoised their sailes, taking leaue nowe the third time
+one of another, in most braue and triumphant sort, and in this maner
+departed the one from the other. The lord General with his fleet, set this
+course South Southwest, with 36. ships, and the Admirall Ian Gerbrantson
+ran East by the wind, with 35. ships with intent to returne home.
+
+[Sidenote: Two Spanish prizes taken.] Wednesday the 18. of August, sixteene
+ships of our fleet which were sent to returne home, being in company
+together in the latitude of 36. degrees and 10. minutes, the wind Southwest
+sailing Northeast, before it was noone, we perceiued 2. strange ships vnder
+saile comming out of the Northwest, towards whom we made, and at afternoone
+we ouertooke them, and made them our prises: they were both Spaniardes, the
+one was a small Barke, and came from Cape de Blanco in 21. degrees, loaden
+for Woluis in the Condate where they dwelled. In the same ships was a
+marchant of Cyuill with 47. men, each of their ships hauing two cast
+peeces, and euery man his musket, but they made no shewe of defence, or
+offending. There was also found laden in the same ships, sixty thousand
+drie hides or skins, esteemed to bee worth 6000. duckets as they reported,
+there were also found two bags with mony, in the one was 11. hundred single
+rials, and in the other 10. hundred and forty single rials, with two Buts
+of traine oile, and two barrels of gum Arabique.
+
+Thursday the 19. day, we the abouesaid 16. ships were together, beside the
+two Spanish ships, 4 ships of war of North Holland, 4 ships of Warres of
+Zeland and one ship of war of the Maze: the captain wherof was Antony
+Leonardson, al the rest were victualers. The wind West Northwest, we sailed
+Northeast, and by North in 36. degrees and 45. minutes. The captaines had
+beene all aboord the Admirall in councell aduising what were best to bee
+done in this matter of the Spaniards prises.
+
+Saturday, Sunday, the 21. and 22. of August, our said fleet of 18. ships
+kept yet together, we found our selues to bee in 39. degrees, 6. minuts.
+The sun South and by West, the winde blew vp at West Northwest, wee sailed
+North Northeast, and North and by East, Lysborne was East of vs.
+
+Munday the sixt of September, the winde westerly, we ran East, at noone wee
+sounded, the depth was 50. fadome water, we found small white shels with
+needles therein, in the hight of 49. degrees 20. minuts, the sun Southwest,
+wee had sight of Vshant, we ran Northeast and by North.
+
+Tuesday the 7. of September, the sun East South East, wee saw England, a
+mighty blustering gale of winde from the South Southwest, wee sailed North
+Northeast. The sunne Southwest, came to land at Gawstert. Afterwarde wee
+turned and sailed East Southeast: In the euening it blewe so much winde,
+that wee were forced to strike our maine top mast, and we ranne the whole
+night with two courses by the wind.
+
+Wednesday the 8. of September, the foule weather continued, the sunne East
+and by South, we had sight of the Ile of Wight North Northwest of vs, and
+ranne the whole day, East Northeast with the foresaile by the wind: as the
+evening approached we saw Beuersier, in the night and second quarter we
+passed by Douer.
+
+Thursday the 9. of September, as soone as the daie began to appeare it was
+calme weather, and darke, the sun Southeast, we lay still before Newport
+all the ebbe, The wind easterly, in the after noone the wind came
+Northwest, we set saile againe, running al night by the wind with our
+foresaile.
+
+Friday the 10. of September 1599, by the break of day wee were before the
+Maze, the sun Southwest, we arriued by the helpe of God's mercy and grace
+before the Brill.
+
+Since then, there is arriued at Texell another ship of war, whereof one
+Cater of Amsterdam was captain, the wich was seuered from the fleet in this
+voiage by tempest, and thought to be lost. The said captaine met with some
+prises, and in company of two English shippes tooke a Caruell of Aduiso,
+verie richly laden comming out of India, and hauing more men then the
+English, shared halfe of the goods with them, and so came home this present
+month of Octob.
+
+
+FINIS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The Worldes Hydrographical Discription.
+
+WHEREIN IS PROUED NOT ONELY BY AUTHORITIE OF WRITERS, BUT ALSO BY LATE
+EXPERIENCE OF TRAUELLERS, AND REASONS OF SUBSTANTIALL PROBABILITIE, THAT
+THE WORLDE IN ALL HIS ZONES, CLYMATS AND PLACES, IS HABITABLE AND INHABITED
+AND THE SEAS LIKEWISE VNIUERSALLY NAUIGABLE WITHOUT ANY NATURALL ANOYANCE
+TO HINDER THE SAME
+
+WHEREBY APPEARES THAT FROM ENGLAND THERE IS A SHORT AND SPEEDIE PASSAGE
+INTO THE SOUTH SEAS, TO CHINA, MALUCCA, PHILIPPINA, AND INDIA, BY NORTHERLY
+NAUIGATION TO THE RENOWNE, HONOR AND BENIFIT OF HER MAIESTIES STATE, AND
+COMMUNALTY.
+
+PUBLISHED BY J. DAUIS OF SANDRUDG BY DARTMOUTH IN THE COUNTIE OF DEUON.
+GENTLEMAN.
+
+ANNO 1595. MAY 27.
+
+IMPRINTED AT LONDON
+
+BY THOMAS DAWSON
+
+DWELLING AT THE THREE CRANES IN THE VINETREE.
+AND ARE THERE TO BE SOLD.
+1595.
+
+
+
+
+TO THE RIGHT HONORABLE
+
+LORDES OF HER MAIESTIES MOST HONORABLE PRIUIE COUNSAYLE.
+
+My most honorable good Lords for as much as it hath pleased God, not only
+to bestow vpon your Lordships, the excellent gifts of natures benefite, but
+hath also beautified the same with such speciall ornamentes of perfection:
+As that thereby the mindes and attentiue industrie of all, haue no small
+regard vnto your honorable proceedings. And so much the rather, because to
+the great content of all her maiesties most louing subiectes; it hath
+pleased her highnes in her stately regard of gouernment, to make choise of
+your honours as speciall members in the regall disposition of the
+mightinesse of her imperiall command: Emboldeneth me among the rest to
+humble myself at your honorable feete, in presenting vnto the fauour of
+your excellent iudgementes this short treatise of the Worldes
+Hydrographicall bands. And knowing that not onely your renowned places, but
+also the singularitie of your education, by the prudent care of your noble
+progenitors hath and still doth induce and drawe you to fauour and imbrace
+whatsoeuer beareth but a seeming of the commonweales good: Much more then
+that which in substantiall truth shal be most beneficiall to the same. I am
+therefore the more encouraged not to slacke this my enterprise, because
+that through your honorable assistance when in the ballance of your
+wisedomes this discouery shall haue indifferent consideration, I knowe it
+will be ordered by you to bee a matter of no small moment to the good of
+our countrie. For thereby wee shall not onely haue a copious and rich vent
+for al our naturall and artificiall comodities of England, in short time by
+safe passage, and without offence of any, but also shall by the first
+imployment retourne into our countrey by spedie passage, all Indian
+commodities in the ripenes of their perfection, whereby her Maiesties
+dominions should bee the storehouse of Europe, the nurse of the world and
+the glory of nations, in yielding all forrayne naturall benefites by an
+easie rate: In communicating vnto all whatsoeuer God hath vnto any one
+assigned: And by the increase of all nations through the mightinesse of
+trade. Then should the merchant, tradesman, and poore artificer, haue
+imployment equall to their power and expedition, whereby what notable
+benefites would growe to her Maiestie, the state, and communaltie, I refer
+to your perfect iudgementes. And for that I am desirous to auoyde the
+contradiction of vulgar conceipts, I haue thought it my best course, before
+I make profe of the certaintie of this discouerie, to lay downe whatsoeuer
+may against the same be obiected, and in the ouerthrowe of those conceipted
+hinderances the safenes of the passage shall most manifestly appeare, which
+when your wisdomes, shall with your patience peruse, I doe in no sort
+distruct your fauorable acceptance and honorable assistance of the same.
+And although for diuers considerations I doe not in this treatis discouer
+my full knowledge for the place and altitude of this passage, yet
+whensoeuer it shall so please your honours to commaund I will in few wordes
+make the full certainty thereof knowne vnto your honours being alwaies
+redie with my person and poore habilitie to prosecute this action as your
+honours shall direct, beseeching God so to support you with all happines of
+this life, fauour of her Maiestie, loue of her highnes subiectes, and
+increase of honour as may be to your best content.
+
+I most humbly take my leaue from Sandrudg by Dartmouth
+
+this 27. of May 1595.
+
+Your Honors in all dutifull seruice to command
+
+I. D.
+
+
+
+
+THE WORLDS HYDROGRAPHICALL OBIECTIONS AGAINST AL NORTHERLY DISCOUERIES.
+
+All [Footnote: Hakluyt has published an extract from this treatise in his
+Collection of Voyages; but the original work is so very rare and occupies
+so small a space that it has been deemed eligible to reprint it entire.
+EDIT.] impediments in nature, and circumstances of former practises duly
+considered. The Northerly passage to China seme very improbable. For first
+it is a matter very doubtfull whether there bee any such passage or no,
+sith it hath beene so often attempted and neuer performed, as by historical
+relation appeareth, whereby wee may fully perswade our selues that America
+and Asia, or some other continent are so conioyned togeather as that it is
+impossible for any such passage to be, the certaintie whereof is
+substantially proued vnto vs by the experience of Sebastian Gabota an
+expert Pylot, and a man reported of especiall iudgement, who being that
+wayes imployed returned without successe. Iasper Corteriallis a man of no
+meane practise did likewise put the same in execution, with diuers others,
+all which in the best parte haue concluded ignorance. If not a full consent
+of such matter. And therfore sith practise hath reproued the same, there is
+no reason why men should dote vpon so great an incertayntie, but if a
+passage may bee prooued and that the contenentes are disioyned whereof
+there is small hope, yet the impedimentes of the clymate (wherein the same
+is supposed to lie) are such, and so offensiue as that all hope is thereby
+likewise vtterly secluded, for with the frozen zone no reasonable creature
+will deny, but that the extremitie of colde is of such forceable action,
+(being the lest in the fulnes of his owne nature without mitigation,) as
+that it is impossible for any mortall creature to indure the same, by the
+vertue of whose working power, those Northerly Seas are wholly congealed,
+making but one mas or contenent of yse, which is the more credible because
+the ordenary experience of our fishermen geueth vs sufficient notice
+thereof, by reason of the great quantitie of yse which they find to be
+brought vpon the cost of newefound land from those Northerne regions. By
+the aboundance whereof they are so noysomly pestred, as that in many weekes
+they haue not beene able to recouer the shore, yea and many times recouer
+it not vntill the season of fishing bee ouer passed. This then being so in
+the Septentrionall latitude of 46, 47 and 48 degrees, which by natures
+benifit are latitudes of better temperature than ours of England, what hope
+should there remayne for a nauegable passing to be by the norwest, in the
+altitude of 60, 70 or 80 degres, as it may bee more Northerly, when in
+these temperate partes of the world the shod of that frozen sea breadeth
+such noysome pester: as the pore fishermen doe continually sustain. And
+therefore it seemeth to be more then ignorance that men should attempt
+Nauigation in desperate clymates and through seas congeled that neuer
+dissolue, where the stiffnes of the colde maketh the ayre palpably grosse
+without certainty that the landes are disioyned.
+
+All which impediments if they were not, yet in that part of the world,
+Nauigation cannot be performed as ordenarily as it vsed, for no ordenarie
+sea chart can describe those regions either in the partes Geographicall or
+Hydrographicall, where the Meridians doe so spedily gather themselues
+togeather, the parallels beeing a verye small proportion to a great circle,
+where quicke and vncertayne variation of the Compasse may greatly hinder or
+vtterly ouerthrow the attempt. So that for lack of Curious lyned globes to
+the right vse of Nauigation; with many other instruments either vnknowne or
+out of vse, and yet of necessitie for that voyage, it should with great
+difficultie be attayned. All which the premises considered I refer the
+conclusion of these obiections and certainty of this passage to the
+generall opinion of my louing countrymen, whose dangerous attemptes in
+those desperate uncertainties I wish to be altered, and better imployed in
+matters of great probabilitie.
+
+
+To prove a passage by the Norwest, without any land impedimentes to hinder
+  the same, by aucthoritie of writters, and experience of trauellers,
+  contrary to the former obiections.
+
+Homer an ancient writer affirmeth that, the world being diuided into Asia,
+Africa, and Europe is an Iland, which is likewise so reported by Strabo in
+his erst book of Cosmographie, Pomponius Mela in his third booke, Higinius,
+Solinus, with others. Whereby it is manifest that America was then
+vndiscovered and to them vnknowne, otherwise they would haue made relation
+of it as of the rest. Neither could they in reason haue reported Asia,
+Africa and Europa to bee an Iland vnles they had knowne the same to be
+conioyned and in all his partes to be inuironed with the seas. And further
+America being very neere of equall quantitie with all the rest could not be
+reported as a parte either of Africa, Asia, or Europa in the ordenarie
+lymites of discretion. And therefore of necessitie it must be concluded
+that Asia, Africa and Europa the first reueiled world being knowne to bee
+an Iland, America must likewise be in the same nature because in no parte
+it conioyneth with the first.
+
+
+By experience of Trauellers to proue this passage.
+
+And that wee neede not to range after forrayne and ancient authorities,
+wherat curious wittes may take many exceptions, let vs consider the late
+discoueryes performed, within the space of two ages not yet passed, whereby
+it shall so manifestly appeare that Asia, Africa, and Europa are knit
+togeather, making one continent, and are wholy inuironed with the seas, as
+that no reasonable creature shall haue occasion thereof to doubt. And first
+beginning at the north of Europe, from the north cape in 71 degrees,
+whereby our merchantes passe in their trade to S. Nicholas in Rouscia
+descending towardes the South, the Nauigation is without impediment to the
+cape of Bona Esperanca, ordenarilie traded and daily practised. And
+therefore not to be gaynesayd: which two capes are distant more then 2000
+leagues by the neerest tract, in all which distaunces America is not founde
+to bee any thing neere the coastes either of Europe or Afric, for from
+England the chefest of the partes of Europa to Newfoundland being parte of
+America it is 600. leagues the neerest distance that any part thereof
+beareth vnto Europa. And from cape Verde in Gynny being parte of Africa,
+vnto cape Saint Augustine in Brasill beeing parte of America, it wanteth
+but little of 500 leagues the neerest distance betweene Africa and America.
+Likewise from the sayd North Cape to Noua Zemla by the course of East and
+West neerest, there is passable sayling, and the North partes of Tartaria
+are well knowne to be banded with the Scithian Seas to the promontory Tabin
+so that truely it is apparant that America is farre remooued and by a great
+sea diuided from any parte of Africa or Europa. And for the Southerne
+partes of the firste reueiled worlde it is most manifest that from the cape
+of Bona Esperanca towardes the east, the costes of Safalla, Mosombique,
+Melinde, Arabia, and Persia, whose gulfes lye open to the mayne occian: And
+all the coastes of East India to the capes of Callacut and Malacca, are
+banded with a mightie sea vpon the South whose lymmates are yet
+vndiscouered. And from the cape of Malacca towardes the North so high as
+the Ile of Iapan, and from thence the cost of China being part of Asia
+continueth still North to the promontory Tabin, where the Scithian sea and
+this Indian sea haue recourse togeather, no part of America being neere the
+same by many 100 leages to hinder this passage.
+
+For from the Callafornia beeing parte of America, to the yles of Philippina
+bordering vpon the coastes of China being parte of Asia is 2100 leages and
+therefore America is farther separated from Asia, then from any the sea
+coastes either of Europe or Africa. Whereby it is most manifest that Asia,
+Africa and Europa are conioyned in an Iland. And therefore of necessity
+followeth that America is contained vnder one or many ylands, for from the
+septentrionall lat. of 75 deg. vnto the straights of Magilan it is knowne
+to be nauigable and hath our west occian to lymet the borders thereof, and
+through the straightes of Magillane no man doubteth but there is Nauigable
+passage, from which straightes, vpon all the Westerne borders of America,
+the costs of Chili, Chuli, Rocha, Baldiuia, Peru to the ystmos of Dariena
+and so the whole West shores of Noua Hispania are banded out by a long and
+mightie sea, not hauing any shore neere vnto it by one thousand leagues
+towardes the West, howe then may it be possible that Asia and America
+should make one contenent:
+
+
+To proue the premisses by the attemptes of our owne Countreymen, besides
+  others.
+
+But lest it should be obiected that the premises are conceites, the acting
+aucthors not nominated, I will vse some boldnes to recyte our owne
+countreymen by whose paynefull trauells these truthes are made manifest
+vnto vs. Hoping and intreting that it may not bee offensiue, though in this
+sorte I make relation of their actions. And firste to begin with the North
+partes of Europe, it is not vnknowne to all our countrymen that from the
+famous citie of London Syr Huge Willobie, knight, gaue the first attempt
+for the North estren discoueries, which were afterward most notably
+accomplished by master Borrowes, a Pylot of excellent iudgemente and
+fortunate in his actions, so farre as Golgoua Vaygats and Noua Zemla, with
+trade thereby procured to S. Nicholas in Rouscia. Then succeded master
+Ginkinson who by his land trauell discouered the Scithian sea to lymit the
+North coastes of Tartaria, so farre as the riuer Ob. So that by our
+countrymen the North partes of Europe are at full made knowne vnto vs: and
+prooued to ioyne with no other continent to hinder this passage. The common
+and ordenary trade of the Spanyard and Portingall from Lysbome to the
+coasts of Guyny, Bynny, Mina, Angola, Manicongo, and the cost of Ethiopia
+to the cape of Bona Esperanca, and all the cost of Est India and Illes of
+Molucca, (by which wonderfull and copious trade, they are so mightily
+inriched, as that now they challeng a monarchy vnto themselues vpon the
+whole face of the earth) that their trade I say, prooueth that America is
+farre separated from any parte of Africa or the South of Asia. And the same
+Spaniard trading in the Citye of Canton within the kingdome of China,
+hauing layd his storehouse of aboundance in Manellia a Citye by him erected
+in Luzon one of the Illes of Philippa bordring vpon the cost of China, doth
+by his common and ordenarie passages to Iapan and other the borders of the
+coast, knowe that the Est continent of Asia lieth due North and South so
+high as the promontory Tabin, wher the Scithian sea and his maine occian of
+China are conioyned. But with what care they labour to conceale that matter
+of Hydrographie for the better preseruation of their fortunate estate, I
+refer to the excellent iudgement of statesmen, that painefully labour in
+the glorious administration of a well gouerned Common weale, so that by
+them Africa and Asia are proued in no parte to ioyne with America, thereby
+to hinder this passage.
+
+
+By late experience to prone that America is an Iland, and may be sayled
+  round about contrary to the former obiection.
+
+Asia, Africa and Europa being prooued to be conioyned and an Iland, it now
+resteth to bee knowne by what authoritie America is proued to be likewise
+an Iland, so that thereby all land impedimentes are remoued, which might
+brede the dread or vncertaynty of this passage. The first Englishman that
+gaue any attempt vpon the coastes of West India being parte of America was
+syr Iohn Hawkins knight: who there and in that attempt as in many others
+sithins, did and hath prooued himselfe to be a man of excellent capacity,
+great gouernment, and perfect resolution. For before he attempted the same
+it was a matter doubtfull and reported the extremest lymit of danger to
+sayle vpon those coastes. So that it was generally in dread among vs, such
+is the slownes of our nation, for the most part of vs rather ioy at home
+like Epicures to sit and carpe at other mens hassardes, our selues not
+daring to giue any attempt. (I meane such as are at leisure to seeke the
+good of their countrie not being any wayes imployed as paynefull members of
+a common weale,) then either to further or giue due commendations to the
+deseruers, howe then may Syr Iohn Hawkins bee esteemed, who being a man of
+good account in his Country, of wealth and great imployment, did
+notwithstanding for the good of his Countrey, to procure trade, giue that
+notable and resolute attempt. Whose steps many hundreds following sithins
+haue made themselues men of good esteeme, and fit for the seruice of her
+sacrid maiestie.
+
+And by that his attempt of America (wherof West India is a parte) is well
+prooued to be many hundred leagues distant from any part of Afric or
+Europe.
+
+Then succeeded Syr Francis Drake in his famous and euer renowned voyage
+about the world, who departing from Plimouth directed his course for the
+straightes of Magillane, which place was also reported to be most dangerous
+by reason of the continuall violent and vnresistable current that was
+reported to haue continuall passage into the straightes, so that once
+entring therein there was no more hope remayning of returne, besides the
+perill of shelues, straightness of the passage and vncertayne wyndinges of
+the same, all which bread dread in the highest degree, the distance and
+dangers considered. So that before his revealing of the same the matter was
+in question, whether there were such a passage or no, or whether Magillane
+did passe the same, if there was such a man so named, but Syr Frauncis
+Drake, considering the great benefit that might arise by his voyage through
+that passage, and the notable discoueries, that might be thereby performed,
+regarded not these dastardly affections of the idle multitude, but
+considering with iudgement that in nature there cold be no such perpetuitie
+of violence where the occian is in no sorte straighted, proceeded with
+discreet prouision and so departing from England arriued vnto the same, and
+with good sucesse (through Gods most fauorable mercy passed through)
+wherein his resolution hath deserued euerlasting commendations. For the
+place in viewe is dangerous and verye vnpleasing, and in the execution to
+passe Nothing may seeme more doubtful, for 14 leagues west within the cape
+of Saint Maria lyeth the first straight, where it floweth and ebbeth with
+violent swiftnes, the straight not half a mile broad, the first fall into
+which straight is verye dangerous and doubtfull. This straight lasteth in
+his narrownes, 3 leages, then falling into another sea 8 leages broad and 8
+leages through there lyeth the second straight due west. South West from
+the firste, which course being vnknowne it is no small perill in finding
+this second straightes, and that agayne is not a myle broad and continueth
+the bredth 3 or 4 leages Southwest, with violent swiftnes of flowing and
+reflowing, and there agayne he falleth into another Sea, through which due,
+South South West, lyeth the cape Froward, and his straight (so rightly
+named in the true nature of his peruersnes, for be the wind neuer so
+fauorable, at that cape it will be directly agaynst you with violent and
+daungerous flaughes) where there are three places probable to continue the
+passage. But the true straight lyeth from this cape West Nor West, where
+the land is very high all couered with snowe, and full of dangerous
+counter-windes, that beate with violence from those huge mountaines, from
+which cape the straight is neuer broder then 2 leages and in many places
+not halfe a mile, without hope of ancorage, the channell beeing shore deepe
+more then tow hundreth fadomes, and so continueth to the South sea forty
+leages only to bee releued in little dangerous coues, with many turnings
+and chang of courses; how perilous then was this passage to Syr Frauncis
+Drake, to whom at that time no parte thereof was knowne. And being without
+reliefe of ancorage was inforced to follow his course in the hell darke
+nights, and in all the fury of tempestious stormes. I am the bolder to make
+this particuler relation in the praise of his perfect constancy and
+magnanemitye of spirite, because I haue thrise passed the same straights
+and haue felt the most bitter and mercyles fury thereof. But now knowing
+the place as I doe (for I haue described euery creke therein) I know it to
+be a voiage of as great certaynty, pleasure and ease, as any whatsoeuer
+that beareth but 1/4 the distaunce from England that these straightes doe.
+And this straight is founde to be 1200 leages from any parte of Africa so
+that truely it is manifest that these two landes are by no small distance
+seperated.
+
+And after that Syr Frauncis was entred into the South Seas he coasted all
+the Westerne shores of America vntill he came into the Septentrionall
+latitude of forty eight degrees being on the backe syde of Newfound land.
+And from thence shaping his course towardes Asia found by his trauells that
+the Ills of Molucca are distant from America more then two hundreth leages,
+howe then can Asia and Africa be conioyned and made one continent to hinder
+the passage, the men yet liuing that can reproue the same, but this
+conceipt is the bastard of ignorance borne through the fornication of the
+malitious multitude that onely desire to hinder when themselues can doe no
+good.
+
+Now their onely resteth the North parts of America, vpon which coast my
+selfe haue had most experience of any in our age: for thrise I was that
+waye imployed for the discouery of this notable passage, by the honourable
+care and some charge of Syr Francis Walsingham knight, principall secretary
+to her Maiestie, with whom diuers noble men and worshipfull marchants of
+London ioyned in purse and willingnesse for the furtherance of that
+attempt, but when his honour dyed the voyage was friendlesse, and mens
+mindes alienated from aduenturing therein.
+
+[Sidenote: The 1 voyage.] In my first voyage not experienced of the nature
+of those climates, and hauing no direction either by Chart, Globe, or other
+certaine relation in what altitude that passage was to be searched, I
+shaped a Northerly course and so sought the same toward the South, and in
+that my Northerly course I fell vpon the shore which in ancient time was
+called Groenland, fiue hundred leagues distant from the Durseys
+Westnorthwest Northerly, the land being very high and full of mightie
+mountaines all couered with snow, no viewe of wood, grass or earth to be
+seene, and the shore two leagues off into the sea so full of yce that no
+shipping could by any meanes come neere the same. The lothsome view of the
+shore, and irksome noyse of the yce was such, as that it bred strange
+conceites among vs, so that we supposed the place to be wast and voyd of
+any sensible or vegitable creatures, whereupon I called the same
+Desolation: so coasting this shore towards the South in the latitude of
+sixtie degrees, I found it to trend towards the West, I still followed the
+leading therof in the same height, and after fifty or sixtie leagues it
+fayled and lay directly North, which I still followed, and in thirtie
+leagues sayling vpon the West side of this coast by me named Desolation, we
+were past al the yce and found many greene and pleasant Isles bordering
+vpon the shore, but the mountaines of the maine were still couered with
+great quantities of snow, I brought my ship among those Isles and there
+mored to refresh ourselues in our weary trauell, in the latitude of sixtie
+foure degrees or there about. The people of the countrey hauing espyed our
+shippes came downe vnto vs in their Canoas, and holding vp their right hand
+to the Sunne and crying Yliaout, would strike their breasts: we doing the
+like the people came aboard our shippes, men of good stature, vnbearded,
+small eyed and of tractable conditions, by whome as signes would permit, we
+vnderstood that towards the North and West there was a great sea, and vsing
+the people with kindenes in giuing them nayles and kniues which of all
+things they most desired, we departed, and finding the sea free from yce
+supposing our selues to be past al daunger we shaped our course
+Westnorthwest thinking thereby to passe for China, but in the latitude of
+sixtie sixe degrees we fell with another shore, and there found another
+passage of twenty leagues broad directly West into the same, which we
+supposed to be our hoped straight, we entered into the same thirty or
+fortie leagues, finding it neither to wyden nor streighten, then
+considering that the yeere was spent (for this was in the fine of August)
+not knowing the length of the straight and dangers thereof, we tooke it our
+best course to returne with notice of our good successe for this small time
+of search. And so returning in a sharpe fret of Westerly windes the 29. of
+September we arriued at Dartmouth. And acquainting master Secretary with
+the rest of the honourable and worshipfull aduenturers of all our
+proceedings, I was appointed againe the second yere to search the bottome
+of this straight, because by all likelihood it was the place and passage by
+vs laboured for. [Sidenote: The 2 voyage.] In this second attempt the
+marchants of Exeter, and other places of the West became aduenturers in the
+action, so that being sufficiently furnished for sixe moneths, and hauing
+direction to search these straights, vntill we found the same to fall into
+another sea vpon the West side of this part of America, we should againe
+returne: for then it was not to be doubted, but shipping with trade might
+safely be conueied to China and the parts of Asia. We departed from
+Dartmouth, and arriuing vnto the South part of the coast of Desolation
+coasted the same vpon his West shore to the latitude of sixetie sixe
+degrees, and there ancored among the Isles bordering vpon the same, where
+we refreshed our selues, the people of this place came likewise vnto vs, by
+whom I vnderstood through their signes that towards the North the sea was
+large. At this place the chiefe ship whereupon I trusted, called the
+Mermayd of Dartmouth, found many occasions of discontentment, and being
+vnwilling to proceed, shee there forsook me. Then considering how I had
+giuen my faith and most constant promise to my worshipfull good friend
+master William Sanderson, who of all men was the greatest aduenturer in
+that action, and tooke such care for the performance thereof that he hath
+to my knowledge at one time disbursed as much money as any fiue others
+whatsoeuer out of his owne purse, when some of the companie haue bene
+slacke in giuing in their aduenture: And also knowing that I should loose
+the fauour of M. Secretary Walsingham, if I should shrink from his
+direction; in one small barke of 30 Tunnes, whereof M. Sanderson was owner,
+alone without farther comfort or company I proceeded on my voyage, and
+arriuing at these straights followed the same 80 leagues, vntill I came
+among many Islands, where the water did ebbe and flow sixe fadome vpright,
+and where there had bene great trade of people to make traine. [Sidenote:
+The North parts of America all Islands.] But by such things as there we
+found, wee knew that they were not Christians of Europe that had vsed that
+trade: in fine by searching with our boat, we found small hope to passe any
+farther that way, and therefore retourning agayne recouered the sea and
+coasted the shore towards the South, and in so doing (for it was too late
+to search towards the North) we found another great inlet neere 40 leagues
+broad, where the water entered in with violent swiftnesse, this we also
+thought might be a passage: for no doubt the North partes of America are
+all Islands by ought that I could perceiue therein: but because I was alone
+in a small barque of thirtie tunnes, and the yeere spent, I entred not into
+the same, for it was now the seuenth of September, but coasting the shore
+towardes the South wee saw an incredible number of birds: hauing diuers
+fishermen aboord our barke they all concluded that there was a great skull
+of fish, we being vnprouided of fishing furniture with a long spike nayle
+made a hooke, and fastening the same to one of our sounding lines, before
+the bait was changed we tooke more than fortie great Cods, the fish
+swimming so abundantly thicke about our barke as is incredible to bee
+reported, of which with a small portion of salt that we had, we presented
+some thirtie couple, or thereaboutes, and so returned for England. And
+hauing reported to M. Secretarie Walsingham the whole successe of this
+attempt, he commanded me to present vnto the most honourable Lord high
+Treasurour of England, some part of that fish: which when his Lordship saw,
+and heard at large the relation of this second attempt, I receiued
+fauourable countenance from his honour, aduising me to prosecute the
+action, of which his lordship conceiued a very good opinion. The next yere,
+although diuers of the aduenturers fell from the Action, as all the
+Westerne marchants, and most of those in London: yet some of the
+aduenturers both honorable and worshipfull continued their willing fauour
+and charge, so that by this meanes the next yere two shippes were appointed
+for the fishing and one pinnesse for the discouerie.
+
+[Sidenote: The 3 voyage.] Departing from Dartmouth, through Gods mercifull
+fauour, I arrived at the place of fishing, and there according to my
+direction I left the two ships to follow that busines, taking their
+faithful promise not to depart vntill my returne vnto them, which should be
+in the fine of August, and so in the barke I proceeded for the discouerie:
+but after my departure, in sixteene dayes the two shippes had finished
+their voyage, but so presently departed for England, without regard of
+their promise: my selfe not distrusting any such hard measure proceeded for
+the discouerie, and followed my course in the free and open sea betweene
+North and Northwest to the latitude of 67 degrees, and there I might see
+America West from me, and Desolation, East: then when I saw the land of
+both sides I began to distrust it would prooue but a gulfe: notwithstanding
+desirous to know the full certainty I proceeded, and in 68 degrees the
+passage enlarged, so that I could not see the Westerne shore: thus I
+continued to the latitude of 73 degrees, in a great sea, free from yce,
+coasting the Westerne shore of Desolation: the people came continually
+rowing out vnto me in their Canoas, twenty, forty, and one hundred at a
+time, and would giue me fishes dryed, Salmon, Salmon peale, Cod, Caplin,
+Lumpe, Stonebase and such like, besides diuers kinds of birds, as Partrige,
+Fesant, Guls, Sea birds and other kindes of flesh: I still laboured by
+signes to know from them what they knew of any sea toward the North, they
+still made signes of a great sea as we vnderstood them, then I departed
+from that coast, thinking to discouer the North parts of America: and after
+I had sailed towards the West 40 leagues, I fel vpon a great banke of yce:
+the winde being North and blew much, I was constrained to coast the same
+toward the South, not seeing any shore West from me, neither was there any
+yce towards the North, but a great sea, free, large very salt and blew, and
+of an vnsearcheable depth: So coasting towards the South I came to the
+place where I left the ships to fish, but found them not. Then being
+forsaken and left in this distresse referring my self to the mercifull
+prouidence of God, I shaped my course for England, and vnhoped for of any,
+God alone releeuing me, I arriued at Dartmouth. By this last discouery it
+seemed most manifest that the passage was free and without impediment
+toward the North: but by reason of the Spanish fleet and vnfortunate time
+of M. Secretaries death, the voyage was omitted and neuer sithens
+attempted. The cause why I vse this particular relation of all my
+proceedings for this discouery, is to stay this obiection, why hath not
+Dauis discovered this passage being thrise that wayes imployed? How far I
+proceeded and in what form this discouery lieth, doth appeare vpon the
+Globe which M. Sanderson to his very great charge hath published, for the
+which he deserueth great fauor and commendations. Made by master Emery
+Mullineux a man well qualited of a good iudgment and very experte in many
+excellente practises, in myselfe being the onely meane with master
+Sanderson to imploy master Mulineux therein, whereby he is now growne to a
+most exquisite perfection.
+
+Anthony de Mendoza viceroy of Mexico, sent certayne of his captaynes by
+land and also a nauy of ships by sea to search out the Norwest passage, who
+affirmed by his letters dated from Mexico in anno 1541 vnto the Emperour
+being then in Flaunders, that towardes the Norwest hee had founde the
+Kingdome of Cette, Citta, Alls, Ceuera, seuen cities and howe beyond the
+sayd Kingdome farther towardes the Norwest, Francisco Vasques of Coronado
+hauing passed great desarts came to the sea side, where he found certayne
+shippes which sayled by that sea with merchandize, and had in their banners
+vpon the prows of their shippes, certayne fowles made of golde and siluer,
+named Alcatrazzi, and that the mariners signified vnto him by signes that
+they were thirtie dayes comming to the hauen, whereby he vnderstoode that
+those could be of no other country but of Asia, the next knowne continent
+towardes the West. And farther the sayd Anthony affirmed that by men wel
+practised hee vnderstoode that 950. leages of that country was discouered
+vpon the same Sea, now if the cost in that distance of leages should lye to
+the West, it would then adioyne with the Northe partes of Asia, and then it
+would be a far shorter voyage then thirtie dayes sayling, but that it is
+nothing neere Asia by former authoritie is sufficiently expressed, then if
+it should lie towardes the North, it would extend itself almost vnto the
+pole, a voiage ouer tedious to be perfourmed by land trauell. Therefore of
+necessity this distance of 950 leages must lie betweene the North and East,
+which by Anthony de Especio in his late trauells vpon the North of America
+is sufficiently discouered, then this beeing so, the distance is very small
+betweene the East parte of this discouered Sea and the passage wherein I
+haue so painefully laboured, what doth then hinder vs of England vnto whom
+of all nations this discouery would be most beneficiall to be incredulous
+slow of vnderstanding, and negligent in the highest degree, for the search
+of this passage which is most apparently prooued and of wonderfull benefit
+to the vniversal state of our countrey. Why should we be thus blinded
+seeing our enemies to possess the fruites of our blessednes and yet will
+not perceiue the same. But I hope the eternall maiestie of God the sole
+disposer of all thinges will also make this to appeare in his good time.
+
+Cornelius Nepos recyteth that when Quintus Metellus Cæsar was proconsull
+for the Romanes in Fraunce, the King of Sueuia gaue him certayne Indians,
+which sayling out of India for merchandize were by tempest driuen vpon the
+coastes of Germany, a matter very strange that Indians in the fury of
+stormes should ariue vpon that coast, it resteth now carefully to consider
+by what winde they were so driuen, if they had beene of any parte of Africa
+how could they escape the ylls of Cape Verd, or the ylles of Canaria, the
+coastes of Spayne, Fraunce, Ireland or England to arriue as they, but it
+was neuer knowne that any the natyues of Afric or Ethiopia haue vsed
+shippings. Therefore they could not bee of that parte of the worlde, for in
+that distance sayling they would haue been starued if no other shore had
+giuen them relefe. And that they were not of America is verye manifest, for
+vpon all the Est parte of that continent, beeing now thereby discouered, it
+hath not at any time beene perceiued that those people were euer accustomed
+to any order of shipping, which appeareth by the arriual of Colon vpon
+those coastes, for they had his shipping in such wonderfull admiration that
+they supposed him and his companie to haue descended from heauen, so rare
+and strange a thing was shipping in their eyes. Therefore those Indians
+could not bee of America safely to bee driuen vpon the coastes of Germany,
+the distance and impedimentes well considered.
+
+Then comming neither from Afric nor America, they must of necessitie come
+from Asia by the Noreast or Norwest passages. But it should seme that they
+came not by the Noreast to double the promontory Tabin, to bee forced
+through the Scithian Sea, and to haue good passage through the narrow
+straight of Noua Zemla and neuer to recouer any shore is a matter of great
+impossibilitie. Therefore it must heedes be concluded that they came by the
+North partes of America through that discouered sea of 950 leages, and that
+they were of those people which Francisco Vasques of Coronado discouered,
+all which premises considered there remaineth no more doubting but that the
+landes are disioyned and that there is a Nauigable passage by the Norwest,
+of God for vs alone ordained to our infinite happines and for the euer
+being glory of her maiestie, for then her stately seate of London should be
+the storehouse of Europe: the nurse of the world: and the renowne of
+Nations, in yielding all forraine naturall benifits, by an easie rate, in
+short time returned vnto vs, and in the fulnes of their natural perfection:
+by natural participation through the world of all naturall and artificiall
+benefites, for want whereof at this present the most part liue distressed:
+and by the excellent comoditie of her seate, the mightines of her trade,
+with force of shipping thereby arising, and most aboundant accesse and
+intercourse from all the Kingdomes of the worlde, then should the ydle hand
+bee scorned and plenty by industry in all this land should be proclamed.
+
+And therefore the passage prooued and the benefites to all most apparant,
+let vs no longer neglect our happines, but like Christians with grilling
+and voluntary spirits labour without fainting for this so excellent a
+benefit.
+
+
+To prooue by experience that the sea fryseth not.
+
+Hauing sufficiensly prooued that there is a passage without a land
+impediments to hinder the same, contrary to the first obiection, it nowe
+resteth that the other supposed impediments bee likewise answered. And
+firste as touching the frost and fresing of the seas, it is supposed that
+the frozen zone is not habitable, and seas innauigable by reason of the
+vehemencie of cold, by the diuine creator allotted to that part of the
+world, and we are drawn into that absurdity of this opinion by a
+coniectural reason of the sunnes far distance and long absence vnder the
+horizon of the greatest parte of that zone, whereby the working power of
+colde perfourmeth the fulnesse of his nature, not hauing any contrary
+disposition to hinder the same and when the Sunne by his presence should
+comfort that parte of the world, his beames are so far remoued from
+perpendicularitie by reason of his continuall neerenes to the horizon, as
+that the effectes thereof answere not the violence of the winters cold. And
+therefore those seas remayne for euer vndissolued. Which if it be so, that
+the nature of cold can congeale the seas, it is very likely that his first
+working power, beginneth vpon the vpper face of the waters, and so
+descending worketh his effect, which if it were, howe then commeth it to
+passe that shippes sayle by the North cape, to Saint Nicholas fiue degrees
+or more within the frozen zone, and finde the seas from pester of yse, the
+farther from the shore the clearer from yse. And myselfe likewise howe
+coulde I haue sayled to the septentrionall latitude of seuentie fiue
+degrees, being nine degrees within the frozen zone, betweene two lands
+where the sea was straightened not fortie leages broade in some places, and
+thereby restrained from the violent motion and set of the maine occian and
+yet founde the same Nauigable and free from yse not onely in the midst of
+the chanell, but also close aborde the estern shore by me name Desolation,
+and therefore what neede the repetition of authorities from writers, or
+wrested philosophical reasons, when playne experience maketh the matter so
+manifest, and yet I deny not but that I haue seene in some part of those
+seas, tow sortes of yse, in very great quantity, as a kind of yse by seamen
+name ylands of yse, being very high aboue the water, fortie and fiftie
+fadomes by estimation and higher, and euery of those haue beene seuen times
+as much vnder the water, which I haue proued by taking a peece of yse and
+haue put the same in a vessell of salt water, and still haue found the
+seuenth part thereof to bee aboue the water, into what forme soeuer I haue
+reduced the same, and this kind of yse is nothing but snow, which falleth
+in those great peeces, from the high mountains bordering close vpon the
+shore depe seas. (For all the sea coastes of Desolation are mountains of
+equall height with the pike of Tenerif with verye great vallies betweene
+them) which I haue seene incredible to bee reported, that vpon the toppe of
+some of these ylls of yse, there haue beene stones of more then one
+hundreth tonnes wayght, which in his fall, that snowe hath torne from the
+clyffe, and in falling maketh such an horible noyse as if there were one
+hundreth canons shot of at one instant, and this kind of yse is verye
+white, and freshe, and with shore winds is many times beaten far of into
+the seas, perhaps twentie leages and that is the farthest distance that
+they haue euer bin seene from the shore. The other kind is called flake
+yse, blue, very hard and thinne not aboue three fadomes thick at the
+farthest, and this kinde of yse bordreth close vpon the shore. And as the
+nature of heate with apt vessels diuideth the pure spirit from his grosse
+partes by the coning practice of distillation: so doth the colde in these
+regions deuide and congeale the fresh water from the salt, nere such shores
+where by the aboundance of freshe rivers, the saltnes of the sea is
+mittigated, and not else where, for all yse in general beeing dissolued is
+very fresh water, so that by the experience of all that haue euer trauelled
+towardes the North it is well knowne that the sea neuer fryseth, but wee
+know that the sea dissolueth this yse with great speede, for in twentie
+foure houres I haue seen an ylande of yse turne vp and downe, as the common
+phrase is, because it hath melted so fast vnder water that the heauier
+parte hathe beene vpwarde, which hath beene the cause of his so turning,
+for the heuiest part of all things swiming is by nature downwards, and
+therefore sith the sea is by his heate of power to dissolue yse, it is
+greatly against reason that the same should be frozen, so that the
+congealation of the seas can bee no hinderance to the execution of this
+passage, contrary to the former obiection, by late experience reprooued,
+yet if experience wanted in ordenary reason men should not suppose nature
+to bee monstrous, for if all such yse and snowe as congealeth and
+descendeth in the winter did not by natures benefit dissolue in the sommer,
+but that the cold were more actual then the heate, that difference of
+inequalitie bee it neuer so little would by time bread natures ouerthrowe,
+for if the one thousand parte of the yse which in winter is congealed, did
+the next sommer remayne vndissolued, that continual difference sithins the
+worldes creation, would not onely haue conuerted all those North Seas into
+yse, but would also by continuall accesse of snow haue extended himselfe
+aboue all the ayers regions by which reason all such exalations as should
+be drawn from the earth and seas within the temperate zones and by windes
+driuen into these stiffe regions, that moysture was no more to bee hoped
+for that by dissolution it should haue any returne, so that by time the
+world should be left waterlesse. And therefore how ridiculous this
+imagination of the seas frysing is, I refer to the worlds generall opinion.
+
+
+That the ayre in colde regions is tollerable.
+
+And now for a full answer of all obiections, if the ayre bee proued
+tollerable then this most excellent and commodious passage is without al
+contradiction to be perfourmed. And that the ayre is tollerable as well in
+the winter as in the Sommer is thus proued. The inhabitantes of Moscouia,
+Lapland, Swethland, Norway and Tartaria omit not to trauel for their
+commodity: in the deepest of winter, passing by sleades ouer the yse and
+congealed snowe being made very slipperie and compact like yse by reason of
+much wearing and trading, hauing the vse of a kind of stag by them called
+Reen to drawe those their sleades.
+
+Groynland (by me lately named Desolation) is likewise inhabited by a people
+of good stature and tractable conditions, it also mayntayneth diuers kinde
+of foules and beastes which I haue their seene, but know not their names,
+and these must trauell for their food in winter, and therefore the ayre is
+not intolerable in the extremest nature of coldnes: and for the quality
+thereof in Sommer by my owne experience I knowe that vpon the shore it is
+as hot there as it is at the ylls of cape de Verde in which place there is
+such aboundance of moskeetes, (a kind of gnat that is in India very
+offensiue and in great quantitie) as that we were stong with them like
+lepers, not beeing able to haue quiet being vpon the shore.
+
+And vnder the clyfe in the pooles vnto which the streames aryse not, I haue
+found salt in great plenty as whyte as the salt of Mayo congeled from the
+salt water which the spryng tyds bring into those poles, which could not be
+but by the benefit of a noble heat, of which salt I brought with me and
+gaue to master Secretory Walsingham and to master Sanderson, as a rare
+thing to be found in those parts and farther the same was of an
+extraordenary saltnes. And therefore it is an idle dreame that the ayre
+should there be insufferable, for ourselues haue with the water of those
+seas made salt, because we desired to know whether the benefit of the sunne
+were the cause of this cogulation, what better confirmation then can there
+be then this.
+
+Island is likewise inhabited and yeldeth haukes in great store, as falcons,
+Ierfalcons, lanardes and sparrow haukes, rauens, crowes, beares, hares and
+foxes, with horses and other kinde of cattell, vpon which coast in August
+and September the yse is vtterly dissolued, all which the premises are
+certainly verified by such as trade thither from Lubec, Hambro, Amsterdam
+and England yerely, then why should wee dread this fayned distemperature:
+from cold regions come our most costly furres as sables beeing esteemed for
+a principall ornament and the beastes that yeld us those furres are chiefly
+hunted in the winter, how grieuous then shall we thinke the winter to be,
+or howe insufferable the ayre, where this little tender beast liueth so
+well, and where the hunters may search the dennes and hauntes of such
+beastes through the woods and snow.
+
+Vpsaliensis affirmeth that he hath felt the Sommer nights in Gotland
+scarcely tollerable for heate, whereas in Rome he hath felt them cold.
+
+The Mountaynes of Norway and Swethland are fruitefull of mettalls in which
+siluer and copper are concoct and molten in veines, which may scarcely bee
+done with fornaces, by which reason also the vapors and hot exhalations
+pearcing the earth and the waters and through both those natures breathing
+forth into the ayre, tempereth the quantitie thereof making it tollerable,
+as wyttnes the huge bignes of whales in those seas, with the strength of
+body and long life of such beastes as liue on the land, which thing could
+not bee except all thinges were there comodiously nourished, by the benefit
+of the heauen and the ayre, for nothing that in time of increase is hindred
+by any iniury or that is euill seed all the time it liueth can prosper
+well.
+
+Also it is a thing vndoubtedly knowne by experience that vpon the coastes
+of newfounde land, (as such as the yse remayneth vndissolued vpon those
+shores,) the wind being esterly, comming from the seas, causeth very sharpe
+colde, and yet the same is sufferable, but comming from the shore, yt
+presently yeldeth heat aboundantly according to the true nature of the
+scituation of the place, whereby it plainly appeareth that the very breth
+of the yse is rather the cause of this cold, then the distempreture of the
+ayre.
+
+Wherefore if in winter where is aboundance of yse and snowe the ayre is so
+sufferable, as that traueling and hunting may be exercised how much rather
+may wee iudge the seas to be Nauigable, and that in the deepest of winter,
+where there is neither yse nor snow that may yeld any such damps or cold
+breathings to the anoiance of such as shall take these interprises in hand.
+And therefore the Summer in no sort to be feared, but some curious witt may
+obiect that the naturall anoyance of cold is preuented by reason of the
+trauell of the body with other artificiall prouisions to defend the fury
+thereof, as also the whot vapors which the earth may yeld, whereof
+experience vrgeth confession, but vpon the seas it cannot be sith it is a
+cold body subiect to yeld great dampes and cold brethinges most offensiue
+to nature. To the which I answere in the vniuersall knowledge of all
+creatures that God the most glorious incomprehensible and euer being sole
+creatour of all thinges visible, invisible, rationall, irrationall,
+momentory and eternall in his diuine prouidence hath made nothing
+vncommunicable, but hath giuen such order vnto all things, whereby euery
+thing may be tollerable to the next, the extremities of ellements consent
+with their next the ayre is grosse about the earth and water, but thinn and
+hot about the fyer, by this prouidence in nature the sea is very salt, and
+salt (sayth Plinie) yeldeth the fatnes of oyle, but oyle by a certayne
+natiue heate is of propertie agreeable to fire, then being all of such
+qualitie by reason of the saltnes thereof moueth and stirreth vp generatiue
+heate, &c. Whereby the sea hath a working force in the dissolution of yse
+for things of so great contrariety as heate and cold haue togeather no
+affinitye in coniunction, but the one must of necessitye auoyde, the seas
+not being able by the bandes of nature to step backe, doth therefore cause
+the coldnesse of the ayre (by reason of his naturall heate) to giue place,
+whereby extremities being auoyded, the ayre must of necessitie remayne
+temperate, for in nature the ayre is hote and moyst, the colde then being
+but accidentall is the soner auoided, and natures wrongs with ease
+redressed.
+
+
+That vnder the Pole is the place of greatest dignitie.
+
+Reason teacheth vs and experience confirmeth the same, that the Sun is the
+onely sufficient cause of heat through the whole world and therefore in
+such places where the Sunne hath longest continuance, the ayre there
+receueth the greatest impression of heat, as also in his absence it is in
+like sort afflicted with colde. And as the heate in all clymates is
+indurable, by the eternall ordinance of the creator, so likewise the cold
+is sufferable by his euerlasting decree, for otherwise nature should bee
+monstrous and his creation wast, as it hath beene ydly affirmed by the most
+Cosmographicall writers, distinguishing the sphere into fiue Zones haue
+concluded three of them to be wast, as vaynely created, the burning zone
+betweene the two tropikes, and the two frozen Zones, but experience hauing
+reprooued the grosenes of that errour it shall be needlesse to say further
+therein. For although in the burning Zone the sun beames are at such right
+angles as that by the actuall reuerberation thereof the lower region of the
+ayre is greatly by that reflexion warmed, yet his equall absence breadeth
+such mitigation as that there we find the ayre tollerable, and the
+countries pleasant and fruitfull, being populos and well inhabited: so
+likewise vnder the pole being the center of the supposed frozen Zone,
+during the time that the Sunne is in the South signes, which is from the
+thirteenth of September vnto the 10 of March, it is there more cold then in
+any place of the world, because the Sunne in all that time doth neuer
+appeare aboue the Horyzon, but during the time that the Sunne is in the
+North signes which is from the tenth of March vnto the thirteenth of
+September he is in continuall view to all such as posses that place, by
+which his continuall presence, he worketh that notable effect, as that
+therby all the force of frysing is wholy redressed and vtterly taken away,
+working then and there more actuall then in any other part of the world. In
+which place there continuall day from the Sunne rising to the sunne setting
+is equall with twenty sixe weekes and fiue dayes, after our rate: and their
+night is equall with twenty fiue weekes and three dayes such as we haue, so
+that our whole yeere is with them but one night and one day, a wonderfull
+difference from al the rest of the world, and therefore no doubt but those
+people haue a wonderfull excellencie and an exceeding prorogatiue aboue all
+nations of the earth and this which is more to be noted. In all other
+places of the world the absence and presence of the Sun is in equall
+proportion of time, hauing as much night as day, but vnder the Pole their
+artificiall day (that is the continuall presence of the Sunne before he
+sett) is nine of our naturall dayes or two hundreth 16 houres longer then
+is their night, whereby it appeareth that they haue the life, light and
+comfort of nature in a higher measure then all the nations of the earth.
+How blessed then may we thinke this nation to be: for they are in
+perpetuall light, and neuer know what darknesse meaneth, by the benefit of
+twylight and full moones, as the learned in Astronomie doe very well knowe,
+which people if they haue the notice of their eternitie by the comfortable
+light of the Gospel, then are they blessed and of all nations most blessed.
+Why then doe we neglect the search of this excellent discouery, agaynst
+which there can be nothing sayd to hinder the same. Why doe we refuse to
+see the dignity of Gods Creation, sith it hath pleased his diuine Maiestie
+to place vs the nerest neighbor therevnto. I know there is no true
+Englishman that can in conscience refuse to be a contributer to procure
+this so great a happines to his country, whereby not onely the Prince and
+mightie men of the land shall be highly renowned, but also the Merchant,
+tradesman and artificer mightily inriched.
+
+And now as touching the last obiection that the want of skill in Nauigation
+with curious instrumentes, should be the hinderance or ouerthrow of this
+action. I holde that to bee so friuolous as not worth the answering, for it
+is wel knowne that we haue globes in the most excellent perfection of arte,
+and haue the vse of them in as exquisite sort, as master Robert Hues in his
+book of the globes vse, lately published hath at large made knowne, and for
+Horizontall paradox and great circle sayling I am myself a witnesse in the
+behalfe of many, that we are not ignorant of them, as lately I haue made
+knowne in a briefe treatis of Nauigation naming it the Seamans Secreats.
+And therfore this as the rest breadeth no hinderance to this most
+commodious discouery.
+
+
+What benefits would growe vnto Englande by this passage being discouered,
+
+The benefits which may growe by this discouery, are copious and of two
+sorts, a benifit spirituall and a benifit corporall. Both which sith by the
+awes of God and nature we are bound to regard, yet principally we are
+admonished first to seeke the Kingdome of God and the righteousnes thereof
+and all thinges shall be giuen vnto vs. And therfore in seeking the
+Kingdome of God we are not onely tied to the depe search of Gods sacred
+word and to liue within the perfect lymits of Christianity, but also by al
+meanes we are bound to multiply, and increase the flocke of the faithfull.
+Which by this discouery wil be most aboundantly perfourmed to the
+preseruation of many thousands which now most miserably are couered vnder
+the lothsome vayle of ignorance, neither can we in any sort doubt of their
+recouery by this passage discouered, Gods prouidence therein being
+considered who most mercifully sayth by the mouth of his prophet Esaias 66
+I will come to gather all people and tongues, then shall they come and see
+my glory, of them that shall be saued. I will send some to the Gentils in
+the sea and the yls far of that haue not heard speak of me, and haue not
+sene my glory, shall preach my peace among the Gentiles.
+
+And in this 65 Chapter he farther sayth, They seeke me that hitherto haue
+not asked for me, they find me that hitherto haue not sought me.
+
+And againe chapter 49 I wil make waies vpon al my mountains and my
+footpathes shall be exalted, and behold these shall come from farre, some
+from the North and West, some from the land of Symis which is in the South.
+Then sith it is so appointed that there shal be one shepheard and one
+flocke, what hindreth vs of England, (being by Gods mercy for the same
+purpose at this present most aptly prepared,) not to attempt that which God
+himselfe hath appointed to be performed, there is no doubt but that wee of
+England are this saued people by the eternal and infallible presence of the
+Lord predestinated to be sent vnto these Gentiles in the sea, to those ylls
+and femous Kingdoms ther to preach the peace of the Lorde, for are not we
+onely set vpon Mount Sion to giue light to all the rest of the world, haue
+not we the true handmayd of the Lord to rule vs, vnto whom the eternall
+maiestie of God hath reueled his truth and supreme power of excellencye, by
+whom then shall the truth be preached, but by them vnto whom the truth
+shall be reueled, it is onely we therefore that must be these shining
+messengers of the Lord and none but we for as the prophet sayth, O how
+beautifull are the feet of the messenger that bringeth the message from the
+mountain, that proclameth peace, that bringeth the good tidings and
+preacheth health and sayth to Sion thy God is King, so that hereby the
+spirituall benefit arising by this discouery is most apparant, for which if
+there were no other cause wee are all bound to labour with purse and minde
+for the discouery of this notable passage. And nowe as touching the
+corporall and worldly benefits which will thereby arise, our owne late
+experience leadeth vs to the full knowledge thereof, as by the communitie
+of trade groweth the mightines of riches, so by the kinde and guide of such
+tradinges may grow the multiplication of such benifits, with assurance how
+the same may in the best sort be continued. In the consideration whereof it
+is first to bee regarded with what commodities our owne country aboundeth
+either naturall or artificiall, what quantity may be spared, and wher the
+same may with the easiest rate be gained, and how in his best nature vnto
+vs returned, all which by this passage shall be vnto vs most plentifully
+effected, and not onely that, but this also which is most to be regarded
+that in our thus trading wee shall by no meanes inrich the next adioyning
+states vnto vs, for riches bread dread, and pouertie increaseth feare, but
+here I cease fering to offend, yet it is a question whether it were better
+by an easy rate to vent our commodities far of or by a more plentifull
+gayne to passe them to our neerer neighbours, and those therby more
+inriched then ourselues, the premises considered wee finde our country to
+abound with woll, and wollen cloth, with lead, tin, copper and yron,
+matters of great moment, wee also knowe our soyle to be fertill, and would
+if trad did so permit haue equal imploiment with any of our neighbours, in
+linnen cloth, fustians, seys, grograms or any other forraine artificiall
+commodities, besides the excellent labours of the artsman, either in
+metallyne mechanicall faculties, or other artificiall ornaments, whereof
+India is well knowne to receiue all that Europe can afford, rating our
+commodities in the highest esteeme of valewe, which by this passage is
+speedily perfourmed, and then none of these should lie dead vpon our handes
+as now they doe, neither should we bee then ignorant as now we are in many
+excellent practices into which by trade wee shoulde bee drawne. And by the
+same passage in this ample vent, we should also at the first hand receiue
+all Indian commodities both naturall and artificial in a far greter measure
+by an easier rate and in better condition, then nowe they are by many
+exchaunges brought vnto vs, then would all nations of Europe repayre vnto
+England not only for these forraine merchandizes by reason of their plenty,
+perfection and easy rates, but also to passe away that which God in nature
+hath bestowed vpon them and their countrie, wherby her maiestie and her
+highnes successors for euer, should be monarks of the earth and commaunders
+of the Seas, through the aboundance of trade her coustomes would be
+mightily augmented, her state highly inriched, and her force of shipping
+greatly aduanced, as that thereby shee should be to all nations moste
+dredful, and we her subiects through imploiment should imbrace aboundance
+and be clothed with plenty. The glory whereof would be a deadly horrer to
+her aduersaries, increase friendly loue with al and procure her maiestie
+stately and perpetuall peace, for it is no small aduantage that ariseth to
+a state by the mightines of trade: being by necessity linked to no other
+nation, the same also beeing in commodities of the highest esteeme, as
+gold, siluer, stones of price, iuels, pearls, spice, drugs, silkes raw and
+wrought, veluetts, cloth of gold, besides many other commodities with vs of
+rare and high esteeme, whereof as yet our countrie is by nature depriued,
+al which India doth yeld at reasonable rates in great aboundance receiuing
+ours in the highest esteeme, so that hereby plenty retourning by trade
+abroade, and no smale quantity prouided by industry at home, all want then
+banished in the aboundance of her maiesties royalty, so through dred in
+glory, peace and loue, her maiesty should be the commaunding light of the
+world, and we her subiects the stars of wonder to al nations of the earth.
+Al which the premises considered it is impossible that any true English
+hart should be staied from willing contribution to the performance of this
+so excellent a discouery, the Lords and subiectes spirituall for the sole
+publication of Gods glorious gospell. And the Lords and subiectes temporal
+for the renowne of their prince and glory of their nation should be
+thervnto most vehemently effected. Which when it shall so please God in the
+mightines of his mercy, I beseech him to effect. Amen.
+
+
+END OF VOL. VI.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Principal Navigations, Voyages,
+Traffiques, and Discoveries of The English Nation, v. 6, by Richard Hakluyt
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, V6 ***
+
+This file should be named 8107-8.txt or 8107-8.zip
+
+Produced by Karl Hagen <kthagen@polysyllabic.com>
+
+Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we usually do not
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance
+of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing.
+Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections,
+even years after the official publication date.
+
+Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til
+midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement.
+The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at
+Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month.  A
+preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment
+and editing by those who wish to do so.
+
+Most people start at our Web sites at:
+https://gutenberg.org or
+http://promo.net/pg
+
+These Web sites include award-winning information about Project
+Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new
+eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!).
+
+
+Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement
+can get to them as follows, and just download by date.  This is
+also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the
+indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an
+announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter.
+
+http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or
+ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03
+
+Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90
+
+Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want,
+as it appears in our Newsletters.
+
+
+Information about Project Gutenberg (one page)
+
+We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work.  The
+time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours
+to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright
+searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc.   Our
+projected audience is one hundred million readers.  If the value
+per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2
+million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text
+files per month:  1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+
+We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002
+If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total
+will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end.
+
+The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks!
+This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers,
+which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users.
+
+Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated):
+
+eBooks Year Month
+
+    1  1971 July
+   10  1991 January
+  100  1994 January
+ 1000  1997 August
+ 1500  1998 October
+ 2000  1999 December
+ 2500  2000 December
+ 3000  2001 November
+ 4000  2001 October/November
+ 6000  2002 December*
+ 9000  2003 November*
+10000  2004 January*
+
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created
+to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people
+and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut,
+Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois,
+Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts,
+Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New
+Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio,
+Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South
+Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West
+Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming.
+
+We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones
+that have responded.
+
+As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list
+will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states.
+Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state.
+
+In answer to various questions we have received on this:
+
+We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally
+request donations in all 50 states.  If your state is not listed and
+you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have,
+just ask.
+
+While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are
+not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting
+donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to
+donate.
+
+International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about
+how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made
+deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are
+ways.
+
+Donations by check or money order may be sent to:
+
+Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+PMB 113
+1739 University Ave.
+Oxford, MS 38655-4109
+
+Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment
+method other than by check or money order.
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by
+the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN
+[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154.  Donations are
+tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law.  As fund-raising
+requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be
+made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+You can get up to date donation information online at:
+
+https://www.gutenberg.org/donation.html
+
+
+***
+
+If you can't reach Project Gutenberg,
+you can always email directly to:
+
+Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com>
+
+Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message.
+
+We would prefer to send you information by email.
+
+
+**The Legal Small Print**
+
+
+(Three Pages)
+
+***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START***
+Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers.
+They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with
+your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from
+someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our
+fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement
+disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how
+you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to.
+
+*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK
+By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
+eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept
+this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive
+a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by
+sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person
+you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical
+medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request.
+
+ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS
+This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks,
+is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart
+through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project").
+Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright
+on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and
+distribute it in the United States without permission and
+without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth
+below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook
+under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark.
+
+Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market
+any commercial products without permission.
+
+To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable
+efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain
+works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any
+medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other
+things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
+intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged
+disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer
+codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
+
+LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES
+But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below,
+[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may
+receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims
+all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including
+legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR
+UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT,
+INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE
+OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of
+receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any)
+you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that
+time to the person you received it from. If you received it
+on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and
+such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement
+copy. If you received it electronically, such person may
+choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to
+receive it electronically.
+
+THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS
+TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
+PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or
+the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the
+above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you
+may have other legal rights.
+
+INDEMNITY
+You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation,
+and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated
+with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
+texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including
+legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the
+following that you do or cause:  [1] distribution of this eBook,
+[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook,
+or [3] any Defect.
+
+DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm"
+You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by
+disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this
+"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg,
+or:
+
+[1]  Only give exact copies of it.  Among other things, this
+     requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the
+     eBook or this "small print!" statement.  You may however,
+     if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable
+     binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form,
+     including any form resulting from conversion by word
+     processing or hypertext software, but only so long as
+     *EITHER*:
+
+     [*]  The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and
+          does *not* contain characters other than those
+          intended by the author of the work, although tilde
+          (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may
+          be used to convey punctuation intended by the
+          author, and additional characters may be used to
+          indicate hypertext links; OR
+
+     [*]  The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at
+          no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent
+          form by the program that displays the eBook (as is
+          the case, for instance, with most word processors);
+          OR
+
+     [*]  You provide, or agree to also provide on request at
+          no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the
+          eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC
+          or other equivalent proprietary form).
+
+[2]  Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this
+     "Small Print!" statement.
+
+[3]  Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the
+     gross profits you derive calculated using the method you
+     already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  If you
+     don't derive profits, no royalty is due.  Royalties are
+     payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation"
+     the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were
+     legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent
+     periodic) tax return.  Please contact us beforehand to
+     let us know your plans and to work out the details.
+
+WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO?
+Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of
+public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
+in machine readable form.
+
+The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time,
+public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses.
+Money should be paid to the:
+"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or
+software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at:
+hart@pobox.com
+
+[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only
+when distributed free of all fees.  Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by
+Michael S. Hart.  Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be
+used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be
+they hardware or software or any other related product without
+express permission.]
+
+*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END*
+
diff --git a/8107-8.zip b/8107-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f1763c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/8107-8.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f9a9f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #8107 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/8107)